11042016UNOBJAKOFINALHACEIA

FINAL EIA REPORT
ENVIRONMENTAL
IMPACT
ASSESSMENT
FOR
PROPOSED SYNTHETIC RESIN MANUFACTURING UNIT
(12000 MTPA) AT VILLAGE - ISWARIPUR, GRAM
PANCHAYAT- BANDIPUR, P.S - KHARDAH, DISTRICT - 24
PARGANAS (NORTH), WEST BENGAL.
M/ S HINDUSTHAN
ADHESIVES & CHEMICALS
P ROJECT R EFERENCE N UMBER :
IN/ES-EIA/2014-95
(V ERSION 1.0)
PREPARED BY:
SGS India Private Limited
226 Udyog Vihar Phase I
Gurgaon 122 016, Haryana, India
Tel: +91 124 6776300
Fax: +91 124 6776403/04
http://www.sgsgroup.in/
WHEN YOU NEED TO BE SURE
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT FOR PROPOSED SYNTHETIC RESIN

MANUFACTURING UNIT (12000 MTPA) AT VILLAGE - ISWARIPUR, GRAM
PANCHAYAT- BANDIPUR, P.S - KHARDAH, DISTRICT - 24 PARGANAS (NORTH),
WEST BENGAL
2|Page

WEST BENGAL
3|Page

WEST BENGAL
CONTENTS
ABBREVIATIONS ....................................................................................................................................................... 9
LIST OF TABLES ...................................................................................................................................................... 11
LIST OF FIGURES .................................................................................................................................................... 14
TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR) .............................................................................................................................. 19
TOR COMPLIANCE .................................................................................................................................................. 24
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................. 33
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
Background .......................................................................................................................................................... 33
Purpose of the Report.......................................................................................................................................... 33
Identification of Project and Project Proponent ................................................................................................. 35
Justification of the Project................................................................................................................................... 36
Location and Accessibility .................................................................................................................................. 37
Siting Criteria........................................................................................................................................................ 37
Site Analysis......................................................................................................................................................... 43
Executive Summary of the Proposed Plant ........................................................................................................ 44
Regulatory Framework......................................................................................................................................... 46
Approach and Methodology ................................................................................................................................ 46
Environment Monitoring and Site Surveys ......................................................................................................... 48
Structure of the Report ........................................................................................................................................ 51
CHAPTER 2: PROJECT DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................. 54

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.6
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.9.4
2.9.5
2.10
2.10.1
2.10.2
2.10.3
2.10.4
2.10.5
2.10.6
2.11
Project Details ...................................................................................................................................................... 54

Salient Features of the Project ............................................................................................................................ 55
Distance from Polluted area ................................................................................................................................ 55
Storage, Source And Transportation Details of Raw Materials ......................................................................... 56
Availability of Raw Materials ............................................................................................................................... 59
Equipments required for Resin unit with Capacity ............................................................................................ 60
Details of the Proposed Plant.............................................................................................................................. 61
Manpower Requirement....................................................................................................................................... 62
Project Cost .......................................................................................................................................................... 63
Manufacturing Process........................................................................................................................................ 65
Manufacturing Process of Phenol Formaldehyde (PF) Resin............................................................................ 65
Manufacturing Process of Melamine Formaldehyde (MF) Resin....................................................................... 72
Manufacturing Process of Urea Formaldehyde (UF) Resin ............................................................................... 75
Manufacturing of Furan resin .............................................................................................................................. 80
Manufacturing of Catalyst Acid Base............................................................................................................... 84
Catalyst- Ester Base............................................................................................................................................. 86
Utilities & Auxiliary Facilities............................................................................................................................... 88
Power .................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Fuel ....................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Water..................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Boiler..................................................................................................................................................................... 91
Cooling Tower ...................................................................................................................................................... 91
Source of Pollution and Control Measures......................................................................................................... 91
Water Pollution & Management ........................................................................................................................... 91
Air Pollution Management ................................................................................................................................... 95
Hazardous and Non Hazardous Waste Generation & Disposal Method ........................................................... 95
Noise Pollution and Control system ................................................................................................................... 96
Green belt Development Plan.............................................................................................................................. 96
Safety & Occupational Measures for Storage, Handling of Raw materials & Products ................................... 97
Quality Control Plan............................................................................................................................................. 98
CHAPTER 3: DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT......................................................................................... 100

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 100

Methodology of Conducting Baseline Study.................................................................................................... 101
Environmental Setting of the study area .......................................................................................................... 101
Parameters for study ......................................................................................................................................... 102
4|Page

WEST BENGAL
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.3.1
3.5.4
3.5.4.1
3.5.4.2
3.5.5
3.5.6
3.6
3.6.1
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.7.4
3.7.5
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
3.8.6
3.8.7
3.9
3.9.1
3.9.2
3.9.3
3.9.4
3.10
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.10.4
3.10.5
3.11
3.11.1
3.11.2
3.11.3
3.11.4
3.11.4.1
3.11.4.2
3.11.4.3
3.11.4.4
3.11.4.5
3.11.5
3.11.5.1
3.11.5.2
3.11.5.3
3.11.5.4
3.11.5.5
Land Environment.............................................................................................................................................. 103

Topography ........................................................................................................................................................ 103
Geology............................................................................................................................................................... 103
Soil Quality ......................................................................................................................................................... 104
Results and Discussions ................................................................................................................................... 107
Natural Hazard.................................................................................................................................................... 109
Seismicity of the study area .............................................................................................................................. 109
Wind & Cyclone Hazard ..................................................................................................................................... 110
Geo hydrology and Drainage pattern................................................................................................................ 112
Land Use pattern ................................................................................................................................................ 114
Water Resource Quality ..................................................................................................................................... 118
Results & Discussions....................................................................................................................................... 120
Meteorology and Climate................................................................................................................................... 125
Climatic condition .............................................................................................................................................. 125
Methodology....................................................................................................................................................... 125
Regional Meteorology........................................................................................................................................ 126
Site Specific Micro-Meteorology ....................................................................................................................... 129
Atmospheric Inversion & Mixing Height ........................................................................................................... 133
Ambient Air Quality............................................................................................................................................ 134
Ambient Air Sampling ........................................................................................................................................ 134
AAQM Monitoring Locations Selection............................................................................................................. 134
Methodology of Monitoring and Analysis......................................................................................................... 134
Sampling and Analytical Techniques................................................................................................................ 135
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations ....................................................................................................... 135
Results of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring....................................................................................................... 138
Chemical characterization of RSPM.................................................................................................................. 141
Noise Environment............................................................................................................................................. 141
Identification of Sampling Locations ................................................................................................................ 142
Methods of monitoring....................................................................................................................................... 143
Parameters measured during monitoring......................................................................................................... 144
Results and Discussions ................................................................................................................................... 144
Ecological Environment..................................................................................................................................... 145
Objectives........................................................................................................................................................... 146
Methodology....................................................................................................................................................... 148
Floristic composition ......................................................................................................................................... 151
Faunal Communities .......................................................................................................................................... 159
Aquatic Ecology ................................................................................................................................................. 163
Socio Economic Environment........................................................................................................................... 165
The study area.................................................................................................................................................... 165
Methodology....................................................................................................................................................... 166
North 24 Parganas District................................................................................................................................. 167
Baseline Socio-Economic Status of the study area ......................................................................................... 168
Demographic Profile .......................................................................................................................................... 168
Infrastructure Resource Base ........................................................................................................................... 170
Economic Resource Base ................................................................................................................................. 170
Cultural and Aesthetic Attributes...................................................................................................................... 172
Medical & Public Health Facilities ..................................................................................................................... 173
Socio-economic survey ..................................................................................................................................... 173
Sampling Method ............................................................................................................................................... 173
Outcome of Socio-economic survey................................................................................................................. 174
Awareness and Opinion of People about the Project ...................................................................................... 175
Economical Benefits .......................................................................................................................................... 175
Health Care and Drinking Water Facility........................................................................................................... 175
CHAPTER 4: ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES ............................. 178

4.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.3.1
4.2.3.2
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.6.1
4.2.6.2
4.2.7
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 178

Anticipated Environmental Impacts .................................................................................................................. 182
Topography and Physiographic ........................................................................................................................ 182
Impact on Soil Quality........................................................................................................................................ 182
Water Resources ................................................................................................................................................ 185
Surface Water Resource .................................................................................................................................... 185
Ground Water Resources .................................................................................................................................. 185
Water Quality ...................................................................................................................................................... 187
Climatology And Meteorology........................................................................................................................... 188
Air Environment ................................................................................................................................................. 188
Air Pollutants Dispersion Modeling for Prediction of impacts on Ambient Air Quality ................................. 190
Impact of the Transport of the Raw Materials and End Products on the Surrounding Environment............ 198
Impact on Noise Environment ........................................................................................................................... 199
5|Page

WEST BENGAL
4.2.7.1
4.2.8
4.2.9
4.2.10
4.2.11
4.2.12
4.3
Resultant Noise Level ........................................................................................................................................ 200

Impact on Land Environment & Aesthetics ...................................................................................................... 203
Impacts due to Waste Disposal ......................................................................................................................... 204
Impact on Flora and Fauna ................................................................................................................................ 204
Occupational Health & safety ............................................................................................................................ 206
Socio Economic Impacts ................................................................................................................................... 207
Impact Evaluation............................................................................................................................................... 210
CHAPTER 5: ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES ...................................................................................................... 214

5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 214

Project Alternative.............................................................................................................................................. 214
Without Project Alternative................................................................................................................................ 214
With Project Alternative ..................................................................................................................................... 214
Analysis Of Alternatives .................................................................................................................................... 215
Techno-Economic Considerations.................................................................................................................... 215
Available Infrastructure ..................................................................................................................................... 215
Environmental Consideration............................................................................................................................ 216
Alternatives for Technologies ........................................................................................................................... 216
Fuel Alternatives ................................................................................................................................................ 216
Alternatives For Resource Optimization/ Recycling and Reuse ..................................................................... 216
CHAPTER 6: ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME .......................................................................... 219

6.1
6.2
6.2.1
6.3
6.4
6.5
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 219

Objectives of the Environmental Monitoring.................................................................................................... 219
Waste Minimization, Recycling-reuse-recover techniques and Natural resource conservation................... 220
Environmental Monitoring ................................................................................................................................. 220
Action plan for Environmental Monitoring ....................................................................................................... 221
Audits and Inspections ...................................................................................................................................... 222
CHAPTER 7: RISK ANALYSIS AND DISASTER MANANGEMENT PLAN........................................................... 226

7.1
7.2
7.2.1
7.3
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.8.1
7.8.2
7.8.3
7.8.4
7.9
7.9.1
7.9.2
7.10
7.10.1
7.10.2
7.11
7.11.1
7.11.2
7.11.3
7.11.4
7.11.5
7.11.5.1
7.11.5.2
7.11.6
7.11.7
7.11.8
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 226

Hazard Identification .......................................................................................................................................... 226
Hazardous Materials Stored at the Plant .......................................................................................................... 226
Characteristics of Hazardous Material.............................................................................................................. 228
Hazards From Storage and Handling of Hazardous Materials......................................................................... 238
Pool Fire.............................................................................................................................................................. 238
Jet Fire ................................................................................................................................................................ 238
Vapour Cloud Explosion.................................................................................................................................... 238
Flash Fire ............................................................................................................................................................ 238
Hazardous Conditions Due To Release Of Hazardous Materials .................................................................... 239
Thermal Effects .................................................................................................................................................. 239
Delayed Ignition & Explosion ............................................................................................................................ 239
Hazards Due to Loss of Containment ............................................................................................................... 240
Selected Scenarios For Consequence Analysis .............................................................................................. 241
Consequence Analysis ...................................................................................................................................... 241
Model Used For Consequence Analysis ........................................................................................................... 241
Consequence Analysis For Release Scenarios................................................................................................ 242
Release of Phenol Catastrophic Rupture of 10 KL Tank.................................................................................. 242
Release of Formaldehyde from Catastrophic Rupture of 10 KL Tank ............................................................ 245
Risk Reduction Measures for Operation of Proposed HAC Plant ................................................................... 248
Risk Mitigation Measures for Phenol ................................................................................................................ 249
Risk Mitigation Measure for Formaldehyde ...................................................................................................... 250
Risk Mitigation Measures for Spills .................................................................................................................. 251
Chemical Spillage Management ........................................................................................................................ 251
Risk Mitigation Measure to Minimize Risk ........................................................................................................ 256
Disaster Management Plan................................................................................................................................ 260
Emergency Response Plan................................................................................................................................ 260
Emergency Control Plan.................................................................................................................................... 260
Communication Facilities .................................................................................................................................. 261
Declaring Emergency......................................................................................................................................... 261
Officers Authorized to Give Disaster Alarm ..................................................................................................... 261
Shift In-charge of Concerned Plant ................................................................................................................... 261
The Outside Emergency Services ..................................................................................................................... 262
Emergency Control Center (ECC) ..................................................................................................................... 262
Roles & Responsibility of Key Personnel ......................................................................................................... 265
Emergency Assembly Point .............................................................................................................................. 270
6|Page

WEST BENGAL
7.11.9
7.11.10
7.12
7.13
Mock & Fire Drill ................................................................................................................................................. 270

Controlling The Situation................................................................................................................................... 270
MSDS of Formaldehyde ..................................................................................................................................... 275
MSDS of Phenol ................................................................................................................................................. 283
CHAPTER 8: PROJECT BENEFITS ....................................................................................................................... 290

8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
General................................................................................................................................................................ 290
Direct Benefits.................................................................................................................................................... 291
Socio-economic Benefits................................................................................................................................... 291
Employment Opportunity .................................................................................................................................. 291
Economic Benefits ............................................................................................................................................. 291
CHAPTER 9: ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN...................................................................................... 293

9.1
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 293
9.2
Purpose of Environmental Management Plan (EMP) ....................................................................................... 293
9.3
Environment, Health and Safety (EHS) ............................................................................................................. 294
9.4
Environmental Management Cell ...................................................................................................................... 294
9.5
Environmental Management Plan for Construction Phase.............................................................................. 296
9.5.1
EMP for Water Environment .............................................................................................................................. 296
9.5.2
EMP for Air Environment ................................................................................................................................... 296
9.5.3
EMP for Solid Waste Management .................................................................................................................... 297
9.5.4
EMP for Noise Environment .............................................................................................................................. 297
9.5.5
EMP for Soil & Land Environment..................................................................................................................... 297
9.5.6
EMP for Ecological Environment ...................................................................................................................... 298
9.5.7
EMP for Socio-Economic Environment ............................................................................................................ 298
9.6
Environmental Management Plan for Operation Phase ................................................................................... 298
9.6.1
EMP for Air Environment ................................................................................................................................... 298
9.6.2
EMP for Water Environment .............................................................................................................................. 300
9.6.3
EMP for Noise Environment .............................................................................................................................. 302
9.6.4
EMP for Solid/Hazardous Waste........................................................................................................................ 302
9.6.5
EMP For Ecological Environment ..................................................................................................................... 304
9.6.5.1 Peripheral Greenbelt and Landscaping ............................................................................................................ 304
9.6.5.2 Greenbelt Development ..................................................................................................................................... 304
9.6.6
EMP for Socio-Economic Environment ............................................................................................................ 308
9.6.7
Health, Safety & Environment Management ..................................................................................................... 309
9.6.8
Energy Conservation ......................................................................................................................................... 311
9.6.9
Natural Resource Conservation ........................................................................................................................ 316
9.6.10
Best Manufacturing practice and Safe Practice for handling storage, transportation and Unloading of
the Hazardous Chemicals.................................................................................................................................................. 316
9.6.10.1 Best Manufacturing Practices ........................................................................................................................... 317
9.6.10.2 Safe Practices..................................................................................................................................................... 317
9.7
Occupational Health & Safety............................................................................................................................ 320
9.7.1
Details of Occupational Health Program .......................................................................................................... 320
9.7.2
Occupational Health Surveillance Programme................................................................................................. 320
9.7.3
Evaluation of Exposure of Chemical during Pre-placement and Periodical Medical Monitoring.................. 321
9.7.4
Liver Function Tests (LFT) during Pre-placement and Periodical Examination............................................. 321
9.7.5
Details of Occupational Health Surveillance Programme................................................................................ 322
9.7.6
Treatment of Workers Affected by Phenol........................................................................................................ 323
9.8
Corporate Environment Policy .......................................................................................................................... 323
9.9
Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC) ............................................................................................................... 324
9.10
Budgetary Provisions for EMP Implementation ............................................................................................... 325
9.11
Conclusions........................................................................................................................................................ 326
CHAPTER 10: ADDITIONAL STUDIES .................................................................................................................. 328

10.1
10.2
R & R Action Plans............................................................................................................................................. 328

Public Consultation............................................................................................................................................ 328
CHAPTER 11: DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ................................................................................................. 333

APPENDIX 1: NATIONAL AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS ...................................................................... 341
APPENDIX 2: DRINKING WATER STANDARDS (IS 10500: 2012) ...................................................................... 343
APPENDIX 3: AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS IN RESPECT OF NOISE ................................................. 345
7|Page

WEST BENGAL
APPENDIX 1: PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE PROPOSED PLANT AREA .................................................................. 347
ANNEXURE 2: DECLARATION REGARDING LITIGATION.................................................................................. 348
ANNEXURE 3: GROUND WATER PERMISSION .................................................................................................. 349
ANNEXURE 4: ADVERTISEMENT FOR PUBLIC HEARING................................................................................. 351
ANNEXURE 5: MOM OF PUBLIC HEARING ......................................................................................................... 352
8|Page

WEST BENGAL
ABBREVI ATIONS
ACGIH
American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
APHA
American Public Health Association
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
AWWA
American Water Works Association
APTI
Air Pollution Tolerance Index
BDL
Below Detection Level
BIS
Bureau of Indian Standards
BOD
Biological Oxygen Demand
COD
Chemical Oxygen Demand
CPCB
Central Pollution Control Board
DO
Dissolved Oxygen
EC
Electrical Conductivity
EIA
Environmental Impact Assessment
EMP
Environmental Management Plan
ETP
Effluent Treatment Plant
GLC
Ground Level Concentration
GIS
Geographic information system
GPS
Geographical Positioning System
HAZOP
Hazard Operability
HDPE
High Density Poly Ethylene
HSD
High Speed Diesel
HSE
Health Safety & Environment
ICAR
Indian Council of Agricultural Research
IDLH
Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health
ISCST
Industrial Source Complex Short Term
ISRS
International Safety Rating System
IUCN
International Union for Conservation of Nature
LDO
Light diesel oil
MOC
Material of Construction
MOEF&CC
Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change
MSDS
Material Safety Data Sheet
MSL
Mean Sea Level
MTPA
Metric Ton Per Annum
NABET
National Accreditation Board of Education and Training
NABL
National Accreditation Board for Testing and Calibration Laboratories
ND
Not Detected
NRSC
National Remote Sensing Centre
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PAH
Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbon
9|Page

WEST BENGAL
PHC
Public Health Centre
PPE
Personal Protective Equipment
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
QCI
Quality Council of India
SEIAA
State Environmental Impact Assessment Authority
SEAC
State Level Expert Appraisal Committee
SS
Suspended Solids
TDS
Total Dissolved Solids
TLV
Threshold Limit Value
TOR
Terms of Reference
TPD
Tons per Day
TPH
Tons per Hour
TSS
Total Suspended Solids
USDA
U.S. Department of Agriculture
USEPA
United States Environmental Protection Agency
WBPCB
West Bengal Pollution Control Board
WBSEDCL
West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited
10 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
LIST
OF
T AB LE S
T ABLE 1.1: EIA C ATEGORY

T ABLE 1.2: D EMAND OF S YNTHETIC RESINS IN VARIOUS INDUSTRIES
T ABLE 1.3: S ITING C RITERIA
T ABLE 1.4: S ALIENT F EATURES OF THE P ROPOSED P LANT
T ABLE 1.5: B ASELINE D ATA C OLLECTION WITHIN 10 KM R ADIUS S TUDY A REA
T ABLE 2.1: P ROPOSED P RODUCTION CAPACITY
T ABLE 2.2: S ALIENT F EATURES O F T HE P ROJECT
T ABLE 2.3: S TORAGE , S OURCE A ND T RANSPORTATION D ETAILS O F R AW M ATERIALS
T ABLE 2.4: P HYSICAL A ND C HEMICAL P ROPERTIES O F T HE R AW M ATERIALS
T ABLE 2.5: D ETAILS OF R AW M ATERIALS (S OURCE , Q UANTITY AND M ODE OF T RANSPORTATION )
T ABLE 2.6: E QUIPMENTS D ETAILS FOR P ROPOSED P LANT
T ABLE 2.7: P LANT A REA D ETAILS
T ABLE 2.8: M ANPOWER R EQUIREMENT
T ABLE 2.9: E CONOMIC O UTLINE OF THE PROJECT
T ABLE 2.11: D ETAILS O F F UEL
T ABLE 2.12: F RESH W ATER R EQUIREMENT
T ABLE 2.13: W ASTE W ATER G ENERATION
T ABLE 2.14: T ECHNICAL D ETAILS O F B OILER
T ABLE 2.15: D ETAILS OF E FFLUENT T REATMENT P LANT U NITS
T ABLE 2.16: S TACK D ETAILS
T ABLE 2.17: W ASTES G ENERATION , H AZARDOUS W ASTE G ENERATION
T ABLE 3.1: E NVIRONMENTAL S ENSITIVITY
T ABLE 3.2: L OCATION DETAILS OF S OIL SAMPLING
T ABLE 3.3: S TANDARD C LASSIFICATION OF S OIL
T ABLE 3.4: R ESULTS OF S OIL S AMPLE A NALYSIS
T ABLE 3.5: L AND U SE P ATTERN OF S TUDY A REA
T ABLE 3.6: D ETAILS OF S URFACE AND G ROUND WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS
T ABLE 3.7: G ROUND W ATER Q UALITY A T S TUDY A REA
T ABLE 3.8: S URFACE W ATER Q UALITY AT S TUDY A REA
T ABLE 3.9: C LIMATOLOGICAL S UMMARY AT IMD K OLKATA (1951 1980)
T ABLE 3.10: S UMMARY O F M ICRO -M ETEOROLOGICAL D ATA (F ROM 7 TH J ANUARY 2015 TO 8 TH A PRIL
11 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
2015)
T ABLE 3.11: F REQUENCY D ISTRIBUTION
T ABLE 3.12: S PATIAL D ISTRIBUTION OF M IXING H EIGHT D URING W INTER S EASON
T ABLE 3.13: P ROCEDURE FOR D ETERMINING V ARIOUS A IR Q UALITY P ARAMETERS
T ABLE 3.14: A MBIENT A IR Q UALITY M ONITORING L OCATIONS
T ABLE 3.15: N ATIONAL A MBIENT Q UALITY S TANDARDS
T ABLE 3.16: S UMMARY OF A MBIENT A IR Q UALITY R ESULT
T ABLE 3.17: A MBIENT A IR Q UALITY R ESULT (O THER PARAMETERS )
T ABLE 3.18: C HEMICAL C HARACTERIZATION OF RSPM
T ABLE 3.19: D ETAILS OF N OISE M ONITORING L OCATIONS
T ABLE 3.20: A MBIENT A IR Q UALITY S TANDARDS IN RESPECT OF N OISE
T ABLE 3.21: A MBIENT N OISE L EVELS
T ABLE 3:22: D ETAILS OF LOCATIONS FOR PLOT SURVEY
T ABLE 3.23: F LORISTIC D IVERSITY IN THE S TUDY A REA
T ABLE 3.24: P HYTOSOCIOLOGICAL A NALYSIS O F T REE S PECIES
T ABLE 3.25: I NTERPRETATION OF V EGETATION R ESULTS I N T HE S TUDY A REA
T ABLE 3:26: I NTERPRETATION OF V EGETATION RESULTS IN THE STUDY AREA
T ABLE 3.27: F AUNA R ECORDED FROM THE P RIMARY S URVEY IN THE S TUDY A REA AND THEIR
C ONSERVATION S TATUS
T ABLE 3:28: L IST OF OTHER F AUNA R ECORDED W ITHIN THE S TUDY A REA
T ABLE 3.29: L IST OF B UTTERFLIES R ECORDED W ITHIN T HE S TUDY A REA
T ABLE 3.30: C HARACTERIZATION OF F AUNA I N T HE S TUDY A REA (A S P ER W.P A CT , 1972)
T ABLE 3.31: D ESCRIPTION OF F LORA & F AUNA
T ABLE 3.32: D ESCRIPTION OF P HYTOPLANKTONS
T ABLE 3.33: D ESCRIPTION OF Z OOPLANKTONS
T ABLE 3.34: S TUDY A REA D ETAILS
T ABLE 3.35: D EMOGRAPHIC F EATURES OF T HE S TUDY A REA
T ABLE 3.36: W ORKERS P ARTICIPATION IN THE S TUDY A REA
T ABLE 4.1: I MPACT R ATING A SSESSMENT MATRIX
T ABLE 4.2 I MPACT P REDICTION M ATRIX DURING C ONSTRUCTION P HASE
T ABLE 4.3 I MPACT PREDICTION M ATRIX DURING O PERATION P HASE
T ABLE 4.4: E MISSIONS S OURCES AT P ROPOSED P LANT
T ABLE 4.5: E MISSIONS D ETAILS FOR P ROPOSED HAC P LANT
12 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 4.6: H IGHEST 24- H OURLY AND S EASONAL I NCREMENTAL GLC V ALUES FOR S ULPHUR D I - OXIDE
(SO 2 ) AND G RID P OINT L OCATIONS
T ABLE 4.7: 24 H OURLY GLC S V ALUES FOR SO 2 AT D ISCRETE L OCATIONS
T ABLE 4.8: H IGHEST 24- H OURLY I NCREMENTAL GLC V ALUES FOR NO X AND G RID P OINT L OCATION
T ABLE 4.9: 24 H OURLY GLC S V ALUES FOR NO X AT D ISCRETE L OCATIONS
T ABLE 4.10: H IGHEST 24- H OURLY I NCREMENTAL GLC V ALUES FOR PM10 AND G RID P OINT L OCATION
T ABLE 4.11: 24 H OURLY GLC S V ALUES FOR P ARTICULATE M ATTER AT D ISCRETE L OCATIONS
T ABLE 4.12: T YPICAL N OISE L EVELS OF C ONSTRUCTION E QUIPMENT
T ABLE 4.13: N OISE M ODELING R ESULTS
T ABLE 4.14: P ERMISSIBLE N OISE E XPOSURES FOR I NDUSTRIAL W ORKERS
T ABLE 4.15: S OLID & H AZARDOUS W ASTE G ENERATION AND M ANAGEMENT
T ABLE 4.16: I MPACTS ON S OCIO -E CONOMIC V ARIABLES
T ABLE 4.17: E VALUATION OF I MPACT P REDICTION
T ABLE 4.18: I MPACT A SSESSMENT S CORE
T ABLE 4.19: I MPACT A SSESSMENT C RITERION
T ABLE 4.12: I MPACT E VALUATIONS P ROPOSED HAC P ROJECT
T ABLE 6.1: E NVIRONMENTAL M ONITORING P LAN DURING C ONSTRUCTION P HASE
T ABLE 6.2: E NVIRONMENTAL M ONITORING P LAN DURING O PERATIONAL P HASE
T ABLE 7.1: D ETAILS OF H AZARDOUS M ATERIALS S TORED
T ABLE 7.2: D ETAILS O F F INISHED P RODUCTS
T ABLE 7.3: D ETAILS OF R AW M ATERIAL S TORAGE H AZARD A ND C ONTROL
T ABLE 7.4: P ROCESS H AZARDS A ND C ONTROLS AT P ROPOSED P LANT
T ABLE 7.5: G ENERAL H AZARD C ONTROL AT THE P ROPOSED P LANT
T ABLE 7.6: D AMAGE E FFECTS D UE TO O VERPRESSURES
T ABLE 7.7: I LLUSTRATIVE D AMAGE E FFECTS DUE TO O VERPRESSURES
T ABLE 7.8: S CENARIOS S ELECTED FOR C ONSEQUENCE A NALYSIS
T ABLE 7.9: E MERGENCY T ELEPHONE N UMBERS
T ABLE 9.2: S UGGESTED T REES FOR P ERIPHERAL G REEN B ELT D EVELOPMENT
T ABLE 9.3: P RESENT A SPECTS O F F UND A LLOCATIONS F OR ESC A CTIVITIES
T ABLE 9.4: B UDGETARY P ROVISIONS F OR EMP
13 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
LIST
OF
F I GU R E S
F IGURE 1.1: O RGANIZATIONAL C HART OF HAC P LANT

F IGURE 1.2: I NDEX M AP OF LOCATION OF P ROPOSED P LANT
F IGURE 1.3: 10 KM R ADIUS A REA AROUND THE P ROPOSED P LANT S ITE
F IGURE 1.4: S ITE L OCATION M AP ON S ATELLITE I MAGE
F IGURE 1:5: A PPROACH OF EIA S TUDY
F IGURE 2.1: D ISTANCE FROM SEVERELY POLLUTED AREA
F IGURE 2.3: L AYOUT P LAN OF P ROPOSED HAC P LANT
F IGURE 2.4: P ROCESS FLOW DIAGRAMME OF PREPARATION OF PF RESIN
F IGURE 2.5: P ROCESS F LOW D IAGRAMME OF PREPARATION OF MF RESIN
F IGURE 2.6: P ROCESS F LOW D IAGRAMME OF UF RESIN
F IGURE 2.7: P ROCESS F LOW D IAGRAMME OF F URAN RESIN
F IGURE 2.8: P ROCESS F LOW D IAGRAMME OF C ATALYST A CID - B ASE
F IGURE 2.9: P ROCESS F LOW D IAGRAMME OF C ATALYST E STER BASE
F IGURE 2.10: W ATER B ALANCE D IAGRAMME FOR PROPOSED PLANT OF HAC
F IGURE 2.11: S CHEMATIC D IAGRAM FOR E FFLUENT T REATMENT P LANT
F IGURE 3.1 S OIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS WITHIN THE STUDY AREA
F IGURE 3.2: P ARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION OF SOIL SAMPLES
F IGURE 3.3: T ERNARY DIAGRAM SHOWING THE NATURE OF SOIL TYPE , (USDA)
F IGURE 3.4: S EISMIC Z ONING M AP OF I NDIA
F IGURE 3.5: W IND & C YCLONE Z ONING M AP OF I NDIA
F IGURE 3.6: C YCLONE H AZARD M AP OF W EST B ENGAL
F IGURE 3.7: D EPTH OF W ATER LEVEL MAP OF W EST B ENGAL
F IGURE 3.8: D ISTRIBUTION OF L AND USE L AND COVER CATEGORIES IN THE STUDY AREA
F IGURE 3.9: L AND USE /L AND COVER
F IGURE 3.10: S URFACE W ATER S AMPLING LOCATIONS WITHIN THE STUDY AREA
F IGURE 3.11: G ROUND W ATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS
F IGURE 3.12: M ONTHLY A VERAGE MAX . AND M IN . T EMPERATURE ( IN C)
F IGURE 3.13: M ONTHLY AVERAGE RAINFALL IN MM
F IGURE 3.14: M ONTHLY AVERAGE H UMIDITY ( IN %)
F IGURE 3.15: M ONTHLY AVERAGE CLOUD COVER
F IGURE 3.16: M ONTHLY AVERAGE WIND SPEED
14 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 3.18: W INDROSE DIAGRAMMES W IND S PEED (B LOWING FROM )
F IGURE 3.19: W IND F REQUENCY D ISTRIBUTION
F IGURE 3.20: A MBIENT Q UALITY M ONITORING L OCATIONS
F IGURE 3.21: A MBIENT A IR Q UALITY R ESULT (PM10, PM2.5, SO 2 , NO X )
F IGURE 3.22: N OISE M ONITORING L OCATIONS
F IGURE 3.23: F OREST MAP OF W EST B ENGAL
F IGURE 3.24: E COLOGICAL S AMPLING L OCATIONS
F IGURE 3.25: E MPLOYMENT PATTERN IN 0-2 KM
F IGURE 3.26: E MPLOYMENT PATTERN IN 2-10 KM
F IGURE 4.1: P ERMISSION FOR G ROUND W ATER W ITHDRAWAL FOR HAC P LANT
F IGURE 4.2: I SOPLETHS FOR 24 HOURLY GLC S VALUES FOR SO 2
F IGURE 4.3: I SOPLETHS FOR 24 HOURLY GLC S VALUES FOR NO 2
F IGURE 4.4: I SOPLETHS FOR GLC FOR PM
F IGURE 4.5: A TTENUATION OF N OISE FROM S OURCE
F IGURE 7.1: M AXIMUM C ONCENTRATION F OOTPRINT FOR P HENOL RELEASE
F IGURE 7.2: F LASH F IRE E NVELOPE FOR P HENOL R ELEASE
F IGURE 7.3: I NTENSITY R ADII FOR P HENOL R ELEASE
F IGURE 7.4: M AXIMUM C ONCENTRATION F OOTPRINT FOR F ORMALDEHYDE RELEASE
F IGURE 7.5: F LASH F IRE E NVELOPE FOR F ORMALDEHYDE R ELEASE
F IGURE 7.6: I NTENSITY R ADII FOR F ORMALDEHYDE R ELEASE
F IGURE 9.1: O RGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE OF E NVIRONMENTAL M ANAGEMENT C ELL
F IGURE 9.2 G REEN B ELT D EVELOPMENT P LAN
15 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
NABET Accreditation
16 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
17 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Approved Terms of Reference (TOR)
18 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ERMS
OF
R EFERENCE (TOR)
19 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
20 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
21 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
22 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
TOR COMPLIANCE
23 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
TOR C OMPLI ANCE

Compliance of TOR Issued by State Expert Appraisal Committee (SEAC), West Bengal
vide Memo No. 989-2N-44/2014 (E) dated 24th December 2014.
Sl.No. TOR Issues
TOR Compliance
1.
Executive summary attached separately

and salient features of the proposed plant
are given in Section 1.3 and Table 1.4
Chapter 1.
The profile of the project proponent, and
organizational chart is given in Section 1.3
and Figure 1.1 of Chapter 1. There is no
litigation pending against the proposed plant
or any directions or orders passed by any
court of low/any statutory authority against
the project is to be detailed out.
Resource requirements including man
power and time frame for project completion
have been given in Section 1.8 and Table
1.4 of Chapter 1 and project details are
given in Chapter 2 .
The 10 km radius map on satellite image
has been presented in Figure 1.2 and
Figure 1.3 of Chapter 1 of the EIA Report.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Executive summary of the projectgiving a prima facie idea of the goals

and objectives and significance other
salient features of the project.
Profile of the project proponent,
organizational
chart,
project
consultants (if any) etc., should be
mentioned. Any litigation (S) pending
against the proposed project and / or
any directions or orders passed by
any court of low/any statutory
authority against the project is to be
detailed out. Resource requirements
including man power and time frame
for project completion should be
detailed.
A site location map on Indian map of
1:10,00,000 scale with at least next 10
kms of terrains i.e. circle of 10 kms of
terrains i.e. circle of 10 kms on A3/A2
sheets with proper longitude/ latitude/
heights with min. 100/200m.
Present land use should be prepared
based on satellite imagery. Highresolution satellite image data having
1m-5m spatial resolution for the 10km
radius area from proposed site. The
same should be used for land
used/land-cover mapping of the area.
Project site location along with site
map of 10km area and site details
providing various industries, surface
water bodies, forest etc should also be
addressed.
The study should address the existing
conditions & land use of the proposed
site including site plan, contour map,
environmentally
sensitive
areas
present if any & detailed description of
the proposed project.
The land use pattern based on satellite

imagery for 10km radius area from
proposed site has been prepared for land
used/land-cover, project site location along
with site map of 10km area, and site details
providing various industries, surface water
bodies, forest etc presented in Section 3.5.6
of Chapter 3 of the EIA Report
The existing conditions & land use of the

proposed site including site plan, contour
map, environmentally sensitive areas are
given in Chapter 3 as Description of
Environment. The detailed description of the
proposed project is given in Chapter 2 of
EIA Report.
The map indicating location of the There is no severely polluted area within the
24 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No. TOR Issues
TOR Compliance
project within severely polluted area.

7.
8.
9.
10.
i.
ii.
iii.
v.
10 km radius study area. Section 2.3 of

Chapter 2.
Project site layout plan to scale using The project site layout plan to scale showing
AutoCAD showing raw materials and raw materials and other storage is shown in
other storage plans, bore well or water Figure 2.3.
storage, aquifers (within 1 km.)
dumping, waste disposal, green The water bodies, rivers/drainage within 1
areas, water bodies, rivers/drainage km distance are shown in Figure 3.9.
passing through the project site
should be included.
List of raw materials required and List of raw materials required and source
source
along
with
mode
of along with mode of transportation is given in
transportation should be included. Table 2.3 and Table 2.4 of Chapter 2 of EIA
Impact of the transport of the raw Report.
materials and end products on the
surrounding environment should be Impact of the transport of the raw materials
assessed and provided.
and end products on the surrounding
environment have been assessed and
provided in Section 4.2.6.2 in Chapter 4 of
EIA Report.
Manufacturing process detail along The manufacturing process and mass
with the chemical reactions and balance is given in detail in Section 2.8 of
process flow chart should be Chapter 2 of EIA Report.
mentioned. Mass balance for the raw
material and should be included.
Baseline data collection shall include:
Water source, consumption & effluent Water source, consumption & effluent
generation, treatment & discharge.
generation, treatment & discharge is given
in Section 2.9.3, water balance diagram is
shown in Figure 2.10. Water Pollution
Management is shown in Section 2.10.1 of
Chapter 2.
Surface and ground water quality Surface and ground water quality have been
parameters (physical, chemical and monitored for physical, chemical and
biological)
of
appropriate biological parameters
during the study
representative samples from at least period and presented in Section 3.6 of
eight stations.
Chapter 3 of EIA Report.
Surface water quality of nearby river Surface water quality has been monitored
(upstream and downstream) and other during the study period and presented in
surface drains must be ascertained.
Section 3.6 of Chapter 3 of EIA Report.
Ambient air quality should be Ambient air quality has been monitored at
monitored at minimum six locations six location during the study period and
within the study area of 5 km., aerial presented in Section 3.8 of Chapter 3 of EIA
coverage from project site with one Report.
AAQMS in downwind direction should
be carried out. Monitoring of all the 12
air quality parameters to be carried
out for the core air quality station.
25 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No. TOR Issues
vi.
Noise level should be monitored at

minimum six locations both during
daytime and night time.
The suspended particulate matter
present in the ambient air must be
analyzed for the presence of polyaromatic hydrocarbon (PAH), i.e.
Benzene soluble fraction. Chemical
characterization
of
RSPM
and
incorporating of RSPM data should be
carried out. Gaseous emissions,
especially, SO2 should be monitored.
11.
Baseline information should be

collected from primary & secondary
sources & through field monitoring for
assessment of exiting environmental
status. Field monitoring shall be
carried out during one season other
than monsoon and as per CPCB
norms.
12.
Site-specific
micro-meteorological
data using temperature, relative
humidity, hourly wind and direction
and rainfall should be collected.
13.
Detailed description of flora and fauna

(terrestrial and aquatic) should be
given with special reference to rare,
endemic and endangered species.
Determination atmospheric inversion
data is required for realistic estimation
of ground level concentration of
pollutants from the stack emission
based on specific meteorological data.
Air quality monitoring modeling for the
proposed plant for specific pollutants
needs to be done. APCS for the
control of emissions within 50
mg/Nm3 should be included. Air
pollution control measures shall be
proposed for the effective control of
gaseous emissions within permissible
limits.
14.
15.
TOR Compliance
Ambient air quality has been monitored at

six location during the study period and
monitoring presented in Section 3.8 of
Chapter 3 of EIA Report. The suspended
particulate matter present in the ambient air
was analyzed for the presence of polyaromatic hydrocarbon (PAH) and Chemical
characterization of RSPM was also carried.
The results of PAH and Chemical
characterization of RSPM have been
presented in Section of 3.8.7 and Table
3.18 of Chapter 3.
Baseline information has been collected
from primary & secondary sources &
through field monitoring for assessment of
exiting
environmental
status.
Field
monitoring were carried out 7th January
2015 to 8th April 2015 during one season as
per CPCB norms and same has been
presented in subsequent sections of
Chapter 3 of EIA Report .
The site-specific micro-meteorological data
using temperature, relative humidity, hourly
wind and direction and rainfall were
collected 7th January 2015 to 8th April 2015
and presented in Section 3.7.4 of Chapter 3
of the EIA Report.
Detailed description of flora and fauna
(terrestrial and aquatic) is given in Section
3.10 of Chapter 3 with special reference to
rare, endemic and endangered species.
Details of atmospheric inversion & mixing
height are presented in section 3.7.5 and
Table 3.12 of Chapter 3.
Air quality modeling has been carried and

presented in Section 4.2.6 and Subsection
4.2.6.1 of Chapter 4 of the EIA report.
Air pollution control measures have been
proposed in sub-section 9.6.1 of Chapter 9
of the EIA report for the effective control of
gaseous emissions within permissible limits.
26 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No. TOR Issues

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
TOR Compliance
The proposed emission control

devices should be mentioned along
with the specifications of pollution
control systems.
The LDO fired boiler and HSD fired 140 kVA

capacity DG set will be source of emissions.
The mitigation measures for emissions
sources are as given in Section 4.2.6.1 of
Chapter 4 of the EIA Report.
Action plan to follow national ambient The action plan to follow national ambient
air quality emission standards issued air quality is been presented in Section
by the Ministry vide G.S.R No. 826(E) 9.6.1 of Chapter 9 of the EIA Report.
dated 16th November, 2009 should be
included.
Design details of ETP to be submitted Design details of ETP including treatment of
including treatment of phenol in the phenol in the effluent is given in Section
effluent. Action plan for zero discharge 2.10.1 of Chapter 2. Action plan for zero
of effluent shall be included.
discharge of effluent shall be included
Section 9.6.2 of the Chapter 9 of the EIA
Report.
The provision for control of fugitive The provision for control of fugitive emission
emission from material storage and from material storage and material loadingmaterial loading-unloading section unloading are given in Section 9.6.1 of
should be made available in the EIA- Chapter 9 of EIA Report.
EMP report.
Permission for the drawl of water from Permission for the drawl of water has been
the concerned authority and water obtained and presented in Section 4.2.3.2
balance data including quantity of and Figure 4.1 of Chapter 4.
effluent generated, recycled and
discharged is to be provided. Methods Water source, consumption & effluent
adopted/ to be adopted for the water generation, treatment & discharge is given
conservation should be included.
in Section 2.9.3, water balance diagram is
shown in Figure 2.10. Methods to be
adopted for the water conservation have
been given Section 4.2.3 of the Chapter 4 of
the EIA Report.
Action plan of solid /hazardous waste Action plan of solid /hazardous waste
generation, storage, utilization should generation, storage and utilization is
be mentioned.
mentioned in Section 2.10.3 of Chapter 2
and Section 9.6.4 of Chapter 9 of EIA
Report.
The environmental management plan Details are given in Section 9.6.2 of Chapter
must include provision of rain water 9 of EIA Report. Two underground tanks
harvesting proposal as per SEAC and (7.5 m x 7.5m x 3m = 168.75 m3) each will
guidelines.
be constructed for runoff storage and reuse.
A write up on best manufacturing The write up on best manufacturing
practice and safe practice followed practice and safe practice followed for
for handling storage, transportation handling storage, transportation and
and unloading of the hazardous unloading of the hazardous chemicals to be
chemicals to be submitted.
followed at the proposed HAC plant is
presented in Section 9.6.10, Subsection
9.6.10.1 and Subsection 9.6.10.2 of Chapter
27 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No. TOR Issues
TOR Compliance
24
Disaster management plan including

risk assessment & damage control
needs to be addressed and included.
A write up on treatment of workers by
accidental spillage of chemical as well
as any disaster situation.
25
Details
of
programme.
i.
To which chemicals, workers are

exposed directly or indirectly.
Whether these chemicals are within
Threshold
Limit
Values
(TLV)/
Permissible Exposure Levels as per
ACGIH recommendation.
ii.
occupational
health
9 of the EIA Report.

Risk
Assessment
and
Disaster
Management Plan & damage control have
been assessed, addressed and included
inSection 7.11 of Chapter 7 of the EIA
Report.
Details of treatment of workers by
accidental spillage of chemical as well as
any disaster situation are as given in
Section 7.10.1 of Chapter 7 of the EIA
Report.
Details of Occupational Health Programme
is given in Section 9.7 of Chapter 9 of the
EIA report.
Details are given in Section 9.7.3 of Chapter
9 of the EIA report.
During operation phase of the proposed
plant, necessary mitigation measures will be
adopted to handle and storage of chemicals
within Threshold Limit Values (TLV)/
Permissible Exposure Levels as per ACGIH
recommendation.
Necessary mitigation
measures will be adopted to handle and
storage of chemicals within Threshold Limit
Values (TLV)/ Permissible Exposure Levels
as per ACGIH recommendation. Details are
given in Section 7.3 of Chapter 7 of the EIA
report.
During operation phase of the proposed
plant, risk mitigation measures as given in
Chapter 7 and 9 will be taken to keep these
chemicals within PEL/TLV.
The workers will be evaluated and
examined concerning their exposure to
chemicals during pre-placement and
periodical medical monitoring annually.
Details are given in Section 9.7 of Chapter 9
of the EIA report.
Details are given in Section 7.11 of the
Chapter 7 of the EIA report.
iii.
What measures company has taken to

keep these chemicals within PEL/TLV.
iv.
How the workers are evaluated

concerning
their
exposure
to
chemicals during pre-placement and
periodical medical monitoring.
v.
What
are
onsite
and
offsite
emergency plan during chemical
disaster.
Liver Function Tests (LFT) during pre- Liver Function Tests (LFT) during preplacement and periodical examination. placement and periodical examination
annually will be carried. Details are given in
Section 9.7.4 of Chapter 9 of the EIA report.
Green belt development plan in 33% The Green Belt Development plan for been
area to be put in place.
33 % area has been presented in Section
9.6.5.2 of Chapter 9 of the EIA Report.
vi.
26
28 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No. TOR Issues
TOR Compliance
27
Corporate Social Responsibility Programme

(Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC) has
presented in Section 9.9 of Chapter 9 of EIA
Report.
28
29
At least 5% of the total cost of the

project shall be earmarked towards
the Enterprise Social Commitment
based on Public Hearing Issues and
item wise details along with time
bound action plan shall be prepared
and incorporated. Corporate Social
Responsibility Programme to be
formulated based on the results of
local socio economic survey on
parameters like access to water,
health status, literacy & sanitation.
Demographic features of the locality to
be ascertained. Guidelines mentioned
in O.M dated 11.08.2014 issued by
MoEF shall be followed.
Total capital cost and recurring
cost/annum
for
environmental
pollution control measures should be
specified.
Detailed Environment management
Plan (EMP) with specific reference to
details of air pollution control system,
water & wastewater management,
monitoring frequency, responsibility
and time bound implementation plan
for mitigation measure shall be
provided.
Demographic features of the locality have

been presented in Section 3.11 Chapter 3 of
the EIA report.
Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum

for
environmental
pollution
control
measures have been presented in Section
9.10 of Chapter 9 of the EIA report.
Please refer Subsection 9.6.1, Subsection
9.6.2 of Chapter 9 for Detailed Environment
management Plan (EMP) with specific
reference to details of air pollution control
system, water & wastewater management,
monitoring frequency, responsibility and
time bound implementation plan for
mitigation
measure.
Environmental
monitoring plan described in Section 6.4,
Table 6.1 and 6.2 of Chapter 6.
The concept of waste minimization, recycle/
reuse/recover
techniques,
Energy
conservation,
and
natural
resource
conservation have been presented in
Section 6.2.1 of Chapter 6. Energy
conservation described in details in Section
9.6.8 and Section 9.6.9 of Chapter 9.
Details of Corporate Environment Policy are
as given in Section 9.8 of Chapter 9 of the
EIA Report.
Sample will be followed as per details given
in Section 9.8 of Chapter 9 of the EIA
report.
30
EMP shall include the concept of

waste
minimization,
recycle/
reuse/recover techniques, Energy
conservation, and natural resource
conservation.
31
Corporate Environment Policy
i.
Does the company have a well laid

down Environment Policy approved by
its Board of Directors? If so, it may be
detailed in the EIA report.
Does
the
Environment
Policy Sample will be followed as per details given
prescribe for standard operating in Section 9.8 of Chapter 9 of the EIA
process /procedures to bring into report.
focus any infringement /deviation/
ii.
29 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No. TOR Issues
iii.
iv.
32.
i.
ii.
33
i.
ii.
iii.
iv
v.
violation of the environmental or forest

norms / conditions? If so, it may be
detailed in the EIA.
What is the hierarchical system or
administrative order of the company to
deal with the environmental issues
and for ensuring compliance with the
environmental clearance conditions?
Details of this system may be given.
Does the company have system of
reporting of non compliances /
violations of environmental norms to
the Board of Directors of the company
and /or shareholders or stakeholders
at large? This reporting mechanism
should be detailed in the EIA report.
Post-Project Monitoring Plan shall
include
Environmental Monitoring of the
proposed mitigation plan.
TOR Compliance

report.

report.
Environmental monitoring plan to ensure the

environmental
management
plan
is
presented in Chapter 6 of EIA report .
Project cost estimates including cost Budgetary provisions for implementation of
towards environmental monitoring and EMP including monitoring plant is given in
awareness campaign
Section 9.10 and Table 9.4 of Chapter 9 of
EIA Report.
The following general points should be
noted:
All documents should be properly Same has been complied in the report.
indexed, page numbered.
Period/date of data collection should Same has been complied in the report.
be clearly indicated.
The
letter
/
application
for Same has been complied in the report.
environmental clearance should quote
the SEAC file no and also attach a
copy of the letter as an annexure to
the final EIA-EMP Report.
The index of the final EIA-EMP report Same has been complied in the report.
must indicate the specific chapter and
page no. of the EIA-EMP Report.
While preparing the EIA report, the Same has been complied in the report.
instructions for the proponents
instructions for the consultants issued
by MoEF vide O.M No. J11013/41/2006-IA.II (I) dated 4th
August, 2009, which are available on
the website of this Ministry should also
be followed.
30 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No. TOR Issues
TOR Compliance
vi.
Same has been complied in the report.

(Chapter10)
The consultants involved in the

preparation of EIA/EMP report after
accreditation with Quality Council of
India (QCI) / National Accreditation
Board Of Education and Training
(NABET) would need to include a
certificate in this regard in the
EIA/EMP reports prepared by them
and
data
provided
by
other
organization/ Laboratories including
their status of approvals etc.
These TORs should be considered
for the preparation if EIA / EMP report
for
proposed
Synthetic
Resin
manufacturing unit of capacity 12000
MTPA at Village-Iswaripur, Bandipur
Gram Panchayat, P.s-Khardah, DistNorth 24Pgs, West Bengal by M/s
Hindusthan Adhesive & Chemicals in
addition to all relevant information as
per the General Structure of EIA
given in Appendix III and IIIA in the
EIA Notification, 2006.
The TORs prescribed shall be
valid for a period of two years for
submission of EIA/EMP.
The
project
proponent
is
requested to submit the final
EIA/EMP prepared as per the
above mentioned TORs for further
consideration of the proposal for
environmental clearance.
The Project Proponent and the
Consultant should abide by the
MoEF Office Memorandum dated
30.09.2011 and 05.10.2011 along
with other stipulations.
Same has been complied in the report.
Same has been noted and followed.
31 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
32 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
C HAPTER 1: I NTRODUCTION
1.1
BACKGROUND
M/s Hindusthan Adhesives & Chemicals (HAC) has proposed to establish 12000 MTPA
capacity resin manufacturing plant at Iswaripur, Bandipur Gram Panchayet, P.O. Suryapur,
P.S. Khardah, 24 Parganas (N) in West Bengal State. Types of resins proposed to be
manufactured at the proposed plant are Phenol Formaldehyde (PF), Resin, Melamine
Formaldehyde (MF) Resin, Urea Formaldehyde (UF) Resin, Furan Resin, Catalyst Acid Base
and Catalyst Ester base.
1.2
PURPOSE OF THE REPORT
The resin manufacturing plant (being synthetic organic chemicals) falls under Category 5(f) as
stated in Environment Impact Assessment Notification Published on 14th September 2006.
Further, the location of the proposed project is outside the notified industrial estate. Hence, the
project proponent has to obtain the prior Environmental Clearance. As per EIA Notification of
2006, Synthetic organic chemicals industry is divided into two categories as given in Table 1.1:
T ABLE 1.1: EIA C ATEGORY
Project or Activity
Category with Threshold

Limit
A
5 (f)
Synthetic
Organic
Chemical Industry (dye
& dye intermediates,
bulk
drugs
and
intermediates excluding
drug
formulations,
synthetic rubbers, basic
organic
chemicals,
other synthetic organic
chemicals
and
chemical intermediates)
Located
(i) Located in a
outside the
notified
notified
industrial
industrial
area/estate
area/estate
(ii) Small Units
as defined in
column (5).
Authority for Approval MoEF &CC,

of TOR & issue/reject GOI on the
of EC.
recommend
ations of
Remarks
General as well as
specific condition shall
apply.
Small Units: with water
consumption
<25
m3/day,
fuel
consumption <25 TPD
and MAH units as per
the
Management,
Storage and Import of
Hazardous Chemicals
Rules, 1989.
State/
Union
Territory
Environmental
Impact
33 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Project or Activity
Category with Threshold

Limit
A
Expert
Appraisal
Committee
(EAC),
Industry
Assessment
Authority
(SEIAA) on the
recommendatio
ns of State or
Union Territory
level
expert
Appraisal
Committee
(SEAC)
Remarks
HAC is located at non-notified industrial area and consumption of water will be 15 m3/day while
fuel consumption will be <25 TPD. Therefore, project falls into Category B and needs
environmental clearance from State Environmental Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA),
West Bengal.
As per the requirements of the notification, an application was submitted on 22/10/2014 to
State Level Expert Appraisal Committee (SEAC), West Bengal along with Form-1, Feasibility
Report and Draft Terms of Reference (TOR).
The proposal was considered in 95th meeting held on 3rd December, 2014, and the presentation
was made to SEAC. Subsequently, the Committee issued the TOR vide Memo no. 989-2N44/2014 (E) dated 24th December 2014. Based on the TOR points issued by SEAC, draft
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report has been prepared. The purpose of the EIA
study is to critically analyze the manufacturing process of different type of resins, proposed to
be manufactured with reference to types and quantity of different raw materials consumption,
possible source of pollution like waste water generation, air emissions, hazardous wastes
generation, control measures to reduce the pollution. Subsequently, identification and
evaluation of anticipated potential environmental impacts have been carried for construction
and operation phases of the proposed plant and environment management plan to mitigate
such adverse environmental impacts has been prepared.
HAC appointed SGS India Pvt. Ltd., Gurgaon (NABET Accredited EIA Consultant) as EIA
Consultant for preparation of Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environment
Management Plan (EMP) for providing technical support for obtaining environment clearance
34 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
as per EIA Notification. The baseline monitoring for meteorology, air, water, soil and noise have
been carried out by NABL Approved Laboratory for SGS India Pvt. Ltd. (Kolkata).
1.3
IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT AND PROJECT PROPONENT
The HAC has been nurtured under two very proficient directors, namely, Mr. Kalyan Banerjee
and Mr. Amitabha Banerjee. Both these personalities have immense knowledge and
experience in the fields of marketing and productions usage of synthetic resin binders & allied
products.
Brief Profile of Promoters:
1. Mr. Kalyan Banerjee, a commerce graduate, aged about 60 years, having vast business
experience over 38 years in dealing with chemicals and allied products. The primary
responsibilities in the business are marketing and purchase.
2. Mr. Amitabha Banerjee, a commerce graduate aged about 57 years having wide
business experience over 38 years. His prime responsibilities are production planning
and administration of the business.
Organizational Chart of HAC Plant
The organizational set-up of the proposed HAC plant will be as given in Figure 1.1:
35 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 1.1: O RGANIZATIONAL C HART OF HAC P LANT

1.4
JUSTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT
Demand of synthetic resins in the country is increasing day by day. These resins are industrial
additives used as bonding materials in plywood Industries, all kind of foundries, steel casting
and in specific engineering items. These resins are one of the most versatile chemicals and are
a basic building block to many important industries. The growth and demand of the resins
largely plays an important role for the growth and demand of synthetic resins. Since last 2-3
years the plywood, laminate, fabric items, steel industries and engineering products are
growing at a remarkable space, which in turn increased the demand of various industrial inputs.
The market demand of synthetic resins also filling the upward growth tendency living a scope
for further investments in these sectors, especially because the existing capacities may not be
sufficient to meet the new demand. Some of the existing manufacturers of synthetic resins are
in this line over a long period and their plant capacities are at optimum level of utilization.
Moreover the recently invented process technologies for better quality resin products also
needs further investments and shall open new markets.
36 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Since all the existing manufacturers are not in organized sector, countrys total installed
capacities vis-a-vis production for last few years are difficult to procure. However, from the
market trends the upward rise in demand of the resin products is being felt by most of the
manufacturer. The annual growth of steel, foundry, casting, laminate and plywood industries
supports this upward trend in demand of synthetic resins. It has been estimated that the annual
demand of synthetic resins in various industries in Table 1.2:
T ABLE 1.2: D EMAND OF S YNTHETIC RESINS IN VARIOUS INDUSTRIES
1.5
Sl.No.
Type of Industries
Amount (in TPA)

2014-15
Amount (in
TPA) 2015-16
Foundry
60000
100000
Plywood and laminate industries
300000
500000
L O C AT I O N A N D A C C E S S I B I L I T Y
The details of location of the existing site are provided below.

Latitude
224424.63 N
Longitude
882446.60 E
Elevation
30 ft of MSL
Village
Iswaripur
Gram Panchayat
Bandipur
District
24 Parganas (North)
State
West Bengal
The proposed HAC plant site is located at Latitude of 224424.63 N and Longitude of
882446.60 E. The project site is well connected by road & rail. The site location is nearest to
Kolkata metro city at distance of 19 km. The Kolkata and Haldia ports are located 20 km and
85 km away from the site, respectively. Netaji Subhash International airport at Dumdum is
located at distance of 10.3 km in south-east direction from the project site, whereas nearest
railway station are Howrah & Khardah railway stations, located at distance of 20 km & 4 km
away from the proposed plant site, respectively.
1.6
SITING CRITERIA
37 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The site have been selected because of its proximity to availability of raw materials, consumer
centers and infrastructure facilities like land, power, water, communication, etc. The siting
criterion for the proposed plant is given in Table 1.3:
T ABLE 1.3: S ITING C RITERIA
Criteria
Requirements
Status
Forest
No forest land shall be converted No forest land is involved in the

into non-forest activity for the proposed plant site.
sustenance of the industry
Agricultural land
No prime agricultural land shall be Agricultural land is not involved as

converted into industrial site.
site is located in non notified

industrial area.
Odour
For industry having odour problem
Odour will not be emitting from the
Plants
it shall be a kilometer wide.
proposed plant.
Layout
Enough space should be provided 33% area of the project site has
for storage of solid wastes so that been
these
could
be
available
allocated
for
green
belt
for development.
possible reuse
Residential
Major habitation shall be at least There is no major habitation within 1
Area
1 km distance
km distance.
Ecologically /
Shall be at least 1 km distance
There is no ecological sensitive area
Sensitive
within 10 km distance from the
Zones
plant.
Recreation
Distance shall be 2 km from the

plant
There is no recreation facility within
Other
Radial distance of two similar
There is no similar plant within 5 km
Similar
plants should be 5 km distance
distance.
The distance from the National

Highway shall be 0.5 Km
There is National Highway (NH 34)
The distance from the State
There is state highway within 1.5 km
Highway (SH) shall be 0.5 Km
distance
2 km distance.
Plants
High way
State Highway
about 7 km distance
38 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The index map for the location of the project plant site is given in Figure 1.2. The 10 km radius
area around the proposed plant as marked on google map as shown in Figure 1.3. The site
location map on satellite image showing geographical features is shown in Figure 1.4.
39 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 1.2: I NDEX M AP OF LOCATION OF P ROPOSED P LANT
40 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 1.3: 10 KM R ADIUS AREA AROUND THE P ROPOSED P LANT S ITE
41 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 1.4: S ITE L OCATION M AP ON S ATELLITE I MAGE
42 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
1.7
S I T E AN A L Y S I S
The site analysis for the proposed HAC plant is as given below:
Connectivity:
Road: The proposed plant site is well connected by road. The site location is 7.8 Km
from the NH-35 and 2 Km from Kalyani Expressway.
Rail Linkage: The nearest railway station is Khardah (Local), which is located at a
distance of 4 Km while Howrah junction is located at a distance of 20 km from the
proposed project site.
Port: Nearest sea port at Kolkata, which is about 20 km from site.
Airport: Nearest airport is at Dumdum, which is 10.5 Km from the project site.
Topography: The topography of the proposed plant site and surrounding area is flat.
Land Form, Land Use and Land Ownership

Total land requirement for the proposed plant is 1.34 Acres (5422.81 sqm). The project site
located at Dag no. 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328, 328/477, 329, 356.
Proposed Infrastructure
Total plot area of the unit is 1.34 Acres (5422.81 sqm). Total 0.45 Acres area (33%) of
proposed plant site has been earmarked for green belt development. The proposed plant will
have raw material storage facility, utility facility, production area, etc.
The other supporting factors are briefly summarized here under,
Availability of all basic facilities like fuel, water, power, man power, raw materials, etc.
Good communication and transportation facilities available
Common hazardous waste disposal facility is located at a distance of about 85 Km at

Haldia.
No resettlement & rehabilitation (R&R) will be required as there is no displacement of

people for the project site.
43 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
No national park or wildlife sensitive area falls within 10 km radial distance from
proposed project site.
Utilities
Power: 150 kW power will be required for the proposed plant, which will be sourced
from WBSEDCL. DG Set of 140 kVA capacity will be established to meet the power
requirement in the event of grid power failure.
Water: The total water requirement of the proposed plant is estimated as 13 m3/day.
Water requirement of the proposed plant shall be met by ground water.
Soil Classification
The soil of project site can be classified as sandy clay types.
Climatic Data from Secondary Sources
Temperature: The temperature level rises up to 40C in the month of May during
summer and drops down to 14C in the month of January during winter.
Rainfall: A good quantity of rain showers in the rainy season with an annual average of
1690 mm in the area.
Social Infrastructure Available

Social infrastructure facilities (both public and private) such as schools, hospitals, community
halls, markets, libraries, colleges and religious buildings are located in nearby area.
Road Infrastructure has been developed between villages by the State Government.
1.8
E X E C U T I V E S U M M A R Y O F T H E P R O P O S E D P L AN T
The summary of the project-giving a prima facie idea of the goals and objectives and
significance other salient features of the proposed plant are as given In Table 1.4:
T ABLE 1.4: S ALIENT F EATURES OF THE P ROPOSED P LANT
Sl.No
Parameters
Details
1.
Location
The proposed plant will be located at Iswaripur, Bandipur Gram

Panchayet, P.O. Suryapur, P.S. Khardah, 24 Parganas (N) in West
Bengal State, The Latitude of the proposed plant is 224424.63 N,
44 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No
Parameters
Details
while Longitude: 882446.60 E.
2.
Goals
To set-up proposed resin plant with the compliance of applicable

environmental regulations and adopting environmentally sound
technologies.
3.
Objective
To manufacture and supply the market demand of synthetic resins in

the region and country.
4.
Significance
The proposed plant will be located on 1.34 Acres land. The

production capacity will be 12000 MTPA resin manufacturing.
5.
Production
12000 MTPA resin manufacturing including PF Resin (6000 MTPA),
Capacity
MF Resin (480 MTPA), UF Resin (3600 MTPA), Furan Resin (720

MTPA), Catalyst Acid Base (720 MTPA) and Catalyst Ester base
(480 MTPA).
6.
Proposed
The proposed plant will be located on the 1.34 Acres (5422.809
Land Use of Sqm) area. Out of this, land allocated for Factory Shed Area
the Plant
(768.8962): 14%, Storage & Utilities (647.4924): 12%, Open Area &
Road (2185.286): 40% and Green Belt Area (1821.071) 34%.
Power
The proposed plant will require 150 kW connected electrical load,
Requirement
which will be sourced from West Bengal State Electricity Distribution

Company Limited (WBSEDCL). One DG set of 140 kVA capacity will
be installed at the proposed plant to meet the power requirement
during grid power failure.
Water
For the proposed project, total fresh water requirement is estimated
Requirement
as 13 KLD, which will be met through bore well at the plant.
Effluent
Effluent generated from the plant will be treated and evaporated.
Generation
& Treatment
10
11
12
Hot
Water LDO fired 1.5 MT capacity boiler will be installed at the Proposed
Requirement
plant
Manpower
Total 39 personnel including manager, office staff, supervisors,
Requirement
workers, security staffs will be deployed for the proposed plant.
Total cost of INR 917 Lakhs (Rs 9.17 Crores)

45 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No
Parameters
Details
the project
13.
Timeframe
Timeframe for conduction of proposed plant is one year after

obtaining environmental clearance.
1.9
REGULATORY FRAMEWORK
The proposed project will be established and operated under the purview the following key
acts, rules & regulations, which have formulated and amended time to time:
The Water (prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1974
The Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Cess, Act, 1977
The Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1981
The Environmental (Protection) Act, 1986
Environmental Impact Assessment Notification dated 14th September 2006 and

amendments.
The
Hazardous
Wastes (Management, Handling
and
Transboundary
Movement)
Rules, 2008, and its amendments
The Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals (Amendment) Rules, 2000
Chemical Accident (Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response) Rules,1996
Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 and its amendments.
The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991
The Batteries (Management and Handling) Rules, 2001.
1.10
AP P RO AC H AN D MET H OD OL OG Y
SGS followed the standard EIA methodology and technique during the entire study and
whenever necessary, it used its own judgment based on its experience and knowledge. During
the entire study, appropriate quality checks were taken into consideration and best
management practices were followed in order to produce a quality output. Discussions were
also undertaken with state-level Government agencies during the survey of the area.
Impacts were identified based on the actual and foreseeable events resulting due to
exploratory drilling. Processes that may create risks to the natural environment and socioeconomic environment were considered in terms of key potential environmental impacts.
46 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Mitigation measures to be adopted under the EMP for all the specified significant
environmental impacts that are likely to result during exploratory drilling are also a part of the
EIA/ EMP report.
The identified likely impacts and recommended mitigation measures are based on the
following:
Project information provided by the project proponent;
Baseline information and reconnaissance survey of the study area conducted by SGS;
and
Standard National/ International environmental management guidelines/ practices.
Details of the methodology and technique used for the study are discussed in the subsequent
Chapters. The schematic diagram for approach and methodology adopted for the EIA Study is
shown below in Fig 1.5.
47 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 1:5: APPROACH OF EIA S TUDY

1.11
ENVIRONMENT MONITORING AND SITE SURVEYS
Environment monitoring and site surveys were conducted for three (3) months from 7th January
2015 to 8th April 2015, in an area of 10 km radius surrounding the proposed plant site for the
following:
Ambient Air Quality
Ambient Air Quality monitoring was carried out at Six (06) locations in the surrounding areas of
the project site for PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx, O3, Pb, CO, NH3, Benzene, Benzo (a) Pyrene, As
48 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
and Ni. The frequency of monitoring was twice in a week for three (3) months during the study
period of 7th January 2015 to 8th April 2015.
Meteorology at the Site
Site specific meteorological data was collected at one (1) location for wind speed, wind
direction, temperature, humidity, rainfall and cloud cover on an hourly basis during the
monitoring period.
Noise Level
Noise levels were monitored at Six (06) locations on an hourly basis for 24 hours during the
study period. The levels were monitored once during the study period. The results of the finding
have been reported in terms of Leq Day and Leq Night for all locations.
Water Quality
Samples for surface water from 4 locations and groundwater were collected from 5 locations
and analyzed for essential parameters as stated in the BIS 10500:2012 and additional relevant
parameters. The samples were collected once during the study period.
Soil Quality
Soil samples at Five (05) locations were collected and analyzed for physical and chemical
parameters. The samples were collected once during the study period.
Biological Environment (Flora and Fauna)
Survey was undertaken in the study area as per the guidelines of the MoEF&CC. Species of
flora have been listed as trees, Shrubs and herbs. Faunal species have been identified as per
the Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 (and as amended subsequently) and associated Schedule.
Socio-economic
Socio-economic survey in the study area was carried out to assess the status of demographic
pattern, cropping pattern and general amenities available, based on the Census 2011 and
secondary information available with different Government agencies. Primary and secondary
information on socio-economic parameters within the study area were collected for Household;
population; villages and tehsils; population distribution; literacy levels; employment pattern;
primary health care facilities available; scheduled castes; scheduled tribes; and transport,
communication and welfare facilities were evaluated during the study period.
49 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Land Environment
This study was carried out based on the satellite imagery of the study area in order to assess
the land use pattern, drainage pattern, habitation, vegetation cover, etc of the study area.
Identification of various existing pollution loads due to any industrial and domestic
activities within the study area;
Prediction of incremental levels of pollutants in the study area due to the proposed project
activities;
Evaluation of the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes in the study
area by using scientifically developed and widely accepted environmental impact
assessment methodologies/ models;
Identification of critical environmental attributes required to monitor regularly;
Identification and analysis of risk and prepare disaster management plan to deal with
emergency situation.
Identification of mitigation measures and preparation of an Environmental Management

Plan (EMP) outlining the measures for environment protection;
Impact Assessment & Evaluation & Prediction

Impact assessment was carried out using qualitative as well as quantitative predictive
techniques in order to predict the impacts of the various elements of the proposed project on
different environmental components.
Environmental Management Plan
The EMP has been prepared for construction and operation stages of proposed plant.
All the monitoring and analysis were carried according to standard procedures of American
Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), American Public Health Association (APHA), Bureau
of Indian Standards (IS) and Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB).
The details of baseline data collection within 10 Km radius study area are presented in Table
1.5.
50 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 1.5: B ASELINE D ATA C OLLECTION WITHIN 10 KM R ADIUS S TUDY AREA

Field
Ambient
air quality
Ground
Water
quality
Surface
Water
Noise
Soil
1.12
Parameters
Location
Nos.
6
PM2.5, PM10, SO2,

NOx, O3, Pb, CO,
NH3, Benzene,
Benzo(a) Pyrene, As
and Ni
IS 10500 (2012,
Revised)
Frequency
Brief Sampling
Specifications
Twice a week
24 hour Samples at each
for one month
location using Respirable
except monsoon Dust Sampler. Analysis of
samples will be done as
per norms
Once in a
Grab sampling
season
pH, temperature,
Turbidity,
conductivity, TSS,
BOD, TDS, DO, COD,
Feacal coliform, trace
metals etc.
Leq, Lmax, Lmin
Once in a
season
Grab sampling
Once in a
season
pH, WHC, EC, CEC,

texture, Total Organic
Carbon, Moisture
content, SAR, Ca,
Mg, K, Na etc.
Once in a
season
24
hourly
sampling
locations using an sound
level meter
Composite samples
STRUCTURE OF THE REPORT
The EIA report is based on the generic structure of EIA report, as suggested in the MoEF&CC
Notification dated 14th September 2006. A brief description of each Chapter is presented
below:
Executive
Summary
Presents the significant findings and recommended actions.
Chapter 1
Introduction
Presents an Introduction covers background, purpose of

report, identification of Project and Project Proponent,
justification of the project, location and accessibility, siting
criteria, site analysis, regulatory frame work, Terms of
Reference for EIA Study, environment monitoring and site
survey and structure of EIA Report.
Chapter 2
Project Description
Presents brief project technical details.
Chapter 3
Description
Environment
Presents the baseline status for various environmental

parameters in the study area
51 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Chapter 4
Anticipated
Environment
Impacts
Mitigation
Measures
Presents the identification, prediction and evaluation of

environmental impacts due to the proposed project
and activities and associated proposed mitigation measures
Chapter 5
Analysis
Alternatives
(Technology
Site)
of Presents analysis of the alternatives with reference to the

site and technology
and
Chapter 6
Environment
Monitoring
Programme
Chapter 7
Risk Assessment Presents details of the Emergency Response plan, as per

And
Disaster national and international requirements
Management Plan
Chapter 8
Project Benefits
Presents details of monitoring, audit and reporting
The presents project benefits with respect to:
Chapter 9
Environment
Management Plan
Chapter 10
Disclosure
Consultant
Improvements in the physical infrastructure;
Improvements in the social infrastructure;
Employment potential skilled, semi-skilled and

unskilled; and
Other tangible benefit.
Description of the administrative aspects of ensuring that

mitigation measures are implemented and their
effectiveness monitored, after approval of the EIA.
of Consultant profile with resumes of team members.
52 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
CHAPTER 2
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
53 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
C HAPTER 2: P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION

2.1
PROJECT DETAILS
The M/s Hindusthan Adhesive & Chemicals (HAC) proposes to set up synthetic resin
manufacturing plant. The proposed plant will manufacture following synthetic resins:
Phenol Formaldehyde (PF) Resin,
Melamine Formaldehyde (MF) Resin,
Urea Formaldehyde (UF) Resin,
Furan Resin,
Catalyst Acid base,
Catalyst Ester base
The total production capacity of the proposed plant will be 12000 TPA. The details of products
with proposed production capacities are presented in Table 2.1.
Sl. No Name of the Product
Total (Ton/Annum)
1
PF Resin
6000
MF Resin
480
UF Resin
3600
Furan Resin
720
Catalyst Acid base
720
Catalyst Ester base
480
Total
12000
Source: Hindusthan Adhesives & Chemicals

The site area is 1.34 Acres for the proposed resin manufacturing plant. The land of the site is
industrial plot and non productive presently. The land is a developed land surrounded by
industries.
54 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
2.2
S AL I E N T F E A T U R E S O F T H E P R O J E C T
The salient features of the project are given in Table 2.2.

T ABLE 2.2: S ALIENT F EATURES O F T HE P ROJECT
Sl. Particulars
No
1
Name of
product/process
1a Total Project Cost
1b Total Land area
Details
1c
3-6 Months
3
3a
4
4a
4b
5
5a
5b
6
6a
Period of
construction
Fuel
Type of fuel
Water Requirement
Raw water source
Water Allocation
Power Requirement
Auxiliary Power
Requirement
DG set for Backup
PF Resin, MF Resin, UF Resin, Furan Resin, Catalyst Acid base,

Catalyst Ester base
917.00 Lacs INR
58369.95 Sq.ft (1.34 acres)
LDO
Proposed Borewell
15 m3/day
150 KW (Source - WBSEDCL) and 140 KVA DG set (1 No.)
DG set -
Generating set rating:

Phase -3, Voltage - 415 volt, Power factor - 0.8
140 KVA
Solid & Hzardous Waste Generation

Solid & Hzardous
Sl. Item
waste
No.
1
Cotton
Waste
2.3
Source
Quantity
(Tones)
Maintenance 20
kg./month
Poly
Bags
Stores
50
kg./month
ETP
sludge
ETP
20 Kg/
Month
Used Oil
Maintenance 1.5 Litre/

Month
Mode of Disposal
Sent to West Bengal
Waste Management
Group, Haldia
Sent to West Bengal
Waste Management
Group, Haldia
Sent to West Bengal
Waste Management
Group, Haldia
Sent to West Bengal
Waste Management
Group, Haldia
DISTANCE FROM POLLUTED AREA
The location of notified Severely Pollutted Area as per CPCB index is Howrah which is about
20 Km (Aerial Distance) from the project site.
55 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 2.1: D ISTANCE FROM SEVERELY POLLUTED AREA

2.4
S T O R A G E , S O U R C E A N D T R A N S P O R T A T I O N D E T A I L S O F R A W M AT E R I A L S
The storage, source and transportation details of raw materials of the proposed plant are as
given in Table 2.3. The physical and chemical properties of the raw materials to be used at the
proposed plant are given in Table 2.4.
56 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 2.3: S TORAGE , S OURCE AND T RANSPORTATION D ETAILS O F R AW M ATERIALS

Sl.
No.
Raw Materials
Form
Phenol
Liquid
2000
Formalin
Liquid
5300
3
4
Flakes
Solid
Flakes
320
70
Liquid
470
5
6
Caustic Soda
Para Toluene
Sulphonic Acid
(PTSA)
Para Toluene
Sulphonic Acid
(PTSA)
Caustic Potash
Para Formaldehyde
Flakes
Granule
216
220
7
8
Urea
Melamine
Granule
Powder
640
215
Furfural alcohol
Liquid
520
10
Silane
Liquid
17
11
Tri Acetine
Liquid
340
12
Liquid
50
Liquid
50
Liquid
50
15
Ethylene Glycol
Diacetate (EGDA)
Dibasic Ester
(DBE)
Ethylene Dichloride
(EDC)
Dipentine
Liquid
16
Phosphoric Acid
Liquid
17
Tri Sodium
Phosphate (TSP)
Ammonia
Powder
Liquid
35
Mono Ethylene
Glycol (MEG)
Borax
Liquid
Powder
13
14
18
19
20
Quantity Source
(Tonnes)
Indigenous &
imported
Indigenous &
imported
Indigenous
Indigenous &
imported
Type of
Packing/
Storage/ mode
of storage
Tank
Capacity
of storage
(Ton/
month)
100 MT
Tank
100 MT
In bags
In bags
10 MT
10 MT
Indigenous &
imported
In barrel
30 MT
Indigenous
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
&
In bags
In bags
15 MT
20 MT
&
In bags
In bags
20 MT
10 MT
&
In barrel
30 MT
&
In barrel
3 MT
&
In barrel
30 MT.
&
In barrel
10 MT
&
In barrel
10
&
In barrel
05
&
In barrel
01
&
In barrel
01
&
In bags
01
&
In barrel
02
&
In barrel
02
&
In barrel
0.5
57 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No.
Raw Materials
Form
Quantity Source
(Tonnes)
21
Phthalic anhydride
Flakes
22
Sulphuric Acid
Liquid
90
23
Hydrofluoric Acid
Liquid
30
24
Ammonium bifluoride
Powder
30
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
Indigenous
imported
&
Type of
Packing/
Storage/ mode
of storage
In barrel
Capacity
of storage
(Ton/
month)
03
&
In barrel
05
&
In barrel
03
&
In bags
02
T ABLE 2.4: P HYSICAL AND C HEMICAL P ROPERTIES O F T HE R AW M ATERIALS
TLV ppm or
mg/m3
LD50 mg/kg
Sp. Gravity
Vapour
Density
Main Properties (Refer MSDS)

LEL / UEL %
State
-Solid,
Liquid
Or Gas
M.P/ F.P. C
Full Name Of The

Raw Materials
B.P. C
Sl.
No
1.
Phenol
Liquid
181.9
79
1.7/ 8.6
317
1.057
3.24
2.
Formalin
Liquid
98
50
6/36.5
0.3
100
1.08
1.03
3.
Caustic Soda
Flakes
1388
2.0
2.13
>1.0
4.
Liquid
140
103
2480
6.0
5.
Para Toluene
Sulphonic Acid
(PTSA)
Caustic Potash
Flakes
1320
360
2.0
273
2.044
6.
Para Formaldehyde
Granule
160
7/73
800
1.03
7.
Urea
Granule
132
10.0
8471
1.251.35
1.323
8.
Melamine
Powder
345
3161
1.573
4.34
9.
Furfuryl alcohol
Liquid
171
-31
1.8/ 16.3
10.0
177
1.129
3.37
10.
Tri Acetene
Liquid
258
-78
3000
1.154
7.52
11.
Liquid
186
-31
1.6/8.4
25.0
6850
1.1
5.04
Liquid
83.5
-35
6.2/15.9
10.0
670
1.253
3.42
13.
Ethylene Glycol
Diacetate (EGDA)
Ethylene Dichloride
(EDC)
Dipentene
Liquid
170
0.7/6.1
5300
0.856
>4.7
14.
Phosphoric Acid
Liquid
158
41
1530
1.69
3.4
15.
Tri Sodium
Powder
73
10.0
>300
1.62
2.5
12.
2.07
58 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
TLV ppm or
mg/m3
LD50 mg/kg
Sp. Gravity
Vapour
Density

LEL / UEL %
State
-Solid,
Liquid
Or Gas
M.P/ F.P. C
Full Name Of The

Raw Materials
B.P. C
Sl.
No
Liquid
197
-13
1.2/8.5
100.0
4700
1.115
2.14
17.
Mono Ethylene
Glycol (MEG)
Borax
Powder
300
170
5.0
2600
1.43
18.
Phthalic anhydride
Flakes
284
130
1.7/10.4
6.1
1530
1.53
5.1
19.
Sulphuric Acid
Liquid
290
3.0
1.0
2140
1.84
3.4
20.
Hydrofluoric Acid
Liquid
19.5
-84
0.5
>90
0.97
2.21
21.
Ammonium bifluoride
Powder
240
125
2.5
1.51
Phosphate (TSP)
16.
2.4.1 A V A I L A B I L I T Y O F R A W M AT E R I AL S
The raw materials required for the proposed plant are Phenol, Formalin, Melamine, PTSA,
Caustic Soda, Caustic Potash, Para Formaldehyde, Urea, Furfural alcohol etc for processing of
PF, MF, UF, Furan resin. Based on the targeted level of production, sources of raw materials,
transportation, and storage have been estimated in Table 2.5.
T ABLE 2.5: D ETAILS OF R AW M ATERIALS (S OURCE , Q UANTITY AND M ODE OF
T RANSPORTATION )
Sl.
No.
1
Name of
Raw
Materials
Phenol
Formalin
PTSA
Solution
Caustic
Soda
Source
Transp
ortation
Storage
a) Hindustan Organic Chemicals Ltd., Kochi,

b) SI Group-India Ltd., Navi Mumbai
/ Imported
a) Assam Petro Chemicals Ltd., Namrup
b) ARCL Organics Ltd., Rampur, Kolkata
c) Milico International Ltd., Vizianagaram, A.P.
a) Navdeep Chemicals Pvt. Ltd., Ankleshwar,
Gujarat
b) Aromatic Allied & Organics Ltd., Bhiwadi,
Rajasthan
a) Chemplast Sanmar Ltd., Puduchery
b) Kanoria Chemical &
Industries Ltd., Uttar
Pradesh
c) HJI-Division of Orient Paper Mills, Annupur,
Tanker
M.S./ S.S. (50

MT. Capacity)
Storage Tank
M.S./ S.S. (50
MT. Capacity)
Storage Tank
To be stacked at
Raw material
store room
Tanker
Truck
Truck
To be stacked at
Raw material
store room
59 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No.
Name of
Raw
Materials
Caustic
Potash
Urea
Melamine
a) Gujarat State Fertilizer Co., Guajrat

/Imported
Truck
Furfural
Alcohol
Imported
Truck
Para
Formaldeh
yde
PTSA
Powder
a) Allied Resins & Chemicals Ltd., Kolkata /

Imported
Truck
a) Navdeep Chemicals Pvt. Ltd., Ankleshwar,

Gujarat
b) Aromatic Allied & Organics Ltd., Bhiwadi,
Rajasthan
a) Mellow Chemplast, Ahmadabad
b) Spanol Chemicals (P) Ltd., Navi Mumbai /
Imported
a) Spanol Chemicals (P) Ltd., Navi Mumbai /
Imported
Truck
10
11
Tri acetin
12
EGDA
Source
Madhya Pradesh
a) Universal Chemicals & Industries Pvt. Ltd.,
Bharuch, Gujarat
b) Shree Rayalaseema Alkalies & Allied
Chemicals Ltd., Kurnool
c) The Andhra Sugar Ltd., Kovvur, A.P.
a) Rashtriya Chemicals & Fertilizer Co.
b) Narottamdas & Co., Nagpur / Imported
Transp
ortation
Storage
Truck
To be stacked at
Raw material
store room
Truck
To be stacked at
Raw material
store room
To be stacked at
Raw material
store room
To be stacked at
Raw material
store room
To be stacked at
Raw material
store room
To be stacked at
Raw material
store room
Truck/C
ontainer
Truck/C
ontainer
To be stacked at
Raw material
store room
To be stacked at
Raw material
store room
2.4.2 E Q U I P M E N T S R E Q U I R E D F O R R E S I N U N I T W I T H C A P A C I T Y
The equipment required for resin manufacturing at proposed plant with its capacity are
presented in Table 2.6:
T ABLE 2.6: E QUIPMENTS D ETAILS FOR P ROPOSED P LANT
Equipment
Qty
Kettle/ Vessel (fitted with condenser, temperature Resin Kettle : 2 nos

indicator, glass window for visual inspection, Resin Kettle : 2 no
safety pressure valve, stirrer for mixing coupled to Catalyst kettle :1 no
a constant speed motor through reducing gear,
jacket for cooling/ coils, completely closed lid,
stem heating and water cooling inlet and out lets,
sampling valve, drainage valve).
Capacity
5 MT. each
3 MT.
5 MT.
60 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Equipment
Qty
Capacity
Steam Generator (Baby boiler)

Cooling Tower
Storage tank for Formalin
Storage tank for Phenol
Measuring Tank
Storage tank for fuel
Tube well
Softener & Iron separator
Generator
Transformer
Weighing scale
Lab. Equipment :
Electronic Balance
Melting Point Apparatus
Refractometer
Universal Sand Strength Machine- Digital
Universal Sand testing Machine-Digital
pH meter
Sand Muller Lab scale
Electric Oven air circulated
Core Hardness tester
Sand Rammer
Core-gas determinator
Hot Plate
Ford Cup (B4, B5, B6)
Glass Reaction Kettle
Steel Reaction Kettle
Overhead storage tank
ETP
Pulveriser
1 no
2 nos.
2 nos.
2 nos.
2 nos.
1 no
2 nos.
1 no
1 no
1 no
2 nos.
1.5 Ton
3 nos.
1 no.
1 no.
1 no.
1 no.
3 nos.
1 no.
1 no.
1 no.
1 no.
1 no.
1 no.
3 nos.
2 no.
3 nos.
2 nos.
1 no
220 & 600 gms.

& 5 kg.
360 deg.C
RI-1.7
Comp. 50 kg.
Comp.15 kg.
0-14 each
5 kg.
upto 250 deg.C
2.5
50 MT. each
50 MT. each
3 MT. each
12 KL.
6000 Ltr./Hour
140 KVA
500 kg./ 1MT.
upto 300 deg.C

2 ltr. & 20 ltr.
2, 3, 5 Ltr.
2000 Ltr. Each
1 no.
24 inch
DETAILS OF THE PROPOSED PLANT
The proposed plant will be located on the 1.34 Acres (5422.809 Sqm) area. Out of this, land
allocated for the proposed factory shed is 768.8962 sqm. The green belt will be developed on
1821.071 sqm area. The area details of the proposed plant are given in Table 2.7. The layout
plan for the proposed plant is shown in Figure 2.2.
61 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 2.7: P LANT AREA D ETAILS

Details
Proposed area in Sq. m
Area as % of Total
Factory shed area
768.8962
14%
Storage & Utilities
647.4924
12%
Open Area & Road
2185.286
40%
Green belt area
1821.071
34%
Total
5422.809
100%
F IGURE 2.2: P LANT AREA D ETAILS
2.6
MANPOWER REQUIREMENT
Total 39 personnel including manager, office staff, supervisors, workers, security staffs will be
deployed for the proposed plant as per details given in the Table 2.8.
T ABLE 2.8: M ANPOWER R EQUIREMENT
Manpower
Numbers
Manger
Office Staffs
Supervisors
Workers (all shift)
24
Security Staffs
Total
39
62 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
2.7
PROJECT COST
The capital cost of the proposed project will be Rs. 487.00 Lacs with net working capital of Rs.
430.00 Lacs. Total estimated project cost is Rs. 917.00 Lacs. The break up of proposed plant
cost is given in Table 2.9.
T ABLE 2.9: E CONOMIC O UTLINE OF THE PROJECT
Sl.No.
Head of Expenditure
Proposed Cost In Lacs INR
Land & Development
48.00
Building & Shed
138.00
Plant & Machinery
265.00
Misc. Fixed Assets
8.00
Preliminary
Expenses
Contingencies
20.00
pre-operative
8.00
Sub Total
487.00
Net Working Capital
430.00
Total Cost of the project
917.00
63 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 2.3: L AYOUT P LAN OF P ROPOSED HAC P LANT
64 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
2.8
MANUFACTURING PROCESS
In the proposed plant, PF Resin, MF Resin, UF Resin, Furan Resin, Catalyst Acid Base,
Catalyst Ester Base will be manufactured. The manufacturing processes, mass balance, flow
chart, etc are described in the following sections:
Manufacturing of Phenol Formaldehyde (PF) Resin,
Manufacturing of Melamine Formaldehyde (MF) Resin,
Manufacturing of Urea Formaldehyde (UF) Resin,
Manufacturing of Furan Resin,
Manufacturing of Catalyst Acid base,
Manufacturing of Catalyst Ester base
The details of products and production capacity are presented below.
Sl. No
Name of the Product
Total (Ton/Annum)
PF Resin
6000
MF Resin
480
UF Resin
3600
Furan Resin
720
Catalyst Acid base
720
Catalyst Ester base
480
Total
12000

2.8.1 M A N U F A C T U R I N G P R O C E S S O F P H E N O L F O R M AL D E H Y D E ( PF) R E S I N
Phenolic resins are very complex and various structures present in it depend on the ratio of
phenol to formaldehyde added, the pH of the reaction mixture and temperature of the reaction.
It includes synthetic thermosetting resins obtained by the reaction of Phenol with
Formaldehyde. Phenol Formaldehyde resins, as a group, are formed by a step - growth
polymerization reaction that can be either acid or base - catalyzed. Since formaldehyde exists
65 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
predominantly in solution as a dynamic equilibrium of Methylene Glycol Oligomers, the

concentration of the reactive form of formaldehyde depends on temperature and pH.
Formation and structure:
Phenolic Resins are the reaction products of phenol and/or substituted phenol with
formaldehyde. An unlimited variety of resins are possible depending on (1) the choice of
phenols, (2) the phenol: formaldehyde molar ratio, (3) the type and amount of catalyst
used, and (4) the time and temperature of reaction.
The active positions on the phenol molecule are the two ortho and one para positions.
When more than one mole of formaldehyde is reacted with one mole of phenol in the
presence of an alkaline catalyst, the following initial products can be formed:
Further heating of these initial reaction products results in condensation and an

increase in molecular weight. Condensation takes place between two methylol groups
to form a methylene ether link (a) or between a methylol group and an active ortho or
para hydrogen atom to yield a methylene link (b).
The amount of heating determines the final form of the product, e.g., whether the resin
is a low viscosity, water-soluble liquid, a higher viscosity liquid with little or no water
miscibility, or a grindable solid. Highly viscous forms may be dissolved in solvent after
the resin has been dehydrated. If the reaction is carried too far, the resole can gel.
Therefore the reaction is always conducted under carefully controlled conditions of time,
temperature, pH, and mole ratio of formaldehyde to phenol.
66 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Being thermostes, hydroxymethyl phenols will crosslink on heating to around 120C to

form methylene and methyl ether bridges. At this point the resin is a 3-dimensional
network, which is typical of polymerized phenolic resins. The high crosslinking gives this
type of
phenolic resin its hardness,
good thermal stability,
and chemical
imperviousness.
Manufacturing process:
A typical phenolic resin is made by a batch process in a jacketed, stainless steel
reaction kettle, equipped with turbine-blade or anchor type agitator and condenser.
Molten phenol and formalin (37 40% formaldehyde) is charged to the kettle and
agitation begun.
To make a resole resin, an alkaline catalyst such as sodium hydroxide is added to the
phenol and formaldehyde before heating the batch to 80-100C. Reaction temperatures
below 100C are controlled with vacuum.
Reaction times are generally 1-3 hr. Since a resole resin is capable of gelling in the still,
dehydration temperatures are kept below 105C by the application of vacuum.
Gel time on a 150C hot plate is a common test that is used to indicate the degree of
advancement of the resin and to determine when the batch should be discharged.
The low molecular weight, water soluble resins are finished at as low a temperature as
possible, usually around 50C, whereas the less reactive para-substituted resoles can
be finished at temperatures as high as 120C.
Chemical Reaction:
67 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Material Balance for PF resin per Batch

Input
Quantity (in kg)
Output
Quantity (in kg)
Phenol
1350
PF Resin
4242
Formalin
1855
Distillate Out
240
Para formaldehyde
90
Process Loss
Caustic soda
200
Caustic Potash
145
PTSA (Solid)
50
Silane
10
Dipentine
Total Output
4000
Water
540
Total Input
4242
68 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 2.4: P ROCSS FLOW DIAGRAMME OF PREPARATION OF PF RESIN
Raw Materials (Phenol, Formalin, Paraformaldehyde, Caustic)

and Water
Reaction Vessel /
Kettle
Pressure
3 kg/cm2
String and Heating

Temperature up to 90-95 C
WATER Circulation in
Coils
Conde
nser
Reflux (under
vacuum)
Cooling
Digestion
EXOTHERMIC REACTION START
(Temp. upto 100/105 C)
Distillat
e to
storage
for
reuse
Product Testing:
Phenol Formaldehyde
Resin
Packing
Storage of PF
resin
Dispatch
69 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Raw material requirement for the production of 500 MT. per month PF resin:
Sl.No.
Raw Material
Quantity (in Kg)
Phenol
168000
Formalin
232000
Caustic soda
24500
Caustic potash
18000
Para formaldehyde
10785
PTSA (Solid)
5857
Silane
1235
Dipentine
200
Water (from distillate storage & filter water)
67180
Total
527757
Process loss
250
Distillate out
27507
Yield
500 MT
Application:
Resoles are major polymeric resin materials widely used for gluing and bonding building
materials. Exterior plywood, Oriented Strand Board (OSB), engineered laminated
composite lumber is some of typical applications.
Phenolic resins have an excellent affinity for graphitic and other forms of carbon. Due to
these unique properties, phenolic resins find application in the manufacture of
electrodes, carbon-carbon composites, carbon seals etc. Phenolic resins are the
binders of choice for manufacturing the carbon brushes used in electrical motors,
starters etc.
Cured Phenolic resins demonstrate exceptional chemical resistance. Railroad cars,
storage tanks and heat transfer equipment are coated using phenolic resins.
Special phenolic resins in combination with the proper cure catalysts, surfactants and
blowing agents produce foam products. Phenolic foam has a unique set of properties
such as excellent fire and heat resistance and a low smoke and toxicity rating when
70 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
burned. They are used in floral foam (dry and wet foams), orthopedic foam (for making
foot print casts), insulating foams.
Phenolic resins are used in fibre felt manufacturers with reclaimed or virgin fibres to
produce thermal and acoustical insulation for the automotive and household appliance
industries. Felt manufacturers achieve optimum rigidity, sound absorption and
acoustical insulation performance by varying the density of the felt product. Phenolic
resins provide exceptional resistance under all environmental conditions. Specific
applications are:
Functional components used in visible areas (like package deck)
Below surface products used for padding and sound absorption (like hood liner)
Rigid parts used as substrate for decorative materials.
Different varieties of phenolic resins are widely consumed by the foundries across the
country. These resins are becoming popular as eco-friendly, cost effective, modernizes
castings in terms of quality, non-hazardous to the workers/users. These resins are
having impact on civilization as act as matrix of any kind of casting which give shapes
to the country. These resins are used as bonding material to make cores & molds of
various kind of sands. So, it plays an important role or required to construct the basic
structure of a casting. A wide range of metals like C.I, D.I, S.S, M.S etc can be cast as
these binders having an upgraded version of technology to get adopted by any variety
of metal. It helps users to get rid of any metallurgical problems while producing
important castings.
71 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
2.8.2 M A N U F A C T U R I N G P R O C E S S O F M E L AM I N E F O R M A L D E H Y D E (MF) R E S I N
Melamine formaldehyde is a hard, thermosetting plastic material made from melamine and
formaldehyde by polymerization. It is then used to cross-link with alkyd, epoxy, acrylic, and
polyester resins, used in surface coatings.
Formaldehyde is taken in a reaction vessel to which melamine powder is added slowly

and the mixture is then stirred well.
After about 15 minutes a solution of Caustic Soda (NaOH) is added to the mixture to
make it alkaline.
The mixture is then heated by hot water to raise its temperature gradually up to 90C for
3 hours to complete the formation of methylolmelamine.
The process is continued till the solution becomes clear.
It is there after cooled gradually to a temperature of 30C.
The solution is then stored in a storage drum.
Chemical Reaction:
72 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Material Balance for MF resin per Batch

Input
Quantity (in kg)
Output
Quantity (in kg)
Melamine
730
MF Resin
2502
Formalin
1410
Distillate Out
Nil
Caustic soda
30
Process Loss
MEG
10
Borax
10
Water
312
Total Input
2502
Total Output
2500
73 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 2.5: P ROCESS F LOW D IAGRAMME OF PREPARATION OF MF RESIN
Heating
Catalyst
Reactor Vessel
Melamine
82-85 C
Conden
ser
At Atmospheric Pressure
Cooling
Formalin
WATER Circulation in Coils
Reflux
Digestion
Temp. rise up to 85 C
EXOTHERMIC REACTION
START
Digestion time 23 hours
Product Testing
Melamine Formaldehyde
Resin
Packing
Storage of MF
resin
Dispatch
74 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Raw material requirement for the production of 40 MT. per month MF resin:
Sl.No.
Raw Material
Quantity (in Kg)
Melamine
11680
Formalin
22530
Caustic soda
490
Mono Ethylene Glycol (MEG)
154
Borax
154
Water (filter water)
5024
Total
40032
Process loss
32
Distillate out
Yield
40 MT
Application:
Aqueous solution of MF of certain viscosity is used as adhesive.
Water soluble MF resin is used in making aqueous based surface coating maintained
specially for marine application and is also used for making printing ink.
MF resins are used in production of laminated materials
The lower alkyl ethers of methylol melamine are widely used for shrink proofing of wool,
cotton.
MF resins have been utilized for several years as textile finishing agent especially in the
manufacturing of crease resistant fabrics.
It is also used for manufacturing of WWR & BWR grade plywood and decorative
laminates.
2.8.3 M A N U F A C T U R I N G P R O C E S S O F U R E A F O R M A L D E H Y D E ( UF) R E S I N
Urea formaldehyde resins are poly - condensation products of the reaction of formaldehyde
with urea. The relatively easy production of the UF Resins, their good solubility in water and
absence of colour, make these thermosetting polymers irreplaceable in the manufacture of
many wood based products. Due to the UF Resins low resistance to humidity the panels obtain
75 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
are suitable for interior use in dry condition. The specifications of the resin product such as the
molar ratio of formaldehyde to urea, solids content, viscosity, reactivity etc. are adjusted in
order to meet any customer requirement.
The resin is prepared by reacting urea with formaldehyde in a molar ratio of 1:1.8 to
1:2.2 generally. Urea reacts with formaldehyde under neutral or alkaline condition to
yield monomethylol urea, symmetrical dimethylol urea and trimethylol urea depending
on the ratio of the reactants.
The resinification process for urea formaldehyde occurs in two main stages, addition or
methylolation and condensation.
In the methylolation step, urea and formaldehyde are reacted under controlled
conditions using an alkaline catalyst. Typically, the methylolation step is carried out at a
pH of about 8.0. The methylolation stage usually results in a mixture of methylolated
species, monomethylol urea, and dimethylol urea and trimethylol urea.
This mono and dimethylol urea may be regarded as the monomer of the ureaformaldehyde resin.
In the second stage these methylol urea undergo condensation to form low molecular
weight polymers. The rate of reaction depends on pH. Acid catalyses the reaction in
many ways:
Formation of Methylene Bridge in amino nitrogen facilities in acidic medium.
Methylene ether linkages also can be formed in acidic medium.

76 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Two types of acid materials can be used, which are classified as (1) Direct catalysts &
(2) Latent catalysts.
Direct catalysts are inorganic and organic acids, acid salts. They are effective at all
temperatures. The latent catalysts are salts and esters which develop acidity upon
heating.
The solution is refluxed at 90-95C for about one hour to complete the formation of
Dimethylol urea.
The condensation reaction proceeds to a predetermined end point, and the resin
intermediate is cooled.
At this stage reaction is arrested by raising the pH of the resin to about 7.0 to 8.0 by
adding sodium hydroxide and cooled to ambient temperature by circulating water in
jacket and discharged from the vessel.
Chemical Reaction:
Material Balance for UF resin per Batch

Input
Quantity (in kg)
Output
Quantity (in kg)
Formalin
2902
UF Resin
Urea
680
Distillate Out
Nil
Melamine
85
Process Loss
Caustic Soda
20
Ammonia
40
TSP
Phosphoric Acid
Total Output
4000
Water (filter)
270
Total Input
4003
4003
77 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 2.6: P ROCESS F LOW D IAGRAMME OF UF RESIN
Heating
Catalyst
Reactor Vessel
Urea Melamine
At Atmospheric
Pressure
90-95 C
Cooling
Formalin
Con
dens
er
Jacket
Reflux
Mixing of Raw materials

Ammonia, TSP, Phosphoric Acid
Temp. rise up to 95 C
Digestion
EXOTHERMIC
REACTION START
Digestion time
2-3 hours
Product Testing
Urea Formaldehyde
Resin
Packing
Storage of UF
resin
Dispatch
78 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Raw material requirement for the production of 300 MT. per month UF resin:
Sl.No.
Raw Material
Quantity (in Kg)
Formalin
218000
Urea
51000
Melamine
6200
Caustic soda
1366
Ammonia
3000
Tri Sodium Phosphate (TSP)
200
Phosphoric acid
200
Water (from distillate storage & filter water)
20259
Total
300225
Process loss
225
Distillate out
Yield
300 MT
Application:
Urea Formaldehyde resins used in many manufacturing processes such as decorative
laminates, textiles, paper, wrinkle resistant fabrics, cotton blends, rayon, corduroy etc.
It is commonly used when producing electrical appliances casing (e.g; desk lamps) and
to glue wood together also.
The product is widely chosen as an adhesive resin due to its high reactivity, good
performance and low price.
It is also used as amino resins in automobile tires in order to improve bonding of rubber
to tire cord, paper for improving tear strength, moulding electrical devices, moulding jar
caps etc.
It is also used in manufacturing of plywood, flushdoors, blockboards, laminates etc.
79 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
2.8.4 M A N U F A C T U R I N G O F F U R A N R E S I N
Furan Resin is a low viscosity, liquid furfuryl alcohol resin designed primarily for use in mortar
cements. It is a thermoset resin requiring an acid catalyst to affect a cure. Properly catalyzed
resin will cure without the application of heat, although slightly elevated temperatures will
decrease the cure time.
Properties
Appearance
Density @ 25C
Viscosity @ 25C
pH
Free Formaldehyde
Nitrogen Content
Free flowing, pale yellow to red brown, transparent liquid

1.1 1.16 gm/cm3
1.1 1.16 gm/cm3
6.5-7.5
0.5 max
14%
Water Content
5%
Shelf life
6 months
Furfuryl alcohol-based resins are the most important industrial furan resins in terms of
usage and volume. The final cross-linked products exhibit outstanding properties and
characteristics.
Furfural replaces formaldehyde in the conventional production of phenolic resins.
Furfuryl alcohol readily resinilies or homopolymerizes in the presence of an acid
catalyst [such as mineral acids, organic acids, Lewis acids (boron halides, e.g., BF,)
and acyl halides] to produce liquid linear chains (oligomers). These chains consist
primarily of dimers and trimers that have methylene linkages between the furan rings.
The process essentially is a methylolation involving the condensation of the methylol
group of one furfuryl alcohol molecule with another molecule at the fifth position.
The furfuryl alcohol resinification process is exothermic; the necessary temperature
control is accomplished by cooling via either reflux or an external cooling fluid.
The process is carried to a predetermined viscosity end point, and the reaction is
stopped by adjusting the pH to between 5 and 8. The resulting liquid resin has a shelf
life of more than 6 months.
80 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Furfuryl alcohol also undergoes copolymerization with aldehydes such as formaldehyde

and furfural, and with phenols and urea in the presence of an aldehyde.
Resinification Reaction of Furfuryl Alcohol: These furfuryl alcohol resins cross link
(cure) in the presence of a strong acid catalyst via condensation. The terminal methyl01
group of one linear chain joins with the methylene bridge of another chain to form a
three-dimensional network structure.
Chemical Reaction:
Material Balance for Furan resin per Batch

Input
Quantity (in kg)
Output
Quantity (in kg)
Furfural Alcohol
2840
Furan Resin
4004
Urea
120
Process Loss
Formalin
480
Phthalic anhydride
40
Caustic Soda
Silane
32
Para formaldehyde
460
Water
25
Total Output
4000
Total Input
4004
81 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 2.7: P ROCESS F LOW D IAGRAMME OF F URAN RESIN
Pressure 3
kg/cm2
Caustic, Phthalic
Reactor Vessel
Furfural alcohol,
Silane
At Atmospheric
Pressure
Formalin, Urea
Stiring and Heating
Cooling
Cond
enser
Reflux
(under
vacuum)
Temperature up to 80-85
C
Jacket
Product Testing:
Furan Resin
Packing
Storage of
Furan resin
Dispatch
82 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Raw material requirement for the production of 60 MT. per month Furan resin:
Sl.No.
Raw Material
Furfural Alcohol
42600
Urea
1800
Formalin
7200
Pthalic anhydride
600
Caustic soda
105
Silane
480
Para formaldehyde
6900
Water
375
Total
60060
Process loss
Yield
Quantity (in Kg)
60
60 MT
Application:
Cement Adhesive: Furan resins have been extensively used in formulating mortars,
grouts and Setting beds for bricks lining destined to be exposed to highly corrosive
environments, such as concentrated acids or highly alkaline cleaning solutions.
Glass Fiber composite: Corrosion resistant glass fiber reinforced composites are also
produced on the basis of furfural alcohol thermosetting resins. Thus many furan-based
glass fiber reinforced materials have been available for many years, particularly for the
storage of chlorinated aromatic and aliphatic hydrocarbon solvents. Amongst the
composite use, one can site furfuryl alcohol resins reinforced with carbon filled woven
glass fiber (Commercialized under the name of Parmanite manufactured by the IKO
group, Cannada). Permanite based pipes are hard, tough and rigid with exceptional
resistance to thermal shocks. They can be used upto 140C temperature and should be
protected against high tensional, torsional and shear loads.
Furan Resins as Foundry binders: Furan resins have been extensively used as
foundry binders in combination with formaldehyde, urea, phenol and casein for
83 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
decades. The main advantages of furan resins are due to their excellent thermal
stability and remarkable resistance to acidic conditions, as well as to fire and corrosion.
Furan resin also find its application as wood adhesive: Regardless of the fact that
numerous investigations exist about the possibility of incorporating the furan
heterocycle into wood adhesive formulations, their industrial exploitation is still modest.
Dhamaney showed that the addition of furfural into cashew nut shell liquid adhesives
based on phenol-formaldehyde resins, using CuCl2 or CaCO3 as a hardner gave good
adhesive bonding for ordinary plywood.
2.8.5 M A N U F A C T U R I N G O F C AT A L Y S T A C I D B A S E
The Catalyst Acid base normally used for manufacturing of synthetic resin. The product is
prepared by mixing procedure only at room temperature and atmospheric pressure. Additional
heat input or generation of heat doesnt occur during product preparation.
Initially Para Toluene Sulphonic Acid (PTSA) mixed with water at room temperature and
atmospheric pressure and stirred by mechanical stirrer and cooling done in jacketed
vessels.
Hydrofloric acid as 60% solution to be added to the solution.
Sulphuric acid of 85% concentration to be added in the solution and stirring to be done.
Ammonium bifuoride powder added in water and a solution will be prepared.
Then the mixture will be stirred by mechanical stirring for about 30 minutes.
The product testing will be done with PF resin.
The product will be packed in polyjar as the catalyst acid base is corrosive.
Material Balance for Furan resin per Batch
Input
Quantity (in kg)
PTSA (Liquid)
Sulphuric Acid
Hydrofluoric Acid
Ammonium Bi-fluoride
2600
490
155
50
Water
Total Input
705
4000
Output
Quantity (in kg)
Catalyst Acid base

Distillate Out
Process Loss
4000
Nil
Nil
Total Output
4000
84 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 2.8: P ROCESS F LOW D IAGRAMME OF C ATALYST ACID - B ASE
Water, PTSA
Reactor Vessel
HF, H2SO4
At Atmospheric
Pressure
Temp.. 3035C (Room

temp.)
Cooling
Ammonium Bifluoride
Con
dens
er
Mixing and Stiring

30-35C (Room temp.)
30 minutes
Jacket
Product Testing:
Catalyst Acid base
with PF resin
Packing
Storage of
Catalyst Acid
base
Dispatch
85 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Raw material requirement for the production of 60 MT. per month Catalyst Acid base:
Sl.No.
1
2
3
4
5
Raw Material
PTSA (Liquid)
Sulphuric Acid
Hydrofluoric Acid
Ammonium bi-fluoride
Water (Filter water)
Total
Process loss
Distillate out
Yield
Quantity (in Kg)

39000
7286
2314
771
10631
60002
0
0
60 MT
2.8.6 C AT A L Y S T - E S T E R B A S E
The Catalyst Ester base normally used for manufacturing of synthetic resin. The
product is prepared by mixing procedure only at room temperature and atmospheric
pressure. Additional heat input or generation of heat doesnt occur during product
preparation.
Tri Acetine or Ethylene Glycol Diacetate (EGDA) in liquid form will be taken in Reaction
vessel (jacketed) at room temperature and atmospheric pressure.
Dibasic Ester (DBE) in liquid form will be added through pump in the reaction vessel.
Ethylene Dichloride (EDC) in liquid form also added in the reaction vessel.
After the input of all the raw materials mechanical stirring will be done for about 30
minutes at room temperature and atmospheric pressure.
After the preparation of product testing will be done with PF resin.
Then the product will be packed in polujar or MS drum as it is not corrosive
Material Balance for Catalyst Ester base per batch
Input
TAC
EGDA
DBE
EDC 99
Total Input
Quantity (in kg)

2800
400
400
400
4000
Output
Quantity (in kg)
Catalyst Ester base

Distillate Out
Process Loss
4000
Nil
Nil
Total Output
4000
86 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 2.9: P ROCESS F LOW D IAGRAMME OF C ATALYST E STER BASE
TAC or EGDA
Dibasic Ester
(DBE)
Reactor Vessel
At Atmospheric
Pressure
Temp.. 3035C (Room

temp.)
Cooling
Ethylene Dichloride
(EDC) fluoride
Con
dens
er
Mixing and Stiring

30-35C (Room temp.)
30 minutes
Jacket
Product Testing:
Cataly Ester base with
PF Resin
Packing
Storage of
Catalyst Ester
base
Dispatch
87 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Raw material requirement for the production of 40 MT. per month Catalyst Ester base:
Sl.No.
Raw Material
Quantity (in Kg)
Tri acetine (Liquid)
28000
Ethylene Glycol Diacetate (EGDA)
4000
Dibasic Ester (DBE)
4000
Ethylene Dichloride (EDC)
4000
Total
40000
Process loss
Distillate out
Yield
2.9
40 MT
U T I L I T I E S & AU X I L I A R Y F A C I L I T I E S
2.9.1 P O W E R
The proposed plant will require 150 kW connected electrical load, which will be sourced from
West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited (WBSEDCL). One DG set of 140
kVA capacity will be installed at the proposed plant to meet the power requirement in the event
of grid power failure.
2.9.2 F U E L
The fuel requirement with their source and storage details will be as given below:
T ABLE 2.11: D ETAILS O F F UEL
Sl.No Sources
Fuel
Consumption
Storage
Operating Condition
Press.
Boiler
LDO
65 Ltr/Hour
D. G. sets HSD
23 Ltr/ Hour
Temp. C
Drums/ Tanks Atmospheric Atmospheric temp

Drums
Atmospheric Atmospheric temp

2.9.3 W A T E R
For the proposed project, total fresh water requirement is estimated as 13 KLD. The detailed
breakup of water consumption is provided in Table 2.12. Water balance diagram is shown in
Figure 2.10.
88 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 2.12: F RESH W ATER R EQUIREMENT

Purpose
Proposed In KLD
Source
Domestic
Process
Floor Washing & Plantation
1.5
3.5
0.5
Ground Water
Ground Water
Distillate and Ground water
Cooling
Boiler
Green Belt
Total
3
2
2.5
13
Ground Water
Ground Water
Ground Water
T ABLE 2.13: W ASTE W ATER G ENERATION

Source of
Pollution
Domestic
Waste Water
Generation
(in M3/day)
1.2
Process
0.9
Boiler
0.2
Floor
washing
1.4
Cooling
0.9
Mitigation Measures
It will be directed to Septic Tank and discharged in soak

pit.
It will be treated in Effluent Treatment plant & reused in
process
process
process

process
89 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Total Water Requirement

13 KLD
3 KLD
0.5 KLD
1.5 KLD
3.5 KLD
2.5 KLD
2 KLD
Evaporation
Domestic
1.5 KLD
Septic tank
1.2 KLD
Process
3.5 KLD
Washing
0.9 KLD + 0.5 KLD
1.4
KLD
Distillate
0.9 KLD
Cooling
3 KLD
Blow Down
0.9 KLD
Boiler
2 KLD
Blow Down
0.2 KLD
Soak pit
0.9
KLD
2.5 KLD
Reused in
Process
0.2 KLD
0.9
KLD
Effluent Treatment Plant 2.5 KLD
F IGURE 2.10: W ATER B ALANCE D IAGRAMME FOR PROPOSED PLANT OF HAC
90 | P a g e
Plantation
2.5 KLD

WEST BENGAL
2.9.4 B O I L E R
At the proposed HAC plant, single LDO fired boiler will be installed to meet the heating
requirement of the manufacturing processes. The LDO consumption will be 65 ltr/ hour (1.4
ton/ day) in fully automatic steam boiler. Maximum pressure will be up to 12.5 kg/cm2.
Technical details of boiler are given in Table 2.14.
T ABLE 2.14: T ECHNICAL D ETAILS O F B OILER
Type of Source
Steam generator
Capacity
1.5 MT
Pressure
12.5 kg. /cm2
Fuel
LDO (65 ltr/hour) fully automatic steam boiler
Max. unit outlet temp.
200C
Main unit
One heat exchanger with two helical vertical coils

enclosed in a MS shell.
Accessories
One combustion furnace
One centrifugal type circulating pump.
One induced draft fan
One forced draft fan
2.9.5 C O O L I N G T O W E R
Approx. 3 KLD make up water will required for cooling purposes and approx 0.9 KLD bleed
off blow down will be generated from the cooling tower.
2.10
SOURCE OF POLLUTION AND CONTROL MEASURES
The anticipated pollution sources from the proposed HAC plant and the respective
control/mitigation measures for the minimization of the same are presented in following
sections.
2.10.1
WATER POLLUTION & MANAGEMENT
Plant Effluent Management

As given in water balance diagram, 0.9 KLD distillate generated from the process shall be
re-used as washings purpose. 1.4 KLD effluent generated from reactors and floor washings
will be sent to Effluent Treatment (ETP) for treatment. 0.9 KLD bleed off blow down from
cooling tower will also be sent to ETP for treatment). 0.2 KLD boiler blow down will also be
91 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
sent to ETP for treatment. Total 2.5 KLD effluent will be generated from the plant and treated
in well designed effluent treatment plant (ETP) and will be reused in the process. 1.2 KLD
sewage generated from the plant will be treated in septic tank followed by soak pit.
Proposed Effluent Treatment Plant
The proposed effluent treatment plant will provide primary treatment system for the
treatment of the process effluent. Effluent from the process/washing will be collected in
collection tank and then effluent will be transferred in mixer where, pH will be adjusted to 3 to
3.5 by adding H2SO4. After that FeSO4.7H2O and H2O2 added into the mixer tank. The
amount of H2O2 will be half of the phenol concentration. Residual H2O2 will be consumed by
enzyme catalyses to prevent interference with COD analysis. Fe+2 ion concentration will be
1:20 of hydrogen peroxide. Further, waste water will be transferred into oxidation vessel.
In oxidation vessel for Photo Fenton process, O2 will be passed from the bottom side of the
tank. Temperature will be maintained between 30C to 35C by cooling system. Phenol
degradation will take place in presence of sun light or UV lamp. During rainy and winter
season the photo Fenton process will occur into the closed vessel which contain UV lamp.
After that, waste water will be transferred to settling tank where ETP sludge will be settled
down in conical portion. It will be removed in sludge drying beds. After drying, the dried
sludge will be collected, packed in HDPE bags and stored in a separate storage area and
disposed off to the West Bengal Waste Management Group, Haldia. Supernatant water will
be transferred into steam operated evaporator. The capacity of evaporator will be around
500 Liter considering worst scenario of effluent quantity.
Details of effluent treatment plant units are given in Table 2.15. Schematic diagram for
Effluent Treatment Plant is shown in Figure 2.11.
T ABLE 2.15: D ETAILS OF E FFLUENT T REATMENT P LANT U NITS
Sl.No Name of Unit
Description
Details
1.
Purpose
For collection of effluents from
Collection Tank
different sources like process and washing

Size(m)
1.25 x 2.0 x 1.25

3
2.
Capacity (m )
MOC
RCC
Homogenizing
Purpose
To mix the effluent homogeneously
Tank
Size (m)
2.0 x 1.5 x 2.5
92 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No Name of Unit
Description
Details
Capacity (m3)
7.5
MOC
RCC
Accessories
Stirrer for mixing and pump for transfer effluent

to settling tank
3.
Photo Fenton
Purpose
Advance oxidation of effluent in sunlight or UV
Process Vessel
4.
Settling Tank
Light
Size (m)
1.5 x 1.5 x 1.0
Capacity (m3)
MOC
RCC
Accessories
Coil for cooling purpose
Purpose
To settle the settable solids from treated

effluent
5.
Evaporator
Size (m)
Dia. 1.5 x Ht. 1.15
Capacity(m3)
MOC
MS
Purpose
to evaporate the treated wastewater
Rating
415 L/hr
Accessories
Vessel type evaporator with external heating

arrangement
6.
MOC
MS
Sludge Drying
Purpose
To dry the sludge generated from settling tank
Bed
Size (m)
1.5 x 1.25 x 1.0

3
Capacity (m )
1.875
Nos. 4
MOC Brick Masonry
ETP sludge generated in the proposed ETP will be stored in HDPE lined storage tanks, and
will be transported to West Bengal Waste Management Group, Haldia.
Domestic Sewage Management
About 1.5 m3/day sewage will be generated from domestic activities. Domestic waste water
will be disposed off through septic tank and soak pit system.
93 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Photo Fenton Process

Vessel
Effluent
Collection
Tank
Homogenization
Tank for Mixing
(Oxidation by UV Lamps)
Heating Coil
Settling Tank
Supernatant
Sludge from
Evaporator
Evaporator
Sludge Drying Bed
F IGURE 2.11: S CHEMATIC D IAGRAM FOR E FFLUENT T REATMENT P LANT
94 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
2.10.2
AI R P OLLUT IO N M AN AGEME NT
Source of Air Pollution and Its Control

The source of air pollution at the proposed plant will be flue gas emissions from 1.5 TPH
Steam Generator (Baby boiler) to meet the heating requirement and 140 KVA capacity DG
Set to be operated during grid power failure. The details of stacks and characteristics of the
various flue gases generated at the proposed plant are as given in Table 2.16 with air
pollution control measures.
T ABLE 2.16: S TACK D ETAILS
Sl.
Stack attached Height & Fuel
Expected
No
to
Pollutant
Dia.
of
APC Measures
the stack
in meter
1.
Steam
30
Generator
2.
LDO:
65 SO2, NOx
Ltr/ Hour
Adequate
stack
height
provided to vent out fluu gas
(Baby boiler)
emissions to provide natural
1.5 MT
dispersion.
Stand-by
D.G.Set-1
12
No.
HSD:
23 SO2, NOx
Lit/hr
Adequate stack height to be

provided
(140 KVA)
as
per
CPCB
guidelines (2.5 km above

roof)
3.
Fugitive
Not
Not
Fugitive
Best engineering practices
Emissions
Applicable
Applicable
Emissions
will be adopted to control

fugitive
emissions
as
described in the EMP,
2.10.3
H AZ A R D O U S A N D N O N H AZ A R D O U S W AS T E G E N E R AT I O N & D I S P O S AL
METHOD
Used Oil as hazardous waste as per the Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and
Transboundary Movement) Rule, 2008 generated from the proposed plant at the time of
maintenance of DG set. Used oil will be generated from DG Set, which will be stored in
drums and sent to registered recyclers West Bengal Waste Management Group, Haldia for
treatment and reuse.
Other hazardous wastes generated from the proposed HAC plant and their disposals are
given Table 2.17:
95 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL

Sl.
Description Category
Source
Quantity
Mode of Disposal
No
Hazardous Waste
1
Used Oil/
5.1
Spent oil
DG sets/
3 Litre/ Month
Maintenance
Collection, storage and sent to

West
Bengal
Waste
Management Group, Haldia

2
Discarded
33.1
Stores
50 Kg/ Month
Plastic Bags
3
ETP sludge
Sent to West Bengal Waste

34.3
ETP
50 Kg/ Month

Cotton
5.2
Maintenance
20 Kg/ Month
Waste
5
Discarded

33.3
Stores
Drums/
300
Nos./Year
Container
Collection,
storage
decontamination
or
and
Reuse
within premises/ sell to scrap

vendor
2.10.4
NOISE POLLUTION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
The major source of noise pollution at the proposed plant will be DG Set. At the proposed
plant, only acoustic enclosure fitted DG set will be used. Therefore, noise generated from
DG set will be within prescribed standards.
2.10.5
GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT PLAN
A Green Belt will be developed based on the following principles:
Plants that grow fast will be preferred.
Preference for high canopy covers plants.
Perennial and evergreen plants will be preferred.
Plants which have a high Air Pollution Tolerance Index (APTI) will be preferred.
Thick green belt development is planned for the attenuation of noise pollution and to
maintain ambient noise quality within the statutory limit. The main objective of the greenbelt
is to provide a barrier between the plant and the surrounding areas. A greenbelt
development plan will be prepared and implemented along with the project.
96 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The main objective of the greenbelt is to provide a barrier between the plant and the
surrounding areas. The greenbelt helps to capture the fugitive emissions and to
attenuate the noise generated in the plant apart from improving the aesthetics of the
plant site.
The Greenbelt will be adequately sized, 33% of plant area i.e. 0.45 Acres and will
have a suitable density so as to mitigate the effects of emissions from the plant. The
treated effluents from the plants will be utilized for the greenbelt development.
Total number of tree to be planted around 350 nos. The greenbelt area will be
developed within plant boundary and at the periphery of the company premises.
Thus, the proposed project will have significant positive impact on the ambient air &
will reduce pollution load from environment.
The landscaping of the plant will be carried out. Roads for vehicular movement will
be paved and adequate mitigaton measures will be provided to prevent fugitive
emissions.
2.10.6
S AF E T Y & O C C U P AT I O N A L M E A S U R E S F O R S T O R A G E , H A N D L I N G O F
R AW M A T E R I AL S & P R O D U C T S
To prevent any spillage, accident and impacts of human health for safety measure will be
taken while handling the raw material and products:
Separate storage area for the raw material & product.
Solid Raw Material Stored in Separate Storage area with proper identification
labeling.
Liquid Raw Material is stored in suitable tanks at separate demarcated space.
Separate area for packing of the product.
Storage area with separate Bunds for separate chemicals to contain any kind of
leakage and to avoid mixing of the chemicals in case of leakages.
Liquid Raw material charging will be done with utmost care and by mechanical seal
type of pump to avoid any leakages.
Personal Protective Equipment (viz. dust mask, gloves, goggles & gum boots) are
being provided to the workers and plant operators.
97 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Occupational Health Centre with Male Nurse is provided within the company
premises.
First Aid kit has been provided at various locations within the plant.
Fire Hydrant has been installed within the premises.
Fire Extinguisher has been provided at the vulnerable points within the premises.
Medical Check-up for workers and employee at pre-employment and periodical

stages.
2.11
Q U AL I T Y C O N T R O L P L AN
To produce high quality resins, it is imperative that sampling & testing of various raw
materials, in-process materials and the final product will be carried out regularly at the
required intervals for taking corrective action timely. HAC will take necessary actions to
ensure consistent product quality and to permit the trouble free and cost effective operation,
the quality control for sampling & testing of various raw materials in-process shall be carried
out.
While proposing the methods and procedures for quality control, the following aspects have
been taken into account.
Requirements and norms, particularly in ore testing.
Corrective measures to be undertaken as quickly as possible in the process

operation.
Desired degree of automation.
Available raw materials and process equipment.
98 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
CHAPTER 3
DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
99 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
C HAPTER 3: D ESCRIPTION OF THE E NVIRONMENT

3.1
INTRODUCTION
The proposed plant may cause adverse environmental impacts on the surrounding
environment. In order to know the cumulative impacts due to the proposed plant on the
surrounding environment, it is very important to know the baseline environmental status in
the study area. This chapter gives an idea and description of the environmental status of the
study area with reference to the prominent environmental attributes. The general study area
covers about 10 km radius with respect to the proposed project site.
To assess the baseline environmental status within the study area, primary and secondary
data collection program was undertaken for carrying out environmental impact during the
study period i.e., from 7th January 2015 to 8th April 2015 by SGS Laboratory, Kolkata.
Baseline data was collected for ambient air quality, soil, water quality, noise levels, land use
pattern, flora & fauna and the socio-economic aspects. Secondary data has been collected
from authentic sources viz. government/non government agencies, Irrigation department,
Indian Meteorological department (IMD), ground water board, etc. Various environmental
components were monitored and sampled analyzed during the study period. The
reconnaissance field survey and consultations were also carried out with local people and
forest department to understand and record the biological environment prevailing in the area
and the same was verified against published information and literature. Besides this, the
socio-economic environment has been studied through consultations with various
stakeholders and additionally obtained from census data. The detailed information on the
geology, hydrogeology, prevailing natural hazards of the area have been collected from
literature reviews,
past
studies and information made available by government
departments/local agencies.
The major purposes of describing the environmental settings of the area are:
To understand environmental characteristics of the area.
To assess the existing environmental quality, as well as the environmental impacts of the
future operations being carried out.
To identify environmentally significant factors or areas that could preclude any future
development.
100 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
3.2
METHODOLOGY OF CONDUCTING BASELINE STUDY
The various steps involved in baseline data study are described below:
Identification of significant environmental parameters
Assessment of the existing baseline status within the study area with respect to air,
water, noise, soil and socio-economic components of environment.
The methodology adapted to study of various individual components of the baseline

environment is described in this chapter.
3.3
ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING OF THE STUDY AREA
An area covering 10 km radius from the proposed plant site has been considered the study
area for the baseline. Baseline data collection was carried out with respect to meteorology,
flora, fauna, land, geology, hydrogeology and socioeconomic factors of the area. The
meteorology, air quality, water quality, noise levels, soil quality and ecological study have
been evaluated based on this primary sampling and analysis.
T ABLE 3.1: E NVIRONMENTAL S ENSITIVITY
Sl.
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Particulars
Details
Project location
Village - Ishwaripur, Bandipur Gram Panchayat, PS - Khardah,

District - 24 Parganas (North), State-West Bengal
Total site area
1.34 Acres (58369.95 Sq.ft)
Latitude
224424.63 N
Longitude
882446.60 E
Elevation above 30 ft of MSL
MSL
Land
Use Most of the Project area was of mixed type mostly comprising
Pattern
uncultivable and fallow land. The land use of the Project site has
been identified as industrial land.
Climatic
Conditions
(As per IMD)
May is the hottest month with temperature as high as 40.3C

January is the coldest month with temperature as low as 8.4C.
Annual rainfall in this area is of the tune of 1650 mm
Mean relative humidity rises more than 80%
Existing nallah available at site connected to main drain.
Existing
drainage
pattern at site
Hills
10
Forest Land
No forest land in the Project area;
No Hills land in the Project area;
101 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No
11
Particulars
12
13
14
Nearest village
Nearest Town
Dist.
Head
quarters
Nearest Railway
Station
Nearest
Highway
Nearest Airport
Ishwaripur at 1 Km
Kolkata (19 km)
Kolkata (19 km)
Historical/
Archaeological
places
National
Parks/Wild Life
Sanctuary
Defense
Installation
No historical/ archaeological places within 10 km radius from the

Project site.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Surface
bodies
water Rivers: Hoogly river (5.5 km west side)
Howrah railway Station approx 20km, Khardah station approx 4

Km.
NH 34
Dumdum airport (Netaji Subhash International Airport) is about

10.5 Km.
Nearest Seaport Kolkata (20 km) and Haldia (85 km)
Ecologically
No notified eco-sensitive areas are present within 10 km radius
sensitive zones from the Project site.
within
10-km
distance
Sunderban area is about 83 km south east from the project site.
23
Major
industries
24
Seismic Zone
3.4
Details
No national parks/ wild life sanctuary is present within 10 km

radius from the Project site.
Sunderban area is about 83 km south east from the project site.
No defence facility exists within 10 Km from area/distance from
the site. Fort Willium, Kolkata is about 19 km from the project
site.
Steel Casting, foundry, chemical, packaging etc.
Zone III
P AR A M E T E R S F O R S T U D Y
The various parameters monitored and studied for the baseline study are discussed in the
following sections:
Topography & Physiographic
Geology & Soil
Water Environment
102 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Meteorology and micrometeorology
Air Environment
Noise Environment
Ecological Environment
Socio-Economic Environment
3.5
L AN D E N V I R O N M E N T
3.5.1 T O P O G R A P H Y
The
proposed
plant
site
is
located
within
the Ganges-Brahmaputra delta.
The
river Ganges flows along the entire western border of the district. The thick human
settlements are linearly spread all along on either side of the Ganga river (Hooghly river)
which is a major water body in the project region flowing north to south towards west of
project site at a distance of about 5 km. The physiography of the region is that of a typical
alluvial plain with gentle ups and downs. The terrain is essentially composed of river borne
soft sediments deposited under fluviatile environment. The general slope is from north-west
to south-east. The dominant slope of the land is towards south with average elevation
varying from 3.5 m to 2.5 m above MSL.
3.5.2 G E O L O G Y
The study area falling mostly in Barrackpore Block of North 24 parganas district of West
Bengal is a part of upper delta plain of the Bhagirathi-Hugli delta and is characterized by a
mosaic of north south trending linear meander belts. The major Bhagirathi distributaries
forming the western boundary of the study area has a characteristic 2-3 km wide levee
developed on the eastern bank with a maximum height of about 8 m above mean sea level
sloping to the south and east. The landscape otherwise is flat with very minor relief with lowlying marshes and swamps in between the meander belts that are often characterized by
typical aggraded meander scrolls and rivers. The study area is underlain by quaternary
sediments consisting of clay, silt and various grades of sand gravel and pebble. No hard
rock geological formation is found here. Lithological log indicates the presence of a clay bed
at the top of the geological succession with thickness varying from 10-40 m. Alternate clay
and sand bed exists further in the downward direction. A group of granular aquifer is found
between 250-650 m below ground level. These layers are being tapped as groundwater
sources. The unconsolidated alluvial sediments of quaternary age have over laid the older
deposits of tertiary age as noticed in this pile of alluvium. The top most sediment, belonging
to recent alluvium contains mostly clay.
103 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The soils have been formed from the alluvium deposited by Ganga and its tributaries and
sub tributaries viz. Ajoy, Damodar, Kansabati, Bhagirathi, Haldi, Rupnarayan etc. These
soils are greatly variable in their morphological, physical and chemical properties depending
upon the geomorphic situations, moisture regime and degree of profile development. The
soils of this sub-region have high nutrient content and mineral resource with a high potential
for a large variety of agricultural and horticultural crops.
In the project area the subsoil profile indicates four major strata as obtained from the four
boreholes as follows:
TOP SOIL- It consists of filled up soil. It extends up to 3 m depth below the G.L
STRATUM I- It consists of soft dark grey to brackish grey silty clay with D.W. & vegetation
matters. It extends up to 12m depth below the G.L.
STRATUM II- From 12m depth stiff bluish grey silty clay layer starts. It extends up to 17.5 m
depth below the G.L.
STRATUM III- Stiff to very stiff yellowish grey silty clay extends up to termination depth of 20
m below the G.L.
3.5.3 S O I L Q U AL I T Y
The variations in soil characteristics are mainly dependent on lithology, topography, climate,
vegetation cover, etc. Most of the properties related to soil morphology are inherited from the
parent rock types and their mineralogical assemblage. The soil of the study area is clayey
and sandy silt.
To establish the base line data with respect to soil quality in the study area, five numbers of
soil samples were collected from the study area for analysis of scheduled parameters by
collecting grab soil samples from five (05) locations within the study area. The soil sampling
locations along with their respective distance and directions from the proposed plant are
detailed in Table 3.2 and shown in Figure 3.1. The standard classification of soil based
values of parameters is as given below:
104 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 3.2: L OCATION DETAILS OF S OIL SAMPLING

Sl. Location
No.
Location Coordinate
Code
(Latitude/ Longitude)
1.
Project
Site
SQ1
2.
SQ2
4.
Near
Project
Site-1
Near
Project
Site-2
Doperia
5.
Jamtagarh SQ5
3.
SQ3
SQ4
Land use
2244.406'N 8824.776'E Private

Industrial
Area
2244.390'N 8824.737'E Private
Industrial
Area
2244.465'N 8824.737'E Private
Industrial
Area
2243.771'N 8824.110'E Agricultural
field
2244.272'N 8825.823'E Agricultural
field
Aerial
Distance
from
Project
Site
-
Direction
from
Project
Site
-
0.08
Km.
SW
0.13
Km.
NW
1.64
Km.
1.81
Km.
SW
E
The standard classification of soil is given in Table 3.3:

T ABLE 3.3: S TANDARD C LASSIFICATION OF S OIL
Sl.No. Parameters
Classification
1
pH
<4.5 Extremely acidic
4.51- 5.00 Very strongly acidic
5.01-6.00 moderately acidic
6.01-6.50 slightly acidic
6.51-7.30 Neutral
7.31-7.80 slightly alkaline
7.81-8.50 moderately alkaline
8.51-9.0 strongly alkaline
>9.01 very strongly alkaline
2
Salinity Electrical Conductivity

(S/cm) (1ppm = 640 S/cm)
Upto 1.00 Average
Organic Carbon (%)
Upto 0.2: very less
1.01-2.00 harmful to germination

2.01-3.00 harmful to crops (sensitive to salts)
0.21-0.4: less
0.41-0.5 medium,
0.51-0.8: on an average sufficient
0.81-1.00: sufficient
>1.0 more than sufficient
Nitrogen (kg/Ha)
Upto 50 very less

51-100 less
105 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No. Parameters
Classification
101-150 good
151-300 Better
>300 sufficient
Potassium (kg/ha)
0 -120 very less

120-180 less
181-240 medium
241-300 average
301-360 better
>360 more than sufficient
Phosphorus (kg/ha)
Upto 15 very less

16-30 less
31-50 medium,
51-65 on an average sufficient
66-80 sufficient
>80 more than sufficient
Source: Hand book of Agriculture, ICAR
F IGURE 3.1 S OIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS WITHIN THE STUDY AREA

106 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
3.5.3.1
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
The analysis results describing physico-chemical characteristics of soil in the representative

locations are given in Table 3.4.
The soil of the study area are formed through alluvial deposits and overlain by more recent
back swamp deposition. The soil is light to dark coloured. Soil in the area is mostly sandy
clay loam or clay in texture and contains large percentage of sand and clay. Hence, possess
low water holding capacity. Only in areas close to river, soil is sandy clay. Alluvial soil is
often very fertile.
pH of the soil samples vary from 7.36 to 7.85. All the soil samples found to be slightly
alkaline as per the standard classification of ICAR. The electrical conductivity found to be
within a range from 43.6 mhos/cm to 560 mhos/cm. The texture of soil found to be silty in
nature and silt content is maximum in project site (SQ 1). The water holding capacity found
to be maximum in soil sample SQ 4 and minimum in case of SQ 5. While the moisture
content found to be maximum in case of SQ 2 and lowest in case of SQ 1. Almost all the
samples found to be rich in calcium & magnesium content.
T ABLE 3.4: R ESULTS OF S OIL S AMPLE ANALYSIS
Date of soil sampling: 29.04.2015 and 06.05.2015
Sl.
No
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Parameter
Texture
Sand
Silt
Clay
pH(1:2)
Electrical
Conductivity
Cation
exchange
capacity
Potassium
Sodium
Calcium
Magnesium
Sodium
Absorption
Ratio
Unit
SQ-1
Project
Site
SQ-3
Near
Project
Site-2
-42
30
28
7.71
265
SQ-4
Doperia
SQ-5
Jamtagarh
-26.8
44.0
29.2
7.80
310
SQ-2
Near
Project
Site-1
--32
38
30
7.65
43.6
%
%
%
mhos/
cm
meq/ kg
-26
42
32
7.85
560
-24.9
43.9
31.2
7.36
159.5
20.4
26.1
19.9
14
24.5
%
mg/ kg
mg/ kg
mg/ kg
Meq/ l
0.28
265.59
11975.26
7942.55
0.5
0.63
280.61
5951.23
11351.23
0.5
0.58
118.1
5743.18
10557.75
0.2
0.46
346.83
12373.34
8338.23
0.6
0.37
340.34
4063.29
7836.06
0.7
107 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No
Parameter
10
Total Organic
Carbon
Moisture
Content
Water Holding
Capacity
11
12
Unit
SQ-1
Project
Site
SQ-3
Near
Project
Site-2
1.86
SQ-4
Doperia
SQ-5
Jamtagarh
0.5
SQ-2
Near
Project
Site-1
1.96
1.81
0.56
3.1
4.54
4.17
3.26
3.7
54.3
59.49
58.8
64.73
53.7
The particle size distribution of soil samples is shown in Fig 3.2.
F IGURE 3.2: P ARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION OF SOIL SAMPLES
108 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Ternary diagram showing the nature of soil type, is shown in Fig 3.3.
F IGURE 3.3: T ERNARY DIAGRAM SHOWING THE NATURE OF SOIL TYPE , (USDA)
3.5.4 N AT U R A L H AZ A R D
3.5.4.1
SEISMICITY OF THE STUDY ARE A
The Bureau of Indian Standards has categorized the entire India into zones depending upon
the degree of proneness to earthquakes. The Zone I signify lesser degree while Zone V
signifies highest order. The northern and southern most parts of West Bengal are classified
as Zone IV and rest part of the state is classified as Zone III.
As per the Figure 3.4, the project site located in North 24 Parganas falls under earthquake
zone III.
109 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 3.4: S EISMIC Z ONING M AP OF I NDIA

3.5.4.2
W I N D & C Y C L O N E H A Z AR D
Wind & cyclone hazard mapping was conducted as per the basic wind speed map (IS:
875(3)-1987). The site falls in Very High Damage Risk Zone - B (vb = 55 m/s). Figure 3.5
depicting Cyclone zoning on India map while Figure 3.6 for cyclone hazard map of West
110 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Bengal (Source: West Bengal Disaster Management Department). As per the cyclone
hazard map, the project site is located in the very high damage risk zone.
Project Site
F IGURE 3.5: W IND & C YCLONE Z ONING M AP OF I NDIA
111 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Project Site
F IGURE 3.6: C YCLONE H AZARD M AP OF W EST B ENGAL

3.5.5 G E O H Y D R O L O G Y A N D D R A I N A G E P A T T E R N
The hydro geological studies were carried out in the area to understand the local geology,
geo-morphological features, drainage network, and aquifer characteristics. Accordingly
various components controlling the hydro geological regime of the study area have been
studied.
Based on the geological and geomorphologic set up, the entire state of West Bengal can be
divided into two broad hydro geological units namely fissured formations and porous
formations. The porous formations cover North 24 Parganas district of West Bengal.
The occurrence and ground water movement in porous formations is controlled by primary
porosities of the sediments. The ground water in these formations occurs both under water
table and in confined condition. Aquifers are fairly thick & regionally extensive with large
yield prospect of 150 m3/hr. In the project area, the ground water table was observed in dug
wells and boreholes located at little different location within the study area indicate the water
112 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
level is at 12 m to 18.4 m depth below the ground level. The average rain fall for the region is
1621 mm. This rainfall recharges ground water table and determine the drainage pattern of
the area. Perched/shallow water tables are recorded from 2 to 10m bgl, within the buffer
zone area. In most part of the buffer zone area, the depth to water level is at the very surface
i.e. 2 to 5 m bgl except northern part, where the water level is 5 m to 10m bdl.
The shallow water level is due to presence of a number of surface water bodies spread in
most part of the study area. Depths of water are shown in Fig 3.7.
Project Site
F IGURE 3.7: D EPTH OF W ATER LEVEL M AP OF W EST B ENGAL

Ganga is the main drainage system of the area supported by all other drainage system.
Drainage systems of the study area cater by Sonai Khaal in the North West & Noyai Khaal in
the East. The predominant drainage pattern of the area is dendritic and in some cases
113 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
parallel drainage system can be observed which is mainly towards the southern part of study
area.
3.5.6 L AN D U S E P AT T E R N
The mapping of land use and land cover of the area falling within the 10 km buffer zone of
the proposed site is undertaken with the help of topographical data, satellite data and field
studies. The majority of the study area falls under built-up (urban and rural) and agriculture
crop lands. Also a number of water bodies are located buffer zone area.
Methodology for Land Use Land Cover Mapping
The land use and land cover (LULC) map have been prepared by adopting the interpretation
techniques of the image in conjunction with collateral data. Image classification was done by
using visual interpretation techniques and digital classification using ArcGIS 9.3.1 image
processing software. LANDSAT (IRS P6 LISS3) image were acquired and used to evaluate
LULC changes. The image processing software is used for preprocessing, rectification, and
classifying the satellite data for preparation of land use land cover map for assessing and
monitoring the temporal changes in land use land cover and land developmental activities.
Ground data: Ground data is essential to verify and increase the accuracy of the interpreted
classes and also to minimize the field work.
Data analysis: For analysis and interpretation of satellite data, the study can be divided into
three parts:
i.
Preliminary work
ii.
Field work
iii.
Post field work
Outcome
Land use and land cover have a direct relationship with environmental characteristics and
processes, including the productivity of the land, species diversity, climate, biogeochemistry
and the hydrologic cycle. GIS and Remote Sensing are gradually becoming an integrated
technology that is being widely used in various applications. These two technologies are
complementary, as they are simply variants of the digital spatial data. They have become
inextricably linked in many application fields. The spatial display techniques for GIS and
Remote Sensing information has greatly advanced within the past two decades.
Technological advances in image processing and visualization techniques have developed
display and interpretation mechanisms for the analysis of all forms and sources of
geographical information.
114 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Study Area Land use and land cover Classification System

Using the standard land use classification system proposed by NRSC, about five classes of
level I, twelve of level II and four of level III land use and land cover classes were identified
and mapped using satellite data in the present study. The imagery is interpreted and ground
checked for corrections. The distribution of land-use pattern is summarized in Table 3.5.
The distribution of land use land cover categories in the study area in Fig 3.8.
T ABLE 3.5: L AND U SE P ATTERN OF S TUDY AREA
Sl. No.
Particulars
Area (in Sq Km)
Percentage (%)
1.
Settlements (Urban)
174.8
55.68
2.
Settlements (Rural & mining)
59.74
19.03
3.
Agriculture crop land & cultivable
56.75
18.07
22.72
7.24
314.01
100
waste land
4.
Water bodies (wet lands, reservoirs,

lakes, rivers & inlands)
Total
F IGURE 3.8: D ISTRIBUTION OF L AND USE L AND COVER CATEGORIES IN THE STUDY AREA
The three major categories under this classification in this area are;
Settlements: In the study area about 56% (174.8 Sq.km) of area is covered by urban
settlements followed by 19% (59.7sq.km) of rural settlements. Most of these settlements
115 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
are spread around the water bodies. A thick density of urban population is residing all
along the Hooghly river which is situated west of project site at 5km distance.
Agriculture: The second predominant category of land is agriculture land (cultivated and
cultivable) which is of 18% (56.8sq.km) in the study area of 10 km radius. This category
is predominantly covered in the northern part of the bufferzone area.
Water Bodies: The third major category is water bodies, which is about 7.24% (22.7
sqkm). The natural ponds, village tanks, canals and river are the water bodies spread in
most of the study area except extreme North part. Hooghly river is major one situated at
5km distance towards west of project site and is flowing from North to South direction
ultimately joining Bay of Bengal. The Noyai Khal is a canal situated east of project site at
1km distance and is flowing from North to Southeast direction.
Forest: No forest land exists within the study area of 10km radius.
Below table shows the area under each category and the percentage of each category with
respect to the total area. Land use /land cover map on satellite image for 10 km radius study
area is shown in Fig 3.9.
116 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 3.9: L AND USE /L AND COVER

117 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
3.6
W A T E R R E S O U R C E Q U AL I T Y
For assessing the baseline water quality in the study area ground and surface water
samples locations were collected during the study period. The sampling locations were
selected based on reconnaissance survey with the following consideration:
Location of water courses; and
Location of residential areas representing different activities.
Water samples were collected from four (04) surface water sources and five (05) ground
water resources for analysis. The details of surface and ground water monitoring stations are
shown below in Tables 3.6 and Figs. 3.10 & 3.11, respectively. The water samples were
collected as grab samples and were analyzed for physical, chemical and biological
characteristics as per CPCB guidelines.
T ABLE 3.6: D ETAILS OF S URFACE AND G ROUND WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Sl.
No
Location
Sample Coordinate
Code
(Latitude/Longitude)
Source
Sampling
date
Aerial
Distance
from
Project Site
Direction
from
Project
Site
1.4 Km.
NNE
1.3 Km.
1.7 Km.
ESE
1 Km.
SE
0.5 Km.
Ground Water
1
Surjyapur
GW1
22 45.075 N
8825.229E
Tube well 7.04.2015
Navaran
GW2
2244.532N
8825.515E
Tube well 7.04.2015
Jamtagarh
GW3
2244.263N
8825.740E
Tube well 7.04.2015
Balagarh
GW4
2244.126N
8825.277E
Tube well 7.04.2015
Iswaripur
GW5
2244.165N
8824.801E
Tube well 7.04.2015
Surface Water
1
2
3
4
Noaikhal Up
Stream
Noaikhal
Down
Stream
Iswaripur
Pond
Pond Near
Project Site
SW1
2244.903'N
8825.283'E
Drain
7.04.2015
1.3 Km.
NE
SW2
2244.322'N
8825.474'E
Drain
7.04.2015
1.2 Km.
SW3
2244.104'N
8824.648E
Pond
7.04.2015
0.6 Km.
SSE
SW4
2244.386N
8824.771E
Pond
7.04.2015
0.02 Km.
Water samples for chemical analysis were collected in polyethylene bottles. Selected
physico-chemical parameters have been analyzed for monitoring of baseline water quality
status in the study area. pH and temperature were analyzed at the time of water sample
collection. The ground water samples were analyzed and compared with IS 10500:2012
118 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
standards and the surface water samples were analyzed and compared with Class C
standards.
F IGURE 3.10: S URFACE W ATER S AMPLING LOCATIONS WITHIN THE STUDY AREA
119 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 3.11: G ROUND W ATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS

3.6.1 R E S U L T S & D I S C U S S I O N S
The baseline Physio - chemical & bacteriological analysis of surface & ground water quality
as analyzed is provided below. The results obtained are given in the Tables 3.7 & 3.8.
A. Ground water:
pH values varied from 7.36 to 7.46. Total dissolved solids content varied between 482.8 to
602.4 mg/l which is higher than the desirable limit but within the permissible limit as per IS
10500:2012 standards. While total hardness varied from 217 to 317 mg/l which is more than
the desirable limits but within permissible limit. The hardness is generally caused by the
presence of calcium and magnesium whose concentrations at different monitored locations
ranged for calcium between 59.9 to 81.8 mg/l whereas for magnesium between 12.3 to 27.4
mg/l. Chloride values varied between 21.5 to 48.8 mg/l which is under the limit and Nitrate
values vary from 5.8 to 7.3 mg/l which is well within the desirable limits. Fluoride
concentrations varied in all location from 0.16 mg/l to 0.37 mg/l and found to be within the
desirable limits. The trace metal concentrations like Arsenic varied from 0.004 to 0.009 mg/l
which is under the desirable unite. Manganese varied from 0.016 to 0.034 mg/l which is
120 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
under the desirable and permissible unit, Chromium, Lead, Mercury, and Cadmium were
found to be below detection limit at all locations. Similarly, the phenolic compounds and
cyanide concentrations are observed to be below detection limit. Total coliform not found in
all ground water samples. However, common treatment methods such as use of alum and
boiling of water can be suggested to reduce the concentrations of dissolved solids,
suspended solids etc. and further improve its potability.
B. Surface water:
The pH values ranging from 7.12 to 7.38 being maximum at SW3. The total dissolved solids
varied between 520.8 to 565.67 mg/l. The parameters like BOD found to be higher in all the
samples varied from 6.4 to 11.5 mg/l. The trace metal concentrations like Zinc Cadmium,
Lead and phenolic, cyanide compound were found to be below detection limit at all
locations. The turbidity varies between 1.07 to 4.09 NTU. Fecal coliform count varies
from1x104 to 3x106 MPN/100ml. From the above discussion, it is evident that the surface
water quality of the study area has total coliforms which are varied from1.3x104 to 5x106
MPN/100ml.
121 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 3.7: G ROUND W ATER Q UALITY AT S TUDY AREA

Sn
.
1
2
Characteristics
Units
GW1
GW2
GW3
GW4
GW5
pH
Taste
--
7.36
Agreeable
7.46
Agreeable
7.4
Agreeable
7.38
Agreeable
3
4
Temperature
Odor
C
-
7.42
Agreeab
le
30.8
Unobjec
tionable
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Turbidity
Total Dissolve Solids
Total Hardness as CaCO3
Total Alkalinity as CaCO3
Calcium as Ca
Magnesium as Mg
Sodium as Na
Potassium as K
Chloride as Cl
Sulphate as SO4
Fluorides as F
Nitrates as NO3
Ammonia (as NH3-N)
Phenolic Compounds
Cyanides as CN
Manganese as Mn
Boron as B
Cadmium as Cd
Arsenic as As
NTU
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
1.2
518.2
259
213.8
68.2
21.6
43.8
1.6
47.5
18.4
0.22
5.8
BDL
BDL
BDL
0.021
BDL
BDL
0.007
30.7
30.4
31
30.8
Unobjectio Unobjectio Unobjectio Unobjectio
nable
nable
nable
nable
1.1
602.4
317
276.7
81.8
27.4
33.5
1.7
31.5
14.6
0.18
7.3
BDL
BDL
BDL
0.034
BDL
BDL
0.005
0.9
519.1
257
208.6
73.2
18.1
38.4
2.51
40.1
21.5
0.37
7.1
BDL
BDL
BDL
0.016
BDL
BDL
0.009
1.7
482.8
253
216.7
81.1
12.3
18.1
3.22
21.5
7.1
0.29
6.7
BDL
BDL
BDL
0.024
BDL
BDL
0.006
122 | P a g e
1.6
565.2
217
228.3
59.9
16.5
55.4
3.9
48.8
9.1
0.16
7.1
BDL
BDL
BDL
0.021
BDL
BDL
0.004
IS:10500-2012 Norms (DWS)

Desirable
Permissible
6.5 8.5
No Relaxation
Agreeable
Agreeable
Unobjectiona
ble
Unobjectiona
ble
1
500
200
200
75
30
--250
200
1
45
0.5
0.001
0.05
0.1
0.5
0.003
0.01
5
2000
600
600
200
100
--1000
400
1.5
No Relaxation
No Relaxation
0.002
No Relaxation
0.3
1.0
No Relaxation
0.05

WEST BENGAL
Sn
.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Characteristics
Copper as Cu
Lead as Pb
Iron as Fe
Chromium as Cr6+
Zinc as Zn
Mercury as Hg
Nickel as Ni
Molybdenum as Mo
Total Coliform
Fecal Coliform
Units
GW1
GW2
GW3
GW4
GW5
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
MPN/100 ml
MPN/100 ml
0.012
BDL
0.3
BDL
1.41
BDL
0.008
BDL
Absent
Absent
0.017
BDL
0.18
BDL
1.56
BDL
0.004
BDL
Absent
Absent
0.011
BDL
0.37
BDL
1.11
BDL
0.005
BDL
Absent
Absent
0.013
BDL
0.4
BDL
1.26
BDL
0.004
BDL
Absent
Absent
0.014
BDL
0.6
BDL
1.32
BDL
0.007
BDL
Absent
Absent
IS:10500-2012 Norms (DWS)

Desirable
Permissible
0.05
1.5
0.01
No Relaxation
0.3
No Relaxation
0.05
No Relaxation
5
15
0.001
No Relaxation
0.02
No relaxation
0.07
No relaxation
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
T ABLE 3.8: S URFACE W ATER Q UALITY AT S TUDY AREA

Sl. No.
1
5
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Characteristics
pH at 250C
Conductivity at 250C
Turbidity
Total Dissolve solids
Total Hardness as CaCO3
Total Alkalinity as CaCO3
Bicarbonates as HCO3
Calcium as Ca
Magnesium as Mg
Sodium as Na
Potassium as K
Chloride as Cl
Units
mhos/cm
NTU
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
SW1
7.21
1355
2.02
522.17
176
195
237.9
45
14.56
112.59
9.45
72
SW2
7.12
1264
1.07
520.8
215
168
204.96
56.2
18.23
88.52
5.98
98.23
123 | P a g e
SW3
7.38
1172
2.57
565.57
173
205
250.1
42.3
16.52
86.21
7.56
112.54
SW4
7.14
1256
4.09
536.64
259
176
214.72
69.4
20.95
76.21
3.56
104.25
Hooghy
7.16
1312
3.2
530.8
289
217
264.74
79.5
22.7
45
5.26
56

WEST BENGAL
Sl. No.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
36
37
38
39
Characteristics
Sulphate as SO4
Fluorides as F
Nitrates as NO3
Ammonia (as NH3-N)
Phenolic Compounds
Cyanides as CN
Manganese as Mn
Cadmium as Cd
Arsenic as As
Copper as Cu
Lead as Pb
Iron as Fe
Chromium as Cr6+
Zinc as Zn
Total Coliform
Faecal coliform
BOD
COD
Units
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
MPN/100 ml
MPN/100 ml
mg/L
mg/L
SW1
96
0.56
1.45
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
0.25
BDL
BDL
1.5x104
1x104
7.9
19.6
SW2
45.37
0.46
2.54
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
0.308
BDL
BDL
1.4x104
1.5x104
5.7
14.7
124 | P a g e
SW3
46.21
0.35
3.54
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
0.245
BDL
BDL
1.3x104
1.2x104
11.5
24.3
SW4
39.26
0.25
0.78
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
0.307
BDL
BDL
1.5x104
1.3x104
6.4
21.1
Hooghy
41.2
1.1
0.64
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
0.421
BDL
430
5x106
3x106
6.78
26.5

WEST BENGAL
3.7
M E T E O R O L O G Y A N D C L I M AT E
3.7.1 C L I M AT I C C O N D I T I O N
The climate of the area is characterized by a hot and dry summer from March to May, a
south-west monsoon or rainy season from June to September, a pleasant post-monsoon or
retreating monsoon from October to November and a cool winter from December to
February. Therefore, climatologically, four seasons viz. summer (pre-monsoon), monsoon,
post-monsoon and winter could be deciphered comprising the following months:
Summer: March, April, May
Monsoon: June, July, August, and September
Post-monsoon: October, November
Winter: December, January, and February
3.7.2 M E T H O D O L O G Y
Air borne pollutants is dispersed by atmospheric motion. Knowledge of these motions, which
range is scale from turbulent diffusion to long-range transport by weather systems, is
essential to simulate such dispersion and quality of impacts of air pollution on the
environment. The purpose of impact assessment is to determine whether average
concentrations are likely to encounter at fixed locations (known as the receptor), due to the
given sources (locations and rates of emission known), under idealized atmospheric
conditions. It is imperative that one should work with idealized condition and all analysis
pertaining to air turbulence and ambient air or noise pollution should be done with
meteorological conditions, which can at best be expected to occur. The details of
measurement technique, instruments, specification of measurement standards and accuracy
of instruments are adopted as per CPCB guidelines. Care is taken to install the Automatic
weather station within a distance of six times the height of nearest vertical terrain elements
(house, trees etc.) and height of 10 m from the average ground level of the fetch area.
Meteorology data has been collected from the IMD Station located at Kolkata (Dumdum).
Secondary data from already published literature of National Data Centre of Indian
Meteorological Department (1951-1980) have been utilized to establish the historical
meteorological trend. In order to assess the background environmental conditions, on site
micrometeorological data was collected for parameters such as ambient temperature, wind
speed, wind direction, relative humidity and rainfall. Weather monitoring station was installed
approx. 10 m above the ground level near the project site to gather the meteorological data
during the period of 7th January 2015 to 8th April 2015.
125 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
3.7.3 R E G I O N A L M E T E O R O L O G Y
The climatologically summary details of parameters like temperature, relative humidity,
rainfall, cloud cover, wind speed and wind direction monitored at IMD Kolkata is given below
in Tables 3.9.
Monthly
Total
56
50
48
58
66
77
82
83
82
77
67
63
13.8
0.8 1.6 0.5
16.1
1.3
2 0.9
26.1
2
2.4 1
50.6
3
3 1.6
103
6
4.2 2.6
279.3 12.6 6.4 3.7
326.5 16.4 7 4.2
313.8 17 6.9 4.3
294 13.8 6.1 3.7
134.3 6.9 3.9 2.1
16.9
1.2
2 0.5
6.9
0.4 1.3 0.3
31.5 21.5
76
67
132
81.4 3.9 2.1
17:30
17:30
72
69
69
72
74
81
83
84
82
77
71
72
Calm
(%)
8:30
8:30
12.2
15.7
20.6
24.5
25.9
26.1
25.9
25.9
25.8
23.8
18.4
13.4
17:30
Min
26.2
29.4
33.6
36
35.8
33.8
32.1
31.8
32
31.4
29.3
26.4
8:30
Max
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
Annual or
Mean
No. of
Rainy days
T ABLE 3.9: C LIMATOLOGICAL S UMMARY AT IMD K OLKATA (1951 1980)

Daily
Cloud
Relative
mean
Rainfall
cover
Humidity
Temp.
(mm)
(in
Mean
(%)
Predominant
(0C)
Okta)
Wind
Month
Wind
Speed
Direction
(km/h)
3.5
4.5
7.3
11.9
13.9
11.1
10.3
8.8
7.4
4.9
3.5
3
N
N
SW
SW
S
SE
SW
SE
SE
N
N
E,N
24
17
12
4
2
3
5
7
12
12
17
18
61
51
29
9
6
4
5
7
17
40
66
70
7.5
SW,N
11
30
Source: India Meteorological Department (IMD)
Temperature
The monthly mean maximum temperature for a period of 30 years varied from 26.2C in
January to 35.8C in May while monthly mean minimum varied from 12.2C in January to
26.1C in June indicating January as the coldest while May as hottest month.
126 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 3.12: M ONTHLY AVERAGE M AX . AND M IN . T EMPERATURE ( IN C)

Rainfall
The 30 years data revealed that rainfall occurred maximum in July (326.5 mm) followed by
August (313.8 mm). The total rainfall received in the year is about 1581.3 mm with total
number of rainy days of about 81.4 days.
F IGURE 3.13: M ONTHLY AVERAGE RAINFALL IN MM

Humidity
The average monthly relative humidity data recorded at IMD meteorological station is
represented in Figure 3.14. During the month of August the relative humidity was highest of
about 84% followed by in July of about 83%. The annual average relative humidity is about
75.5% (at 0830 hours) and 67.4% (at 1730 hours).
127 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 3.14: M ONTHLY AVERAGE H UMIDITY ( IN %)

Cloud Cover
The monthly average cloud cover given in Figure 3.15. During the month of July the cloud
cover was highest of about 7 Octas followed by in August about 6.9 Octas. The annual
average cloud cover is about 3.9 Octas (at 0830 Hours) and 2.12 Octas (at 1730 Hours).
F IGURE 3.15: M ONTHLY AVERAGE CLOUD COVER

Wind Speed & Direction
The monthly average wind speed is given in Figure 3.16 and Calm period is shown in Fig
3.17. The maximum wind speed observed during the month of April of about 11.9 kmph and
128 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
minimum wind speed observed during the month of December is about 3.0 kmph. The
annual average wind speed is 7.5 kmph. The predominant wind direction was recorded from
N during January-February, October, and November and from SW during March, April and
July. The predominant wind during winter season was recorded from E, N and SW direction.
3.7.4 S I T E S P E C I F I C M I C R O -M E T E O R O L O G Y
Air pollutants upon discharge to atmosphere pass through a number of mechanisms, which
include diffusion and transportation leading to dispersion. These mechanisms are governed
by the local atmospheric conditions. All these result in the necessity to collect the
meteorological parameters like ambient temperature, wind speed, wind direction, and other
weather conditions (relative humidity, atmospheric pressure etc.), which will be ultimately
used for the prediction of the ground level concentrations of the air pollutants through
mathematical modeling. For this purpose a sophisticated onsite meteorological observatory
129 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
was established close to the project site and operated continuously for three months period
(7th January 2015 to 8th April 2015). This determines the baseline conditions and probable
impacts on environmental parameters with respect to the project. The site specific climatic
conditions are given below in the Table 3.10.
T ABLE 3.10: S UMMARY O F M ICRO -M ETEOROLOGICAL D ATA (F ROM 7 T H J ANUARY 2015
TH
TO 8 APRIL 2015)
Sl.
No.
Parameters
Observations (7th Jan to 8th April 2015)

7 Jan to
1st Feb to
1st March
1st April
Seasonal
31st Jan
28th Feb
to 31st
to 8th
March
April
Dry Bulb Temperature (C)
28.77
34.3
42.1
41.5
36.7
12.14
12.1
17.2
24
16.4
19.2
23.9
28.7
32.5
26.1
Relative Humidity (%)
93.26
94.72
94.35
94.35
94.2
27.49
29.47
28.5
33.54
29.8
71.1
71.8
68.3
72.2
70.8
Wind Speed (m/s)
8.2
9
13.5
15.8
11.6
<0.5
<0.5
<0.5
<0.5
<0.5
2.2
1.7
1.9
3.4
2.3
N & NE
N & NE
W, NEE
W, WWN
N & NE
th
1
Maximum
Minimum
Average
2
Maximum
Minimum
Average
3
Maximum
Minimum
Average
Predominant Wind
Direction (From)
4
Total (mm)
No. of Rainy Days
0.4
2.0
Rainfall (in mm)

0.2
1.0
1.0
2.0
0.0
0.0
0.4
1.3
A. Temperature:
The maximum ambient temperature recorded near proposed site at Ishwaripur during
study period was 42.1C while minimum temperature was recorded as 12.1C.
B. Relative humidity
During study period maximum relative humidity recorded near proposed site was 94.72
% while minimum humidity was recorded as 27.49 %.
C. Wind speed
During study period wind speed recorded near proposed site at Ishwaripur 15.8 Kmph
and minimum wind speed was recorded <0.5.
130 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
D. Rainfall
During study period maximum rainfall recorded near proposed site is 1.0 mm and
minimum rain fall was recorded 0.2mm. Windrose diagram for the study area is shown in
Fig 3.18.
F IGURE 3.18: W INDROSE DIAGRAMMES W IND S PEED (B LOWING FROM )

Wind frequency during the study period at plant site is given in Table 3.11. Wind frequency
distribution for the project is shown in Figure 3.19.
131 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 3.11: F REQUENCY D ISTRIBUTION

Wind speed
Directions /
Wind Classes
(m/s)
0.5 - 2.1
2.1 - 3.6
3.6 - 5.7
5.7 - 8.8
8.8 - 11.1
>= 11.1
Total
348.75-11.25
138
104
59
20
321
11.25-33.75
81
65
45
14
206
33.75-56.25
71
26
28
130
56.25-78.75
78
14
18
112
78.75-101.25
49
11
68
101.25-123.75
40
14
58
123.75-146.25
53
67
146.25-168.75
50
28
12
94
168.75-191.25
32
17
14
65
191.25-213.75
22
13
38
213.75-236.25
14
28
236.25-258.75
18
10
43
258.75-281.25
77
20
12
24
18
160
281.25-303.75
38
13
22
91
303.75-326.25
29
10
52
326.25-348.75
85
37
28
158
Sub-Total
Calms
Average Wind
speed
875
398
272
99
30
17
2183
492
2.04
F IGURE 3.19: W IND F REQUENCY D ISTRIBUTION

132 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
3.7.5 A T M O S P H E R I C I N V E R S I O N & M I X I N G H E I G H T
The mixing height is the height of vertical mixing of air and suspended particles above the
ground. This height is determined by the observation of the atmospheric temperature profile.
A parcel of air rising from the surface of the Earth will rise at a given rate. As long as the
parcel of air is warmer than the ambient temperature, it will continue to rise. However, once it
becomes colder than the temperature of the environment, it will slow down and eventually
stop. It is at this junction where the temperature of the parcel crosses the curve denoting the
vertical environmental temperature profile determines the mixing height.
Inversions are a result of the vertical temperature profile of air. Temperature normally
decreases as altitude increases in the troposphere (at an average rate of 1oC per 100
meters). However, an increase of temperature as altitude increases can occur and is called
an inversion. Thus, the colder air layer is below the warmer air, resulting in a stable
temperature profile that restricts vertical mixing. Because of the restricted mixing volumes
of air due to the inversion, pollution becomes stagnant and does not dissipate.
The knowledge of the site specific mixing height (convective stable boundary layer and
inversion height or nocturnal boundary layer) is crucial in a realistic adoption of appropriate
plume rise and vertical dispersion parameters. India Meteorological Department (IMD) has
generated data for frequency distribution of stable layers based on data collected using the
radiosonde technique. Hourly mixing height and assimilative capacity of Atmosphere in
India by S.D. Attri, Siddhartha Singh, B. Mukhopadhyay and A.K. BHatnagar, Environment
Monitoring and Research Centre, India Meteorological Department, New Delhi.
T ABLE 3.12: S PATIAL D ISTRIBUTION OF M IXING H EIGHT D URING W INTER S EASON
07.00 hrs IST
09.00 hrs IST
11.00 hrs IST
13.00 hrs IST
15.00 hrs IST
17.00 hrs IST
19.00 hrs IST
40 80 m
200 250 m
500 600 m
900 1000 m
1000 1150 m
800 950 m
350 450 m
08.00 hrs IST

10.00 hrs IST
12.00 hrs IST
14.00 hrs IST
16.00 hrs IST
18.00 hrs IST
20.00 hrs IST
80 120 m
300 350 m
850 1000 m
1000 1150 m
900 1050 m
500 650 m
133 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
3.8
A M B I E N T A I R Q U AL I T Y
3.8.1 A M B I E N T A I R S AM P L I N G
Air pollution can cause significant effects on the environment and subsequently on humans,
animals, vegetation, etc. In most of the cases, air pollution aggravates pre-existing diseases
or degrades health status, making people more susceptible to other infections or the
development of chronic respiratory and cardiovascular diseases. Environmental impacts
from air pollution can include acidic deposition and reduction in visibility, concentration of air
pollutant is severe.
3.8.2 AAQM M O N I T O R I N G L O C A T I O N S S E L E C T I O N
To study, the baseline ambient air quality scenario in the study area, 6 ambient air quality
monitoring (AAQM) stations were selected in different directions and at different distances
from the proposed plant site. The guidelines of the Ministry of Environment, Forest and
Climate Change (MOEF&CC), Government of India, Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB)
and National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) were followed for deciding locations
and frequency of monitoring. The study area represents semi urban environment, with few
medium scale industrial units. Major source of pollution is the vehicular transportation due to
vicinity of road; in addition to scattered industrial units in surrounding area. The other
sources of air pollution are DG set operation in the area for power back-up, domestic fuel
consumption and the dust arising from village roads.
In order to assess the baseline air quality in the study area, the following factors have been
considered while selecting ambient air quality monitoring locations:
Major settlements
Influence from the industrial activities
Local vehicular movement
Influence of meteorological parameters on the dispersion of pollutants and impact on
nearby settlements.
3.8.3 M E T H O D O L O G Y O F M O N I T O R I N G A N D A N A L Y S I S
Envirotech APM 460 BL Respirable Dust Sampler (RDS) and Sampler (Envirotech APM
550)/ Ecotech (AAS 127) fine particulate matter were deployed for ambient air quality
monitoring.
The baseline data of air environment is monitored for the below mentioned parameters:
Particulate Matter (PM2.5);

Particulate Matter (PM10);
Sulphur dioxide (SO2);
134 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Di oxides of Nitrogen (NO2);

Ozone (O3);
Lead (Pb);
Carbon Monoxide (CO);
Ammonia (NH3);
Benzene (C6H6);
Benzo (a) Pyrene (BaP);
Arsenic (As);
Nickel (Ni),
3.8.4 S AM P L I N G A N D A N A L Y T I C A L T E C H N I Q U E S
PM2.5 and PM10 have been estimated by gravimetric method. Modified West and Gaeke
method (IS-5182 part-II, 1969) have been adopted for estimation of SO2. Jacobs-Hochheiser
method (IS-5182 part-IV, 1975) has been adopted for the estimation of NOx. Samples for
carbon monoxide were analyzed using NDIR techniques.
The techniques adopted for sampling and analysis are given in Table 3.13 along with the
minimum detection limits for each parameter.
T ABLE 3.13: P ROCEDURE FOR D ETERMINING V ARIOUS AIR Q UALITY P ARAMETERS
Parameters
Technical Protocol
Minimum
Detectable Limit
PM2.5
CPCB Guideline Vol. I May 2011
5 (g/m3)
PM10
IS 5182 (Part-XXIII)
5 (g/m3)
Sulphur Dioxide
IS-5182 (Part-II):2001
5 (g/m3)
Nitrogen Dioxide
IS-5182 (Part-VI):2006
7 (g/m3)
Ozone
ISO 13964:1998(KIBRT Method)
10 (g/m3)
Carbon Monoxide (as CO)
IS:5182(Part-X):1999 NDIR Method)
1.14 (mg/m3)
Lead as Pb
IS:5182:(Part-XXII):2004
0.01 (g/m3)
Arsenic
40 CFR 50
2 (ng/m3)
Nickel as Ni
40 CFR 50
2 (ng/m3)
Ammonia as NH3
Indophenol Blue Method
20 (g/m3)
Benzene
ASTM D3686-2013 & ASTM D3687-2007
2 (g/m3)
Benzo (a) Pyrene
USEPA to 13A
0.2 (ng/m3)
3.8.5 A M B I E N T A I R Q U AL I T Y M O N I T O R I N G L O C A T I O N S
Ambient quality monitoring locations are presented in Table 3.14 and Figure 3.20.
135 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 3.14: AMBIENT AIR Q UALITY M ONITORING L OCATIONS

Sl.No.
Location
Station Name
Direction
Co-ordinates
Dangadihila
Approx
Distance
0.9 Km
AAQ1
NW
AAQ2
Ishwaripur
0.5 Km.
SSW
AAQ3
Balagarh
1.0 Km.
ESE
AAQ4
Project Site
--
--
AAQ5
Chhota Kanthalia
2.2 Km.
AAQ6
Surjyapur
1.5 Km.
NNE
N 22 44 24.54
E 88 24 06.70
N 22 44 24.63
E 88 24 49.89
N 22 44 06.17
E 88 25 21.81
N 22 44 24.63
E 88 24 46.6
N 22 45 35.20
E 88 24 18.98
N 22 45 03.69
E 88 25 09.65
F IGURE 3.20: AMBIENT Q UALITY M ONITORING L OCATIONS
136 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The national ambient air quality standards are given in Table 3.15. Monitored values for
study have been compared with the National Ambient Air Quality Standards.
T ABLE 3.15: N ATIONAL AMBIENT Q UALITY S TANDARDS
Sl.No.
Pollutants
Time
weighted
average
Industrial,
Residential,
Rural &
Other Areas
Concentration in ambient air

Ecologically
Methods of Measurement
Sensitive Area
(notified by
Central
Government)
20
- Improved West & Gaeke
- Ultraviolet fluorescence
80
30
- Modified Jacob &
Hochheiser (Na-Arsenite)
80
- Chemiluminescence
60
- Gravimetric
- TOEM
100
- Beta attenuation
Sulphur Dioxide
3
(SO2), g/m
Nitrogen
Dioxides (NO2),
3
g/m
Particulate
Matter (size less
than 10 m) or
3
PM10 g/m
Particulate
Matter (size less
than 2.5 m) or
3
PM2.5 g/m
Ozone (O3)
3
g/m
Annual*
24 hours**
Annual*
24 hours**
50
80
40
80
Annual*
24 hours**
60
100
Annual*
24 hours**
40
60
40
60
- Gravimetric
- TOEM
- Beta attenuation
8 hours**
1 hour**
100
180
100
180
Lead (Pb)
3
g/m
Annual*
24 hours**
0.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
Carbon
Monoxide
3
(CO) mg/m
Ammonia (NH3)
3
g/m
Benzene
3
(C6H6) g/m
8 hours**
1 hour**
02
04
02
04
- UV photometric
- Chemiluminescence
- Chemical method
- AAS/ICP method after
sampling on EPM 2000 or
equivalent filter paper
- ED-XRF using Teflon filter
- Non Dispersive Infra Red
(NDIR) Spectroscopy
Annual*
24 hours**
Annual*
100
400
05
100
400
05
Annual*
01
01
Annual*
06
06
8
9
10
11
Benzo (a)
Pyrene (BaP)Particulate
phase only,
3
ng/m
Arsenic (As),
3
ng/m
- Chemiluminescence
- Indophenol blue method
- Gas chromatography
based continuous
analyzer
- Adsorption and desorption
followed by GC analysis
- Solvent extraction
followed by HPLC/GC
analysis

12
Nickel (Ni), ng/
Annual*
20
20
3
m
*Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken twice a week 24 hourly at
uniform interval
**24 hourly/8 hourly values should be met 98% of the time in a year. However, 2% of the time, it may
exceed but not on two consecutive days.
137 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
3.8.6 R E S U L T S O F A M B I E N T A I R Q U AL I T Y M O N I T O R I N G
The summary results of monitoring of PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NO2, NH3, O3, C6H6, BaP, Pb, As, Ni
and CO concentrations at the plant site, Iswaripur, Balagarh, Chhota Khathalia, Dangadihila
and Surjyapur villages during the post-monsoon season are presented in Table 3.16 and
Table 3.17. The details of AAQM results are presented in Annexure 1.
Particulate Matter- size less than 10 m (PM10)
Out of the six (6) locations within the study area, maximum concentration for PM10 of 112.6
g/m3 was recorded at Balagar village. The minimum concentration of 46.6 g/m3was
recorded at Balagar. The 98th percentile value of PM10 within the study area varied between
87.2 g/m3 to 108.4 g/m3. The concentration of PM10 is within the permissible limits at
three locations which are project site, Chhota Khathalia and Surjyapur whereas crossing the
permissible limits at three locations which are Dangadihila, Ishwaripur and Balagar.
Particulate Matter- size less than 2.5 m (PM2.5)
Similar pattern has been seen for PM2.5 particulates. Out of the six (6) locations within the
study area, the maximum concentration for PM2.5 of 54.4 g/m3 was recorded at Surjyapur
and minimum concentration of 29.9 g/m3 was recorded at Plant Site. The 98th percentile
value of PM2.5 within the study area varied between 42.6 g/m3 to 53.6 g/m3. The
concentration of PM2.5 is within the permissible limits at all locations.
Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)
The 24 hourly average values of SO2 were observed at six locations within the study area.
The maximum concentration for SO2 observed is 18.9 g/m3 at Dangadihila (AAQ 1) and
minimum concentration of 5.9 g/m3 at Balagar (AAQ 3). The 98th percentile value of SO2
within the study area varied between 17.2 g/m3 to 18.8 g/m3.The concentration of SO2 is
within the permissible limits at all the locations.
Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)
The 24 hourly average values of NOx were observed. The maximum concentration for NOx
is 24.8 g/m3 at the Project Site and the minimum concentration is 13.9 g/m3 at Balagar
.The 98th percentile value of NOx within the studied area varied between 22.6 g/m3 to 24.3
g/m3.The concentration of NOx is within the permissible limit at all the locations within the
study area.
Carbon monoxide (CO)
The 24 hourly average values of CO were observed to be below the NAAQ standard of 2
mg/m3. The maximum concentration for CO observed is 0.99 mg/m3 at Project site (AAQ4)
138 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
and minimum concentration of CO is 0.43 mg/m3 was recorded at Chhota Khathalia (AAQ 5).
The 98th percentile value for CO concentrations at all observed locations varied from 0.8
mg/m3 to 1.0 mg/m3 within the study area which found to be well within the regulatory limit.
Ozone (O3)
The 24 hourly average values of O3 were observed. The maximum concentration for O3 is
observed to be 21.3 g/m3 at Ishwaripur and the minimum concentration is 11.1 g/m3 at the
Project site. The 98th percentile varied between 19.1 g/m3 to 20.4 g/m3. All the observed
concentrations are within the permissible limits.
Overall Baseline Ambient Air quality
Results of the ambient air quality at all the above locations were found to be well below the
standards prescribed in National Ambient Air Quality (NAAQ) standards specified for
industrial, residential, rural & other areas.
T ABLE 3.16: S UMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR Q UALITY R ESULT
Location
Code
Dangadihila
(AAQ1)
Ishwaripur
(AAQ2)
Balagar
(AAQ3)
Project
Site(AAQ4)
Chhota
Khathalia
(AAQ5)
Surjopur
(AAQ6)
Parameters
Maximum
Minimum
Mean
98th percentile
Maximum
Minimum
Mean
98th percentile
Maximum
Minimum
Mean
98th percentile
Maximum
Minimum
Mean
98th percentile
Maximum
Minimum
Mean
98th percentile
Maximum
Minimum
Mean
98th percentile
PM10
(g/m3)
100.1
75.2
86.5
100.0
103.2
77.2
87.9
102.6
112.6
46.6
86.7
108.4
87.9
60.5
73.2
87.2
99.4
73.1
82.9
98.0
89.3
73.5
79.9
88.4
PM2.5
(g/ m3)
51.7
38.1
44.5
51.2
47.6
29.1
37.1
46.2
49.2
30.9
39.1
49.1
42.8
29.9
36.4
42.6
47.4
36.1
42.1
47.3
54.4
41.4
48.6
53.6
SO2
(g/ m3)
18.9
7.5
12.8
18.8
18.2
9.1
13.8
17.7
17.9
5.9
10.7
17.2
17.9
7.9
12.3
17.7
18.1
6.6
11.9
17.8
18.1
7.9
11.5
18.0
NO2
(g/ m3)
23.8
16.3
20.1
23.8
22.8
14.1
17.8
22.6
24.7
13.9
18.8
24.3
24.8
13.9
18.3
24.2
24.1
14.2
17.9
24.0
24.6
14.8
19.1
24.1
CO
(mg/ m3)
0.97
0.52
0.7
0.9
0.92
0.52
0.7
0.9
0.96
0.54
0.7
0.9
0.99
0.53
0.7
1.0
0.82
0.43
0.6
0.8
0.89
0.46
0.7
0.9
O3
(g/ m3)
19.3
13.1
15.7
19.3
21.3
11.3
16.3
20.4
19.5
11.5
15.7
19.1
18.2
11.1
15.0
17.8
17.8
11.7
14.4
17.5
18.9
12.3
15.5
18.7
139 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 3.21: AMBIENT AIR Q UALITY R ESULT (PM 10 , PM 2.5 , SO 2 , NO 2 )

T ABLE 3.17: AMBIENT AIR Q UALITY R ESULT (O THER PARAMETERS )
Location
Parameters
Pb
NH3 (g/
C6H6
BaP (ng/ As (ng/
Code
(g/m3)
m3)
(g/ m3)
m3)
m3)
Dangadihila Maximum
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
(AAQ1)
Minimum
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
Mean
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
98th percentile
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
Ishwaripur
Maximum
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
(AAQ2)
Minimum
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
Mean
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
th
98 percentile
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
Balagarh
Maximum
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
(AAQ3)
Minimum
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
Mean
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
98th percentile
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
Project Site Maximum
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
(AAQ4)
Minimum
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
Mean
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
98th percentile
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
Chhota
Maximum
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
Ni (ng/
m3)
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
140 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Location
Code
Khathalia
(AAQ5)
Surjopur
(AAQ6)
Parameters
Minimum
Mean
98th percentile
Maximum
Minimum
Mean
98th percentile
Pb
(g/m3)
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
NH3 (g/
m3)
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
C6H6
(g/ m3)
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BaP (ng/
m3)
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
As (ng/
m3)
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
Ni (ng/
m3)
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
3.8.7 C H E M I C A L C H A R A C T E R I Z A T I O N O F RSPM
The suspended particulate matter present in the ambient air was analyzed for the presence
of poly-aromatic hydrocarbon (PAH). Chemical characterization of RSPM values at all the six
locations have been carried and presented in Table 3.18.
T ABLE 3.18: C HEMICAL C HARACTERIZATION OF RSPM
Sl.
No
1
Parameters
Dangadihila
Respirable
92.2
Particulate Matter
2
Aluminum as Al
8.3421
3
Arsenic as As
0.0011
4
Barium as Ba
0.0123
5
Calcium as Ca
3.1265
6
Cadmium as Cd
0.0004
7
Cobalt
0.0002
8
Chromium as Cr
0.0153
9
Cupper as Cu
0.0122
10
Iron as Fe
0.0158
11
Mercury as Hg
BDL
12
Magnesium as Mg
1.1232
13
Manganese as Mn
0.0214
14
Molybdenum as
BDL
Mo
3
Note: All values are in (g/m ).
3.9
Ishwaripur
Balagarh
Chhota
Kanthalia
88.5
Surjyapur
112.6
Project
Site
79.5
97.7
10.6214
0.0018
0.1103
2.4532
0.0002
0.0001
0.0076
0.0165
0.0326
BDL
1.4579
0.0422
BDL
12.4567
0.0047
0.1527
4.1536
0.0004
0.0003
0.0112
0.0201
0.0352
BDL
2.1406
0.0541
BDL
7.3432
0.0005
0.0956
3.3456
0.0003
0.0004
0.0369
0.0232
0.0234
BDL
1.1093
0.0231
BDL
6.8943
0.0019
0.0321
5.6327
0.0003
0.0003
0.0114
0.0131
0.0451
BDL
1.1641
0.0121
BDL
5.5621
0.0012
0.0954
6.1256
0.0002
0.0007
0.0121
0.067
0.0743
BDL
1.1362
0.0136
BDL
75.3
NOISE ENVIRONMENT
The physical description of sound concerns its loudness as a function of frequency. Various
noise scales have been introduced to describe, in a single number, the response of an
average human to a complex sound made up of various frequencies at different loudness
levels. The most common and universally accepted scales is the A weighted scale which is
measured as dB (A). The impact of noise sources on surrounding community depends on:
141 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Characteristics of noise sources (instantaneous, intermittent or continuous in nature). It

can be observed that steady noise is not as annoying as one which is continuously
varying in loudness;
The time of day at which noise occurs, for example high noise levels at night in
residential areas are not acceptable because of sleep disturbance; and
The location of noise source, with respect to noise sensitive land use, which determines
the loudness and period of exposure.
The main objective of noise monitoring in the study area is to establish the baseline noise
levels, and assess the impact of the total noise expected to be generated by the construction
and operation of the proposed plant activities around it. A variety of sources produce noise,
potentially hazardous to hearing depending upon the intensity and duration of exposure.
These include transportation systems, construction equipment, industrial activities and many
common appliances.
3.9.1 I D E N T I F I C A T I O N O F S AM P L I N G L O C A T I O N S
A preliminary reconnaissance survey was undertaken to identify the major noise generating
sources in the area. Noise at different noise generating sources has been identified based
on the activities like industrial noise, ambient noise and traffic noise and the noise at
sensitive areas like hospital and schools. The noise monitoring has been conducted for
determination of noise levels at 6 locations in the study area. Noise levels were recorded
hourly for 24-hourly period.
Details of noise monitoring locations are given in Table 3.19 and shown in Figure 3.22.
T ABLE 3.19: D ETAILS OF N OISE M ONITORING L OCATIONS
Sl.
No.
Project Site
N1
Aerial
Distance
from
Project
Site
-
Iswaripur
N2
0.5 Km.
Balagar
N3
1.0 Km.
SE
Dangadihila
N4
0.9 Km.
NW
Chhota
Khathalia
Surjyapur
N5
2.2 Km.
N6
1.3 Km.
NE
Location
Location
Code
Direction
from
Project
Site
Description
Coordinates
Latitude
Longitude
Industrial
224424.63 N
E 882446.60
Rural
Residential
Rural
Residential
Rural
Residential
Rural
Residential
Rural
Residential
N 22 4402.63
E 882432.71
N 224407.77
E 88 2519.81
N 224424.54
E 882406.70
N 224535.20
E 882418.98
N 224503.38
E 88 509.8
142 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 3.22: N OISE M ONITORING L OCATIONS

3.9.2 M E T H O D S O F M O N I T O R I N G
The day noise levels have been monitored during 0600 hours to 2200 hours while in night
times during 2200 hours to 0600 hours at selected locations.
Methodology
For assessing noise, an empirical measure called "dB (A)" decibel acoustic (A weighted),
indicates damage to hearing. The higher the dB (A) number, the greater is the risk of
damage to hearing. Ambient Noise level was measured by using Calibrated Lutron SL 4001 Digital Sound Level Meter on an hourly basis for 24 hours. Equivalent sound pressure
level of daytime i.e Leq (day) and night time Leq (night) was calculated from the hourly
measured noise level and compared to Ambient Air Quality Standards in respect of Noise as
per The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 stipulated for daytime and
night time for residential land use. The standards are tabulated in below Table 3.20.
143 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 3.20: AMBIENT AIR Q UALITY S TANDARDS IN RESPECT OF N OISE

Category of Area/ Zone
Limits in dB(A) Leq

Day Time (6 am to 10
Night Time (10 pm to 6
pm)
am)
Industrial area
75
70
Commercial area
65
55
Residential area
55
45
Silence Zone
50
40
3.9.3 P AR A M E T E R S M E A S U R E D D U R I N G M O N I T O R I N G
Equivalent Sound Pressure Level (Leq)
The Leq is the equivalent continuous sound level, which is equivalent to the same sound
energy as the actual fluctuating sound measured in the same period. This is necessary
because sound from noise source often fluctuates widely during a given period of time.
This is calculated from the following equation:
Leq = 10 log (1/N 10) LI / 10

Lday is defined as the equivalent noise level measured over a period of time during day (6 am
to 9 pm).
Lnight is defined as the equivalent noise level measured over a period of time during night (9
pm to 6 am).
Since the different standards have been stipulated during day time (6 am to 10 pm) and
night time (10 pm to 6 am).The sound pressure level of daytime i.e Leq (day) as (Ld) and
night time Leq (night) as (Ln) is calculated and compared to Ambient Air Quality Standards
in respect of Noise have been designated for residential land use as per the Noise pollution
(Regulation and Control) Rules 2000, notified by CPCB, dated 14th February 2000.
3.9.4 R E S U L T S A N D D I S C U S S I O N S
At most of monitoring locations, monitored noise levels are within the prescribed limit, except
Chhota Khathalia and Surjyapur. The high values of noise observed are primarily due to the
vehicular traffic and other anthropogenic activities. The monitored noise levels around the
site are given in Table 3.21.
144 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 3.21: AMBIENT N OISE L EVELS

Sl.
No.
Project
Site
Zone
Date of
Noise
Monitoring
1.
Project Site
Industrial Area
28/04/2015
Prescribed
Standard
Leq dB(A)
Day*
Night*
75
70
Observed value
Leq dB(A)
Day*
56
Night*
50
2.
Iswaripur
Residential Area
28/04/2015
55
45
49
43
3.
Balagarh
Residential Area
28/04/2015
55
45
50
45
4.
Dangadihila
Residential Zone
28/04/2015
55
45
49
50
5.
Chhota
Residential Zone
28/04/2015
55
45
63
49
Residential Zone
28/04/2015
55
45
43
51
Khathalia
6.
Surjyapur
Day time from 6.00 a.m to 10.00 p.m while night time from 6.00 a.m to 10.00 p.m
The monitoring results of noise levels as Leq (day) and Leq (night) are represented in Table
3.20. Equivalent sound pressure level (Leq) ranged between 43 to 63 dB(A) during daytime
and 43 to 51 dB(A) during night time. The day time sound pressure level found to be 56
dB(A) at project site, which is lower than the prescribed norm of 75 dB(A) while night time
noise levels found to be 50 dB(A), which is also lower than the prescribed norm of 70 dB(A).
The higher noise level observed at Dangadihila, Chhota Khathalia and Surjyapur because of
the traffic movement with the variant traffic volume.
3.10
E C O L O G I C AL E N V I R O N M E N T
Ecosystem shows complex inter-relationships between biotic and abiotic components

leading to dependence, competition and mutualism. Biotic components comprise both plant
and animal communities, interacting not only within and between themselves but also with
the abiotic components of the environment.
Generally, biological communities are good indicators of climatic and edaphic factors
because of their strong relationships with them. The studies on the biological aspects of the
ecosystem are important in Environment Impact Assessment studies for the suitability of
natural flora & fauna. Information on the impact of environment stress on the community
structure serves as an inexpensive and efficient early warning system to check the damage
on a particular ecosystem. The biological environment includes mainly terrestrial and aquatic
ecosystem.
A change in the composition of biotic communities under stress is reflected through a
change in the distribution pattern, density, diversity, frequency, dominance and abundance
145 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
of natural species of fauna and flora existing in the ecosystem. These changes over a span
of times can be quantified and related to the existing environment.
3.10.1
OBJECTIVES
The objectives of ecological study during the study period of EIA study period may be
outlined as follows:
To characterize the environmental components like land, water, flora and fauna;
To understand their present status;
To understand carrying capacity of the ecosystem;
To assess present bio-diversity; and
To identify susceptible and sensitive areas.
This study has been carried out during the early summer season during March 2015 during
study period for the purpose of providing an independent and comprehensive baseline
assessment of the flora, terrestrial vertebrate, aquatic fauna and associated habitat values of
the site and within 10 Km radius area around the Hindustan Adhesives and Chemicals and a
subsequent assessment of potential ecological impacts from the proposed plant activities.
The study area falls under East Cost category as far as the Indian Biogeographical Zones
(Rodger, Panwar, and Mathur 2000) are concerned. Under the biogeographical provinces,
the study area falls under the category of 8B- East Coast. The study area does not have any
forest land or permanent natural vegetation and the main land use feature of the study area
is comprised habitation and cultivating lands. From the primary observations, the tree
species recorded in the forest were Cocos nucifera, Mangifera indica, Butea monosperma,
Azadirachta indica, Terminalia arjuna, Diospyros melanoxylon, Emblica officinalis, etc. The
Forest map of the area is shown below in Fig. 3.23
146 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 3.23: F OREST M AP OF W EST B ENGAL (S OURCE : F OREST S URVEY OF I NDIA ,

2009)
The detailed ecological assessment of the study area has been carried out with the following
objectives:
To establish the present status of ecological conditions within the 10 km radiu study
area;
To study the existing anthropogenic stresses on the prevailing ecosystem;
To identify and predict the likely impacts on the local ecosystem from the proposed
proposal related activities;
147 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Detailed enumeration of the floral species, terrestrial vertebrate and aquatic flora and
fauna present within the project site, including species lists and significance status under
The Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972;
Preparation of list of species in relation to their ecological/conservation status as per

IUCN categories (Red Data List).
Preparation of list of locally available plants by the local communities for medicinal
purposes if any.
To formulate mitigatory measures and a sustainable Environmental Management Plan

(EMP) basing upon the likely impacts.
During survey, following aspects were considered for ecological studies:
Assessment of present status of flora and fauna;
Identification of rare and endangered species of plants and animals (if any);
Identification of ecologically sensitive areas within the study area;
Assessment of migratory route of wildlife (if any); and
Assessment of Aquatic Ecology with specific reference to aquatic birds and fishery
resources
3.10.2
METHODOLOGY
Terrestrial investigations for flora and fauna records were collected by random field survey
and a checklist was prepared. During field survey, discussions with the local people were
carried-out to collect information related to local biodiversity in and around the villages. The
ecological status of the study area has been assessed based on the following methodology:
Primary field surveys to establish primary baseline of the study area;
Compilation of secondary information available in published literatures/working plan

was referred from State Forest Department.
Site Verification and finalization in consultation with Project proponent, local

inhabitants.
Vegetation analysis through quadrate method using sampling plots of 10m X 10m.
10m X 10m for tree species (record trees >25 cm in GBHOB /species);
5m X 5m [four plots] was laid along diagonals wherein all the shrubs recorded.
148 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
1m X 1m [five plots], one at the centre and four at one per quadrate] was laid and
herbs, grasses in five plots to be noted.
Protocol for Sampling through Quadrate Method
The standard method chosen for the assessment of plant diversity involves the use of
square vegetation quadrates (plots). These quadrates were used to measure most
vegetation attributes in most vegetation types. Quadrate locations marked by pegs or
sometimes by grid system.
The study area is demarcated as 10 km from the periphery of project area based on the
MoEF&CC guidelines. After demarcation, the study area is divided into sampling units, i.e.
the areas which are approximately true representative of the whole area, and were sampled
for the identification of plant and animal species.
A. Floral Study
The assessment of the flora of the study area is done by an extensive field survey of the
area.
Plants species were identified based on their specific diagnostics characters of family,
genus and species using available floral, other related literature and herbarium Botanical
Survey of India (BSI).
Besides the identification of plant species, information was collected on the vernacular
names and uses of plants made by local inhabitants.
Qualitative analysis of vegetation is made by two different methods such as floristic (by
simple studying various genera and species of various plant groups i.e. herbs, shrubs,
trees etc).
B. Phyto-sociology
A nested quadrates technique was used for sampling the vegetation. All the plots sampled
were representative of most common types, sampling 10m x 10m for trees and 5m x 5m for
shrubs, 1m x 1m for herbs square meter quadrates were laid. Selection of sites for sampling
of vegetation is done by random sampling procedure. However, in general to study the
phytosociological attributes, quadrates of 10 m 10 m size for tree species are randomly
laid out at each site at different elevations. Then the observation on the following parameters
is recorded:
1. Name of the species.
149 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
2. Diameter of the species.

3. Number of the occurrence of each species in each quadrate.
The field data for phytosociological studies was collected in the study area. Vegetation data
was quantitatively analyzed for frequency, density and dominance using standard
methodologies. The relative values of frequency, density, and dominance of all the recorded
species was summed up to represent Importance Value Index (IVI). Not only IVI facilitates
comparison between species of a community, but also the data collected on dispersion,
number and cover can be profitably used in comparing the vegetation structure of two or
more stands or of the same stand over a period of time. Vegetation structure with respect of
varying environmental factors can also be studied through such studies in sets of varying
environmental conditions. The IVI was determined as the sum of the relative frequency,
relative density and relative dominance. It thus incorporate three important parameters that
measures of productivity and diversity of every species therefore.
IVI = Relative frequency + Relative density + Relative dominance
C. Faunal Study
Terrestrial Fauna
The ground surveys are carried out by trekking the study area for identification of important
faunal groups such as birds, mammals and reptiles for sampling of animals through the
following methods.
For sampling birds/ avifauna point sampling along the fixed transects (foot trails) were
done to record all the species of birds with the help of binoculars; field guides and
photography for more than 1 hour on each transect (n=4).
For sampling mammals, direct count on open width (20 m) transect were used on the
same transects. Besides, information on recent sightings/records of mammals by the
locals were also collected from the study areas.
Reptiles mainly lizards were sampled by direct count on open width transects.
Secondary information collected from local villagers, published government data, forest
department, etc.
List of the endangered and endemic species as per the schedule of The Wildlife
Protection Act, 1972
150 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The emphasis is given to identify fauna and mammals to determine the presence and
absence of Schedule-1 species, listed in The Wildlife Protection Act 1972, as well as in red
list of IUCN. Various methods used for the study of animals are as follows:
A. Point Survey Method: Observations were made in each site for 15-20 min duration.
B. Road Side Counts: The observer travelled by motor vehicles from site to site and all
sightings were recorded.
3.10.3
FLORISTIC COMPOSITION
The ecology and diversity survey was conducted in the 10 km radius in the study area and
the surrounding area; many of villages have ponds harboring moderate diversity of water
birds. The villages covered during the present survey were Ishwaripur Village, Madhavpur
village, Harpara village, Chharuhat village, Choto Khathalia village, Doperia village. Details
of locations of Ecological Survey are given in Table 3.20 and shown in Figure 3.22.
T ABLE 3:22: D ETAILS OF LOCATIONS FOR PLOT SURVEY
Sl.No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Name of village
Near Ishwaripur Village
Near Madhavpur village
Near Harpara village
Near Chharuhat village
Near Choto Khathalia village
Near Doperia village
Plot No.
EB1
EB2
EB3
EB4
EB5
EB6
Lattitude
2244'0.43"N
2243'3.10"N
2245'39.36"N
2246'10.27"N
2245'33.54"N
2243'52.31"N
Longitude
8824'37.49"E
8825'6.27"E
8827'47.83"E
8825'44.29"E
8824'12.03"E
8823'49.04"E
151 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 3.24: E COLOGICAL S AMPLING L OCATIONS

Interspersed with crop fields were patches of scrub land. This land was especially the village
waste land and the vegetation was scrub type. The predominant species herein was Cocos
nucifera followed by Mangifera indica (Mango). Total 6 nos. of quadrates has been
considered for the study of the floral species in the 10 km radius around the study area. The
quadrates of size 10 m X 10 m have been taken as plot for study of tree, shrubs, and herbs.
The most of the vegetation found is of deciduous type.
The following species were encountered from the study area during the field visits as given
in Table 3.23.
152 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 3.23: F LORISTIC D IVERSITY IN THE S TUDY AREA

Sl.No Scientific Name
Bengali name
Family
IUCN
Conservation
Status
Tree
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Phyllanthus emblica
Mangifera indica
Azadirachta indica
Syzygium cumini
Aegle marnelos
Anthocephalus cadamba
Terminalia arjuna
Terminalia belerica
Shorea robusta
Butea monosperma
Albizia chinensis
Buchanania lanzan
Ficus religiosa
Albizia lebbeck
Ziziphus mauritiana
Bauhinia sp.
Tamarindus indica
Terminalia chebula
Schleichera oleosa
Bridelia retusa
Acacia catechu
Terminalia tomentosa
Dalbergia sissoo
Diospyros melanoxylon
Psidium guajava
Cocos nucifera
Artocarpus heterophyllus
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Clerodendrum viscosum
Chromolaena odorata
Lantana camara
Woodfordia fruticosa
Datura wrightii
Musa paradisiaca
Ipomoea carnea
Phoenix acaulis
Amlaki
Euphorbiaceae
Aam
Anacardiaceae
Neem
Meliaceae
Jam
Myrtaceae
Bel
Rutaceae
Kadam
Rubiacea
Arjun
Combretaceae
Bahera
Combretaceae
Sal
Dipterocarpaceae
Palash
Fabaceae
Siris
Fabaceae
Char
Anacardiaceae
Ashwatha
Moraceae
Shirish
Fabaceae
Kul
Rhamnaceae
Kanchan
Faboideae
Tentul
Caesalpiniacae
Haritaki
Combretaceae
Kusum
Sapindaceae
Geio
Euphorbiaceae
Khair
Fabaceae
Bahera
Combretaceae.
Shishoo
Fabaceae
Kendu
Ebenaceae
Peyara
Myrtaceae
Narikel
Arecaceae
Kanthal
Moraceae
Shrubs
Bhant
Verbenaceae
Seyal muti
Asteraceae
Putush
Verbenaceae
Dhaiphul
Lythraceae
Dhutra
Solanaceae
Kola
Musaceae
Jhoradan
Convolvulaceae
Khejur
Arecaceae
Herbs & Grasses
Not yet Assessed

Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Least concern
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Least concern
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
153 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No Scientific Name
Bengali name
Family
IUCN
Conservation
Status
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Uchunti
Alyce Clover
Lojjalu phul
Dhankuni
Nayantara
Tridhara
Kulaliya
Durba grass
Lajjabati
Asteraceae
Fabaceae
Oxalidaceae
Gentianaceae
Apocynaceae
Asteraceae
Fabaceae
Poaceae
Fabaceae
Not yet Assessed

Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Not yet Assessed
Least Concern
Not yet Assessed
Least Concern
Ageratum conyzoides
Alysicarpus vaginalis
Biophytum reinwardtii
Canscora decussata
Catharanthus roseus
Tridax procumbens
Desmodium triflorum
Cynodon dactylon
Mimosa pudica
The detailed study of the core zone revealed dominance of Coconut trees and no such
endemic plant species were found. The detailed list of plant species found in each quadrat
provided below in Table 3.22. Total 27 species of trees found in the study area along with 8
shrub species and 9 herbs and grass species observed. From the result below the
predominant species is Cocos nucifera among tree species and Lantana camara found to be
the predominant species among shrub. Among the herbaceous species Cynodon dactylon,
Mimosa pudica found to be abundant.
Phytosociological Analysis
Phytosociological parameters, such as, density, frequency, basal area and importance value
index of individual species were determined in randomly placed quadrats of different sizes in
the study area. Relative frequency, relative basal area and relative density were calculated
and the sum of these three represented Importance Value Index (IVI) for various species.
For shrubs, herbs and seedlings, the IVI was calculated by summing up relative frequency,
relative density and relative abundance.
Sample plots were selected in such a way to get maximum representation of different types
of vegetation and plots were laid out in different part of the study area of 10 km radius.
Analysis of the vegetation will help in determining the relative importance of each species in
the study area and to reveal if any economically valuable species is threatened in the
process. Phytosociological analysis of tree species is shown in Fig 3.22.
154 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 3.24: P HYTOSOCIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS O F T REE S PECIES

Sl.
No.
Scientific name
Local name
Total
No.
Total
no. of
quad
with sp.
Total Density
No.
of
quad
Tree Species
Relative
Density
Frequency
%
Relative
Frequency
Abundance
Relative
Abundance
IVI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Phyllanthus emblica
Mangifera indica
Azadirachta indica
Syzygium cumini
Aegle marnelos
Anthocephalus cadambe
Terminalia arjuna
Terminalia belerica
Shorea robusta
Butea monosperma
Albizzia chinensis
Buchnania lanzan
Ficus religiosa
Albizzia lebbek
Zizyphus mauritiana
Bauhinia sp.
Tamarindus indica
Terminalia chebula
Schleichera oleosa
Bridelia retusa
Acacia catechu
Terminalia tomentosa
Amlaki
Aam
Neem
Jam
Bel
Kadam
Arjun
Bahera
Sal
Palash
Siris
Char
Ashwatha
Shirish
Kul
Kanchan
Tentul
Haritaki
Kusum
Geio
Khair
Bahera
2
8
7
2
2
1
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
1
1
1
8
5
4
8
2
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
2
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
4
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
2.74
10.96
9.59
2.74
2.74
1.37
2.74
2.74
2.74
4.11
1.37
1.37
1.37
1.37
1.37
2.74
4.11
1.37
2.74
1.37
1.37
1.37
133.3
83.3
66.7
133.3
33.3
16.7
16.7
33.3
33.3
33.3
50.0
50.0
33.3
50.0
50.0
33.3
33.3
33.3
50.0
50.0
66.7
33.3
9.9
6.2
4.9
9.9
2.5
1.2
1.2
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.7
3.7
2.5
3.7
3.7
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.7
3.7
4.9
2.5
0.25
1.60
1.75
0.25
1.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
1.00
1.50
0.33
0.33
0.50
0.33
0.33
1.00
1.50
0.50
0.67
0.33
0.25
0.50
0.03
0.11
0.10
0.03
0.03
0.01
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.03
0.04
0.01
0.03
0.01
0.01
0.01
12.64
17.24
14.62
12.64
5.24
2.62
4.00
5.24
5.24
6.62
5.09
5.09
3.85
5.09
5.09
5.24
6.62
3.85
6.47
5.09
6.32
3.85
0.003
0.010
0.009
0.003
0.003
0.001
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.004
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.003
0.004
0.001
0.003
0.001
0.001
0.001
155 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No.
Scientific name
Local name
Total
No.
23
24
25
26
27
Dalbergia sissoo
Diospyros melanoxylon
Psidium guajava
Cocos nucifera
Artocarpus heterophyllus
Total
Shishoo
Kendu
Peyara
Narikel
Kanthal
2
2
7
12
3
73
Total
no. of
quad
with sp.
2
3
3
3
3
81
Total
No.
of
quad
6
6
6
6
6
162
Density
Relative
Density
Frequency
%
Relative
Frequency
Abundance
Relative
Abundance
IVI
0.003
0.003
0.009
0.015
0.004
0.091
2.74
2.74
9.59
16.44
4.11
33.3
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
1350.0
2.5
3.7
3.7
3.7
3.7
1.00
0.67
2.33
4.00
1.00
0.03
0.03
0.10
0.16
0.04
5.24
6.47
13.39
20.31
7.85
3.77
15.09
24.53
5.66
9.43
18.87
20.75
1.89
100.00
100.0
100.0
100.0
66.7
50.0
33.3
50.0
50.0
550.0
18.2
18.2
18.2
12.1
9.1
6.1
9.1
9.1
100.0
0.33
1.33
2.17
0.75
1.67
5.00
3.67
0.33
0.04
0.15
0.25
0.06
0.09
0.19
0.21
0.02
21.99
33.43
42.96
17.84
18.62
25.12
30.05
11.00
66.7
66.7
50.0
116.7
133.3
83.3
33.3
10.5
10.5
7.9
18.4
21.1
13.2
5.3
0.50
0.50
1.00
0.43
0.88
0.60
1.00
0.04
0.04
0.06
0.06
0.13
0.06
0.04
14.41
14.41
13.72
24.25
34.65
18.98
9.15
Shrubs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Clerodendrum viscosum
Chromolaena odorata
Lantana camara
Woodfordia fruticosa
Datura wrightii
Musa paradisiaca
Ipomoea fistulosa
Phoenix acaulis
Total
Bhant
Seyal muti
Putush
Dhaiphul
Dhutra
Kola
Jhoradan
Khejur
2
8
13
3
5
10
11
1
53
6
6
6
4
3
2
3
3
33
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
48
0.00
0.01
0.02
0.00
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.00
0.07
Herbs & Grasses

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ageratum conyzoides
Alysicarpus vaginalis
Biophytum reinwardtii
Canscora decussata
Catharanthus roseus
Tridax procumbens
Desmodium triflorum
Uchunti
Alyce Clover
Lojjalu phul
Dhankuni
Nayantara
Tridhara
Kulaliya
2
2
3
3
7
3
2
4
4
3
7
8
5
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.01
0.00
0.00
3.85
3.85
5.77
5.77
13.46
5.77
3.85
156 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No.
Scientific name
Local name
Total
No.
8
9
Cynodon dactylon
Mimosa pudica
Total
Durba grass
Lajjabati
19
11
52
Total
no. of
quad
with sp.
2
3
38
Total
No.
of
quad
6
6
54
Density
Relative
Density
Frequency
%
Relative
Frequency
Abundance
Relative
Abundance
IVI
0.02
0.01
0.07
36.54
21.15
33.3
50.0
633.3
5.3
7.9
100.0
9.50
3.67
0.37
0.21
42.17
29.26
157 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The interpretation vegetation study results of the study area are presented in the following
Table 3.25.
T ABLE 3.25: I NTERPRETATION OF V EGETATION R ESULTS I N T HE S TUDY AREA
Relative density
Relative density is found to be maximum Density of the primary

for Cocos nucifera about 16.44 and species is found to be
minimum for Anthocephalus cadambe, much
Albizzia
chinensis,
Buchnania
higher
in
lanzan, comparison with the other
Ficus religiosa, Albizzia lebbek, Zizyphus species.

mauritiana about 1.37
Relative frequency
Maximum RF found to be 9.9 in case of Vegetation community is

Phyllanthus emblica and minimum in case heterogenous in nature
of Anthocephalus cadambe, Terminalia
arjuna is about 1.2
Relative
Maximum value observed in case of Cocos nucifera is the
Abundance
Cocos nucifera is about 0.16 and minimum most

in
case
Albizzia
of
Anthocephalus
chinensis,
common
species
cadambe, found in the area.
Buchnania
lanzan,
Ficus religiosa, Albizzia lebbek, Zizyphus

mauritiana is about 0.01
Importance
Index (IVI
Value The maximum IVI value observed in case The dominant species is
of Cocos nucifera is about 20.31 and Cocos
Minimum
value
of
2.62
Anthocephalus cadambe.
in
nucifera
case of codominant
and
species
is
Mangifera indica
Biodiversity indices
Biodiversity index is a quantitative measure that reflects how many different types species,
there are in a dataset, and simultaneously takes into account how evenly the basic entities
(such as individuals) are distributed among those types of species. The value of biodiversity
index increases both when the number of types increases and when evenness increases.
For a given number of type of species, the value of a biodiversity index is maximized when
all type of species are equally abundant.
158 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 3:26: I NTERPRETATION OF V EGETATION RESULTS IN THE STUDY AREA

Community
Tree
Shannon-Wiener Index
(H)
2.96
Biodiversity indices
Simpson Diversity Index (1D)
0.94
Pielou's evenness
index
0.53
Shrub
1.85
0.84
0.96
Herb
1.84
0.80
0.66
From Table 3.26, it can be interpreted that tree community has higher diversity. While the
shrub community shows less diversity but more evenness. It is also observed that most of
the quadrates have controlled generation of plant species with older strands. Higher tree
species diversity can be interpreted as a greater number of successful species and a more
stable ecosystem where more ecological niches are available and the environment is less
likely to be hostile, environmental change is less likely to be damaging to the ecosystem as a
whole.
Economically important Flora of the study area
Agricultural crops: Rice (Khariff, Rabi, Jait) is the main crop grown during the monsoon
season. Also Pulses (Lathyrus, Blackgram, Greengram), Oilseeds are other important crops.
Different fruits like Banana, papaya, mangoes and vegetables like Potatoe, chili, brinjal,
cauliflower and capcicum also grown by the local people.
Medicinal plant species: The nearby area is also endowed with the several medicinal
plants which are commonly available in the shrub forest and waste lands. The common
medicinal plants of the region are Asparagus racemosus, Aegle marmelos (Bel), Azadirachta
indica (Neem), Alstonia scholaris (Chhatim) etc.
Rare and endangered floral species: During the vegetation survey in the study area did
not encounter any such species which are endangered or threatened under IUCN
(International Union for Conservation of Nature and Natural resources) guidelines.
3.10.4
F AU N AL C O M M U N I T I E S
Both direct (sighting) and indirect (evidences) observations methods were used to survey the
faunal species around the study area. Additionally reference of relevant literatures
(published/ unpublished) and dialogues with local villagers were also carried out to
consolidate the presence of faunal distribution in the area (Smith 1933-43, Ali and Ripley
1983, Daniel 1983, Prater 1993, Murthy and Chandrasekhar 1988).
159 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Mammals: No wild mammalian species was directly sighted during the field survey.
Dialogue with local villagers located around the study area also could not confirm presence
of any wild animal in that area. Common langur, mongoose, Indian mole rat, palm squirrel
were observed during primary survey.
Avifauna: Since birds are considered to be the indicators for monitoring and understanding
human impacts on ecological systems (Lawton, 1996) attempt was made to gather
quantitative data on the avifauna by walk through survey within the entire study area and
surrounding areas. From the primary survey, a total of 22 species of avifauna were identified
and recorded in the study area. The diversity of avifauna from this region was found to be
quite high and encouraging.
The list of fauna species found in the study area is mentioned in Table 3.27 to Table 3.29.
The tree lizard and common garden lizards are also seen. Variety of butterflies (like common
grass yellow/ common jezebel) and insects (such as beetles, spiders, red ants, and flies) are
spotted in abundance in the study zone.
T ABLE 3.27: F AUNA R ECORDED FROM THE P RIMARY S URVEY IN THE S TUDY AREA
AND THEIR C ONSERVATION S TATUS
Sl.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Scientific name
Macaca mulatta
Rousettus
leschenaultia
Mus musculus
Funambulus
pennanti
Bandicoota
bengalensis
Mus rattus
Herpestes
edwardsi
Schedule
of Wildlife
Protection
Act
Status as per
IUCN Red
Data List
Method
II (17-A)
V
Least Concern
Not assessed
DS
DS
Common mouse
Common five Stripped
Squirrel
Common Indian Rat
V
IV
Least Concern
Not assessed
DS
DS
V (6)
Not assessed
DS
Indian rat
Common Mongoose
V
IV(6-A)
Not assessed
Not assessed
NS
DS
IV (51)
IV (54)
Least Concern
Not assessed
Least Concern
DS
DS
DS
IV (50)
IV (17)
V
Least Concern
Least Concern
Least Concern
DS
DS
DS
English Name
Mammals
Rhesus Monkey
Fruit Bat
Birds
1
2
3
4
5
6
Milvus migrans
Cotuenix coturnix
Treron
phoenicoptera
Psittacula krameri
Cuculus varius
Corvus splendens
Common kite
Common or grey quail
Common green
pigeon
Rose ringed parakeet
Cuckoo
House crow
160 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Status as per
IUCN Red
Data List
Method
Night Hiran
Schedule
of Wildlife
Protection
Act
IV
Not assessed
NS
Indian house sparrow

Koel
V
IV
Least Concern
Not assessed
DS
DS
Cattle egret
Painted Partridge
Common crane
Pond heron
Blue rock pigeon
Southern magpie
robin
Common kingfisher
Golden backed
woodpecker
Rose ringed Parakeet
Common Maina
Small minivet
IV
IV (51)
IV (16)
IV
IV (54)
IV
Least Concern
Least Concern
Least Concern
Not assessed
Least Concern
Least Concern
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
IV (37)
IV (79)
Least Concern
Not assessed
DS
DS
IV
IV (45)
IV (8)
Least Concern
Not assessed
Not assessed
DS
DS
DS
Slaty headed Scimitar

babbler
Quaker Babbler
IV (3)
Least Concern
DS
IV (3)
Not assessed
DS
IV (12)
Not assessed
NS
II
II
-
Not assessed
Not assessed
Not assessed
Not assessed
NS
DS
NS
DS
IV
IV
IV
Least Concern
Least Concern
Not assessed
NS
NS
NS
Scientific name
English Name
Nicticorax
nycticorax
Passer domesticus
Eudynamys
scolopceae
Bubulcus ibis
Francolinus pictus
Grus grus
Ardeo grayeli
Columba livia
Copsychus
saularis
Alcedo atthis
Dinopim
bengalense
Psittacula krameri
Aerodotheres tristis
Pericrocotus
cinnamomaus
Pomatorhinus
schisticeps
Alcippe
poioicephale
2
3
4
5
Bungarus
caerulens
Ptyas mucosas
Varanus varanus
Typhlina bramina
Calotes versicolur
1
2
3
Rana tigrina
Bufo melanostictus
Hyla sp.
Reptiles
Common Krait
Yellow rat snake
Tree lizard
Blind Snake
Common Garden
Lizard
Amphibians
Common yellow frog
Toad
Tree frog
N.B: NS= Not sighted but included as per the information provided by villagers, DS = Direct Sighting
T ABLE 3:28: L IST OF OTHER F AUNA R ECORDED W ITHIN THE S TUDY A REA
Sl.No.
Scientific name
1
2
3
Canis familiaris
Felis catus
Sus scrofa
English Name
Mammals
Dog (Street dog)
Billi (Domestic cat)
Suar (Domestic pig)
161 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No.
4
5
6
Scientific name
Capra hircus
Bubalus bubalis
Bos indicus
English Name
Domestic goat
Domestic buffalo
Cow
1
2
3
Anas platyrhyncha
Columbia livia
Gallus domesticus
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Labeo rohita
Catla catla
Cirrhinus mirgala
Clarius batrachus
Macrobrachium rosenbeigie
Channa punetatus
Puntius Sp.
Liza tade
Chana striatus
Anabas tesludineus
Birds
Duck
Pigeon
Domestic chicken
Fishes
Rahu
Katla
Mirgala
Magur
Chingri (Arthropoda)
Lata
Puthi
Bhangar
Sole
Koi
T ABLE 3.29: L IST OF B UTTERFLIES R ECORDED W ITHIN T HE S TUDY AREA

Sl.No
Scientific name
English Name
Schedule
of Wildlife
Protection
Act
Status as per
IUCN Red Data
List
Method
Eurema hecabe
Common Grass Yellow
IV
Not assessed
DS
Junonia hierta
Yellow pansy
IV
Least Concern
DS
Danaus chrysippus
plain tiger
IV
Not assessed
DS
4
5
6
Junonia atlites
Neptis hylas
Precis iphita
Grey pansy
Common Sailer
Chocolate Pansy
IV
IV
IV
Not assessed
Not assessed
Not assessed
DS
DS
DS
The study area is marked with moderate population of flora and fauna. With reference to the
Wildlife Protection Act 1972, total number of wildlife tabulated in this study can be
characterized as given in the Table 3.30.
T ABLE 3.30: C HARACTERIZATION OF F AUNA I N T HE S TUDY AREA (AS P ER W.P ACT ,
1972)
Sl.No.
Schedule of Wildlife Protection Act 1972
No. of species
Remark
Schedule I
Schedule II
162 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No.
Schedule of Wildlife Protection Act 1972
No. of species
Remark
Schedule III
Schedule IV
34
Schedule V
Schedule VI
The detailed interpretation of flora and fauna identified within 10 km radius of the project site
are tabulated In Table 3.31.
T ABLE 3.31: D ESCRIPTION OF F LORA & F AUNA
Sl.No.
Type of Species
1
2
3
Endangered species
Endemic species
Grass lands
Core Zone
Flora
None of the species found
None of the species found
No grass lands
Fauna
1
2
3
4
3.10.5
Endangered species
Endemic Species
Migratory species
Migratory Corridors & Flight Paths
None
Not present
None
No corridors & flight paths
AQ U AT IC EC OL OG Y
The study area intersected by few natural drainage, cannals and ponds. A number of ponds
were investigated for enumeration of aquatic fauna. In order to study aquatic flora and faunal
life one time survey was conducted during the pre monsoon season. Major component of the
aquatic life under the study area are listed below.
Phytoplankton and
Zooplankton
To assess the planktonic profile of Phytoplankton and Zooplankton, 2 water samples from a
nearby pond in Village Ishwaripur and Surjapur in western side of the plant area were
collected at sub surface level. The aquatic ecological study was conducted in different water
bodies of the study area and the flora and fauna was recorded.
Aquatic Flora
The study area is not very rich in floral diversity for both land and aquatic ecology as there is
no river or perennial natural nalla is flowing close by of the plant area through which water is
passing. The aquatic vegetation consists of the following groups of plants in this area
163 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Significance of Plankton:
Planktons can be broadly grouped into two categories those with plant origin are called
Phytoplankton and those with animal origin are called Zooplankton.
Significance of Phytoplankton:
Phytoplanktons are the major primary producers of organic matter in the aquatic ecosystem
and especially oceans whose 90% productivity is from the planktons. Collectively, they
directly or indirectly support the entire animal population. When the water column becomes
shallow in spring, phytoplanktons are exposed to higher light intensity in the upper sunlight.
Light is one of the major abiotic factors that favour the growth of phytoplankton. The massive
build up of phytoplankton in spring directly contributes new organic carbon to support the
zooplankton, which, in turn, benefits larger aquatic animals including fish, crustaceans,
molluscs, birds.
T ABLE 3.32: D ESCRIPTION OF P HYTOPLANKTONS
Sl.No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Name of species
Diatoma Sp.
Chlorella Sp.
Closterium Sp.
Fragillaria Sp.
Pleurosigma Sp.
Anabaena Sp.
Spirulina Sp.
Oscillatoria Sp.
Closteropsis Sp.
Phormidium Sp.
Calothrix Sp.
Planktospherica Sp.
Euglena Sp.
Phytoconis Sp.
Aserionella Sp.
Schroederia Sp.
Name of Family
Bacillariophyceae
Chlorophyceae
Chlorophyceae
Bacillariophyceae
Bacillariophyceae
Myxophyceae
Myxophyceae
Myxophyceae
Myxophyceae
Myxophyceae
Myxophyceae
Myxophyceae
Chlorophyceae
Chlorophyceae
Chlorophyceae
Chlorophyceae
Significance of Zooplankton:
The significance of zooplanktons is found in their role in transferring biological production
from phytoplankton to larger organisms in the food web. A large number of phytoplankton
species are grazed upon by the microscopic protozoans, tunicates, copepods and other
crustaceans. These in turn become food for other animals further linking the food web.
Therefore, variability in the production of planktons would affect the survival of young fish
that depend on them.
164 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 3.33: D ESCRIPTION OF Z OOPLANKTONS

Sl.No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
3.11
Name of species
Filinia sp.
Cyclops nauplius
Asplanchana sp.
Diaptomus sp.
Mesocyclops hyalinus
Diaphanosoma excisum
Phylum name
Rotifera
Copepoda
Rotifera
Copepoda
Copepoda
Cladocera
SOCIO ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT
The growth of industrial sectors and infrastructure developments in and around the
agriculture dominant areas, villages and towns are bound to create its impact on the socioeconomic aspects of the local population. The impacts may be positive or negative
depending upon the developmental activity. To assess the impacts on the socio-economics
of the local people, it is necessary to study the existing socio- economic status of the local
population, which will be helpful for making efforts to further improve the quality of life in the
study area. The section delineates the overall appraisal of the socially relevant attributes.
The data collection on the impact of industrialization on the socio-economic aspects in the
study area has been done through analysis of various secondary data and also
supplemented by the primary data generated through the process of socio- economic
survey.
The study of socio- economic component of environment incorporating facets related to
socio-economic conditions in the proposed development zone is a part of EIA study. This
includes demographic structure, infrastructure resources, health status of the community and
economic attributes referring to employment, income, agriculture, trade and industrial
development. The study of these parameters helps in identifying, predicting and evaluating
the likely impacts due to proposed project.
The proposed Synthetic Resin Plant is planned to be located at Village - Iswaripur, Bandipur
Gram Panchayat, PS - Khardah, District - 24 Parganas (North), State-West Bengal. The
area of proposed plant is 1.34 Acres (58369.95 Sq.ft) for the Resin manufacturing plant.
3.11.1
THE STUDY AREA
The proposed project falls in North 24 Parganas District. However, the 10-km radius study
area from the center of the proposed project site falls under two (02) districts - North 24
Parganas and Hooghly. It includes four (04) sub-districts (also termed as Block), eight (08)
Municipalities, eight (08) census town and fifty three (53) rural villages from North 24
Parganas of Presidency Division while one (01) census towns and two (02) rural villages
165 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
from Hooghly district of Burdwan Division. The nearest railway station is Khardah (Local)
about 4 Kms towards West and Howrah Junction at a distance of 19 km. The details of study
area are given below in Table 3.34:
T ABLE 3.34: S TUDY AREA D ETAILS
Division
Presidency
District
Information
North
24 Sub-districts: 04
Parganas
(Amdanga, Barrackpore I, Barrackpore II, Barasat I)
Municipality: 08
(North Barrackpore, Barrackpore, Titagarh, Khardaha,
New Barrackpore, Barrackpur Cantonment (CB),
Panihati, Madhyamgram)
Census Town: 09
(Ruiya , Garshyamnagar, Noapara (P), Jafarpur ,
Muragachha, Teleni Para, Chandpur , Kokapur)
Burdwan
Hooghly
Village: 51
Sub-district: 01
(Serampur Utarpara)
Municipality: 01
( Konnagar)
Census Town: 02
(Dakshin Rajyadharpur)
Village: 02
3.11.2
METHODOLOGY
The methodology adopted in the assessment of socio-economic condition in the study area
is as given below:
The socio-economic profile of the study area is based on site visit, discussion with local
inhabitants and the secondary data available from various concerned agencies and
offices. The demographic profile, employment pattern, Health conditions, etc. have been
sourced from Primary Census Abstract - 2011 compact disk (CD) of West Bengal
obtained from Directorate of Census Operations West Bengal, Janganana Bhavan,
Kolkata, Economic review (2011-2012) of West Bengal and Primary Health Centre.
Interviews and discussions with the local authorities, school teacher, health practitioner
and the villagers were carried out during the site visit by SGS team in March, 2015.
166 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The socio-economic survey pertaining to the subjective analysis of the socio-economic

indicators was carried within 10km radius study area using judgmental or purposive
sampling method.
The survey focused on the villages/Grampanchayats close to the project site and
therefore four GPs were selected for this task. The survey also aimed to collect relevant
information for preparing socio-economic profile of the region and also in understanding
the perception of the inhabitants in the study area towards the proposed project
activities.
The survey was conducted in four Grampanchayats viz. Bandipur, Patulia, Mohanpur
and Seuli by using predesigned set of questionnaire for sarpanch, teacher, medical
practitioner and local inhabitants. Field survey also covered villages viz. Ishwaripur,
Balagar Singerber and Dangadihila.
3.11.3
N O R T H 24 P A R G A N AS D I S T R I C T
The district of North 24 Parganas in West Bengal extends from latitude 22 11' 06" north to
23 15' 02" north and from longitude 88 20' east to 89 05' east. It is bordered by Nadia in
the north, Bangladesh (Khulna Division) in North and East, South 24 Parganas and Kolkata
to the South and Kolkata, Howrah and Hooghly to the west. Barasat is the district
headquarters of North 24 Parganas district. North 24 Parganas is the most populous district
in West Bengal. It is also the tenth-largest district in the State by area and second-most
populated district in the country, after Thane district of Maharashtra (Census of India, 2011).
Since the independence of this country, District North 24 Parganas of West Bengal, India
has been experiencing a very high pace of urbanisation both in terms of volume of urban
population and number of urban centres. Urban population in the district has increased from
967790 in 1951 to 4850947 in 2001 implying a nearly fivefold increase during the last 50
years (i.e. 1951 2001). During the same period, number of urban centres leaped from 23 to
55 indicating nearly 2.4 times multiplication and similarly percentage of urban population to
total population of the district as a whole more than 1.25 times from 42.92 % in 1951 to
54.29 % in 2001. This clearly signifies the speed and scale of urbanisation within the district.
Mainly, such type of urbanisation was found in European countries in the first quarter of the
last century. The nature of urbanisation in this district is very high during the last five
decades (i.e. 1951 2001) which show a constant growth. But for last two decades (i.e.
1981 2001) the rate of increase as well as percentage of urban population to total district
population was not as high as it indicating before.
167 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
In North 24 Parganas, the percentage of urban population was 42.92 % in 1951 and bounce
up into 51.03 % in 1981. During this period urban-rural ratio increased from 1.33 to 0.96 and
the net increase of urban centres were 32 which is 2.4 times. It is very interesting to note
that during the span of these 30 years, urban population increased by 1856904 while rural
population by 1423844. But the percentage increase of urban population (191.87 %) was
near to double of that of the rural population (110.64 %). This differential growth rate was
mainly attributed by the migration from rural areas of North 24 Parganas. A steady rural
growth was found due to independence of East Pakistan and huge population influx has
been noticed in the rural part of this border district. Urban concentration was found mainly in
the Barrackpore Industrial Belt due to most favourable geo-economic consideration. This
areas in and around Kolkata with expanding with road and rail network gathered momentum
to attract population and began to develop as most urbanized areas within the district.
During 1951 61, the rate of urbanisation registered a percentage of 47.34 which was
highest during all the decades. However, percentage of urban population was increased to
45.18 from 42.92 in 1951. The volume of urban population grew by 458135. In this decade
the urban population increased by 47.34 %, where as the percentage of rural population
increase was 34.47 per cent. During this period, it is noticeable that 7 new urban centres
were emerged. During 1961 71, there was an urban growth of 645396 and the percentage
of urban population increased from 45.18 % in 1961 to 49.26 % in 1971 and the percentage
increased of urban population of 45.26 %. During the same period there was a net increase
of 14 new urban centres which has 46.67 % rate of increase. During 1971 81, the rate of
increase of urban population was registered of 36.37 %. However the percentage of urban
population was increased to 51.03 % from 49.26 % in 1971. This is the decade where urban
population crosses the number of rural population. The urban population grew by 753373. 15
new urban centres were emerged during this decade which has 34.09 percent of increase.
3.11.4
B AS E L I N E S O C I O -E C O N O M I C S T A T U S O F T H E S T U D Y A R E A
3.11.4.1 D E M O G R AP H I C P R O F I L E
The details regarding demographic structures in study area have been abstracted from
census data of West Bengal (2011). The number of Sub-districts, Municipalities, Town and
Villages in the study area is enclosed as Annexure II depicts total population; population
structure viz scheduled caste, scheduled tribes population and number of literates. The
salient features arising out of demographic details at a glance are presented in Table 3.35.
168 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 3.35: D EMOGRAPHIC F EATURES OF T HE S TUDY AREA

Sl.No Demographic Parameters
(0-2)
(2-10) km
Total(0-10) km
km
1
Number of Census Town
01
09
10
Number of Villages
09
44
53
Number of Households
11019
342718
353737
Total Population
47619
1445014
1492633
Male
24463
734711
759174
Female
23156
710303
733459
Sex ratio (females per 1000 males)
947
967
966
Schedule Caste
8669
158465
167134
Schedule Tribes
1350
15881
17231
10
Total Literates
33059
1198209
1231268
11
Male
17811
627008
644819
12
Female
15242
571201
586443
13
Population (0-6yrs)
5436
112688
118124
14
Scheduled Caste (%)
18.2
10.9
11.2
15
Scheduled Tribes (%)
2.8
1.1
1.2
16
Total Literacy (%)
78.4
89.9
89.6
Source: Primary Census Abstract CD (2011) of West Bengal State; North 24-Pargana and Hugli District
Hooghly District
The salient observations are summarized below:
The above reveals that study area includes (10) census town and fifty three (53) villages
from North 24 Parganas and Hooghly district. Out of total 53 villages, 9 villages exist
within 0-2 km distance while rest 44 of them falls within 2-10 km from proposed project
activity.
Total population in the study area is 1492633; out of which about 47619 people (from
11019 households) lie within (0-2) km radius while 1445014 people (from 342718
households) exist within (2-10) km from the proposed project site.
The percentage of scheduled tribes population within 0-2 km is 2.8%, higher than
population existing within 2-10 km which is 1.1%.
169 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sex ratio (number of females per thousand males) in the study area is 966 which is
higher than sex ratio of west Bengal state ie.950 females per thousand males as well as
national average sex ratio (940) as per the latest reports of Census 2011 Directorate.
The percentage of literates in the study area is 89.6 which is higher than the average
literacy rate of north 24-Parganas (76.26%) and Hooghly (81.80%) districts as well as
West Bengal state i.e. 76.26%.
3.11.4.2 I N F R A S T R U C T U R E R E S O U R C E B AS E
The census data regarding infrastructure facilities for the year 2011 is yet to be published.
The basic amenities (education, medical, water supply, post and telegraph, transportation,
communication and power supply etc.) in the study area are summarized below on the basis
interaction done with Grampanchayat presidents during socio-economic survey.
Status of Infrastructure Facilities in the Study Area
All villages in the study area have facility of primary school (1st to 5th standard) in their own
village. However, some villages have middle school (6th to 8th standard). Majority of people in
the area go to surrounding town, where all higher educational facilities are available. The
Primary Health Centre (PHC) in all four surveyed Grampanchayats i.e. Bandipur, Patulia,
Mohanpur and Sewli and number of sub-centres under its jurisdiction in the neighboring
villages. Majority of people visits Dr. B. N. Bose State General Hospital, Barrackpore for
major ailments. Most common source of potable water in the area comprises of tap
connections through overhead tank .The approach road and internal road network in the
urban area is good compare to rural area. State transport bus service up to the villages is
available. The communication facilities can be termed as satisfactory as most of the villages
are privileged by post offices and mobile phones. Power supply facility is available in almost
all villages for domestic use.
3.11.4.3 E C O N O M I C R E S O U R C E B A S E
North 24 Parganas
North 24 Parganas is West Bengals most populous district. The River Ganges flows along
the entire west border of the district. Majority population is mainly engaged in industrial
workforce as a source of livelihood. However, small population is engaged in farming, fishing
and other agricultural activities.
The Information Technology hub of Kolkata is at this district, which is the centre of some of
the notable IT/ITES Indian and multinational companies.
170 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Hooghly
Hooghly is one of the most economically developed districts in West Bengal. It is also the
main jute cultivation, jute industry, and jute trade hub with jute mills being mainly located
along the riverbanks of Hooghly. Thus jute forming is associated with a large number of
farming communities of this district and providing livelihood to innumerable number of
agricultural labourer through employment generation. Jute provides raw materials to major
industries and contributes significantly in the economy of the district. There are also a
number of industrial complexes.
Study Area
The workers participation information of the study area have been abstracted from Primary
Census Abstract 2011 (CD) of West Bengal and given in Table 3.36. The Main and
Marginal workers constitute majority of industrial followed by household labours, agricultural
labourers and cultivators. The employment pattern of the study area is described and shown
below in Fig. 3.25 and Fig. 3.26
T ABLE 3.36: W ORKERS P ARTICIPATION IN THE S TUDY AREA
Workers Participation
Total Population
Main Workers (%)
Marginal workers (%)
Non Workers (%)
0-2 km
47619
14091 (29.6)
1950 (4.1)
31578 (66.3)
2-10ckm
1445014
458732 (31.7)
44961 (3.1)
941321 (65.2)
0-10km (Study Area)

1492633
472823 (31.7)
46911 (3.1)
972899 (65.2)
Source: Primary Census Abstract CD (2011) of West Bengal State; North 24 Parganas and Hugli District
The salient observations are as under:
The occupational pattern of study area shows that the percentage of main, marginal
and non workers is 31.7%, 3.1% and 65.2% respectively.
The majority of main and marginal workers are engaged in industrial activities
followed by household labours, agriculture labours and cultivator.
The main worker population in 0-2km and 2-10km are 29.6% and 31.7% respectively.
Non-worker population within 0-2km and 2-10km is nearly same i.e.66.3% and 65.2%
respectively.
The marginal workers in the 0-2km area are 4.1% while about 3.1% in 2-10km.
171 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 3.25: E MPLOYMENT PATTERN IN 02 KM
F IGURE -3.26: E MPLOYMENT PATTERN IN

2-10 KM
3.11.4.4 C U L T U R A L A N D A E S T H E T I C A T T R I B U T E S
West Bengal is considered to be one of the richest states in India in terms of culture,
tradition, fairs and festivals. There are many festivals which are celebrated with great
passion and enthusiasm. Most significant festivals in the study area are as follows:
Durga Puja: Durga Puja, dedicated to the Goddess Durga is one of the most awaited events
in North 24 Parganas city. It occurs every year and is celebrated with much pomp and show.
This eve symbolizes the triumph of Goddess Durga over the devil Mahishasura.
Charak Puja: An exclusive festival of West Bengal, Charak Puja is a festival celebrated for
saying good-bye to the passing year. It is considered that the celebration leads to affluence
in the coming year. Charak Puja is celebrated on the midnight of Chaitra Sankranti.
Saraswati Puja: Vasant Panchami is treated by celebrants as Goddess Saraswati's
birthday. People worship Goddess Saraswati to attain enlightenment through knowledge and
to rid themselves of lethargy, sluggishness and ignorance.
Tourist Attraction
The most popular tourist attraction in north 24 parganas include Temple of Dakshineswar ,
Adyapeath Temple, Mangal Pandey Park, Bibhuti Bhusan Wild Life Sanctuary,
Chandraketugarh, Baraha Mihirer Dhipi etc.
Barrackpore: Barrackpore was one of the earliest British settlements along the Hooghly
river. The name Barrackpore originates from the English word barracks. Barrackpore
acquired the name as the site of the first major military base of the British East India
Company. Prior to that time, Barrackpore was known as Chanak, and is mentioned by that
name in the Manasa Mangal. Arguably, it is also believed that during the regime of Mughal
Emperor Aurangzeb, this place was a major collection centre of "khajna" (taxes) and then it
was named as Barbakpur. With time, the name changed to Barrackpore.
172 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
3.11.4.5 M E D I C A L & P U B L I C H E AL T H F A C I L I T I E S
Health is both an input and outcome of broader social and economic development. It is also
well known that achievements in health do not simply depend on the health sector, but arise
out of improvement in standard of living, social stability, education, housing, water supply,
sanitation and other environmental factors.
The existing health infrastructure and services in the study area comprises of a Primary
Health Centre (PHC) in all four Grampanchayats i.e. Bandipur, Patulia, Mohanpur and Sewli
and number of sub-centres under its jurisdiction in the neighboring villages. All PHCs staffed
with a medical officer supported by a pharmacist, a senior clerk and an aya (midwife). During
our visit to Bandipur Block Primary Health center (BPHC), it was informed that doctors and
staff organize general health checkup and awareness programme on maternal and child
care in surrounding villages on a regular basis.
The sub centre available in the villages is able to provide only first aid service to the people
due to unavailability of qualified staff and equipments. The patients are referred to nearby
PHCs and Dr. B. N. Bose State General Hospital, Barrackpore for major ailments.
Existing Health Conditions and Concerns
Tuberculosis, diarrhoea and diabetes are most prevalent in the study area. During survey,
the residents reported annual expenditure on health to be above Rs. 800-1000 per family.
The private hospitals in surrounding town are equipped with better facilities than the PHC
and PHS. During site visit, discussions with Dr. S. Roy and Dr. A Dasgupta of Bandipur
Block Primary Health Center (BPHC) and the local people indicate that these private clinics
mostly caters to the affluent class residents i.e., mostly belonging to middle income group in
the area. Also, it was revealed that in the last few years there is an increase in number of
tuberculosis patients which may be possibly due to excess of tobacco chewing and smoking.
3.11.5
SOCIO-ECONOMIC SURVEY
3.11.5.1 S AM P L I N G M E T H O D
In order to assess and evaluate the likely impacts arising out of any developmental projects
on socio-economic environment, it is necessary to gauge the existing socio-economic
condition and apprehensions of the people in the project area. Socio-economic survey
serves as an effective tool for fulfilling this requirement. Detailed information about prevailing
socio-economic condition in the study area, awareness, opinion and reaction of the people
about the project was collected by using judgmental or purposive sampling methods
representing various socio-economic sections of the community.
173 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Information collected both primary through survey and secondary from various concerned
departments was analysed. This was correlated with the developmental activities which
would help to visualize existing socio-economic conditions in the area and also to predict
impacts due to proposed project activity in future.
3.11.5.2 O U T C O M E O F S O C I O - E C O N O M I C S U R V E Y
The salient observations arising out of survey are:
In terms of social group, majority of households in the study area belongs to Hindu
community followed by Muslims. The small population of tribal community includes
(orao, santhal, munda etc).
Most of the residents have either semi pucca or pucca houses with walls made up of
cement and bricks. This is also evident from wealth status as most of the respondents
have reported their monthly income in the range of 3000 5000 per month.
Educational facility in the study area is quite good. Primary to high school education is
available in all Grampanchayats. The school infrastructure was found to be satisfactory
and adequate. To avail further education like degree, diploma, polytechnic and
engineering, students travel to surrounding town which is located at a distance of 68km from project area.
Most common source of potable water in the area comprises of tap connections
through overhead tank. A small number of tube well and hand pumps are also
available in the area. Survey revealed that both quality and quality of water is not
satisfactory.
Sanitation facility is very poor. In rural area the sewage is let in to the open drains,
leading to an open nala. During rainy season, the sanitation condition becomes worst;
the sewage water stagnation is very common giving rise to health ailments in the area.
Open surface drains and sewer lines serve the purpose of carrying sewage in the
urban areas.
Power supply facility is available in almost all households for domestic use and few are
using electricity for agriculture purpose. 80% households have shifted to LPG for
cooking purposes whereas 20% households with low economic status are using wood
as primary source of fuel.
The Primary health centers in the study area was found to be adequate with respect to
equipment and medicines but primary health sub-centers are poorly maintained with
inadequate staff, lack of equipments and medicine. Therefore, people are expecting a
mobile medical facility to be provided by proponent in rural area under welfare activity.
174 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Majority of tribal population depends on traditional medicines for their primary health
care.
Majority households are engaged in industrial workforce as a source of livelihood.

However, a small population is involved in agriculture and its allied activities.
The crop cultivated in the area is only paddy. Few people grow green vegetables viz.
brinjal and onion which are sold in weekly market in the surrounding villages or in main
market of surrounding town.
Jute forming is associated with farming communities in the area and providing
livelihood to number of agricultural labourer through employment generation.
Fair price shop is available in the area and essential commodities like Rice, Edible Oil,
Sugar, Iodized Salt and Kerosene are being distributed to the targeted cardholders as
per the eligibility and rates fixed by the Government.
The approach road and internal road network in the study area is satisfactory. State
transport bus service up to the village is available. Besides, people use three wheelers
/ auto rickshaw for their routine household chores. The nearest railway station is
Barrackpore and Titagarh located at about 2km- 8km from project area.
The communication facilities can be termed as satisfactory as most of the villages are
privileged by post offices and mobile phones.
Recreational facilities like television and radio are available in about all households.
3.11.5.3 A W A R E N E S S A N D O P I N I O N O F P E O P L E A B O U T T H E P R O J E C T
An attempt has been made to know the awareness and opinion of the people about
proposed project activities. The local people welcomed the proposed project with
expectations depicted below:
3.11.5.4 E C O N O M I C A L B E N E F I T S
Unemployment rate in the study area is very high. The respondents expect employment
opportunities on the basis of their education and experience during construction and
operation phase. Overall, due to the employment generation and economic progress, there
will be positive change in socioeconomic condition of the people residing in the vicinity of
project site.
3.11.5.5 H E A L T H C A R E A N D D R I N K I N G W A T E R F A C I L I T Y
Adequate health care facilities and enough ambulance facility in emergency time are not
available in the rural part study area. Local people informed about their expectation of
175 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
improvement of health facilities and drinking water supply during summer which is of prime
concern to them.
In general, the people in the study area are not against the setting up of various types of
industries in the area as this will surely result into improvement in quality of life provided it is
equipped with adequate measures for environmental pollution control and local people
should get preference employment opportunities.
176 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
CHAPTER 4
ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
AND MITIGATION MEASURES
177 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
C HAPTER 4: A NTICIPATED E NVIRONMENTAL I MPACTS AND

M ITIGATION M EASURES
4.1
INTRODUCTION
The assessment of potential environmental impact consists of the expected changes in the
environment due to the proposed plant. The main aim of assessment of environment
impacts is to identify the nature and significance of anticipated adverse and beneficial
environmental impacts. This chapter assesses nature, type and magnitude of the potential
environmental impacts likely on the various relevant physical, biological, social and cultural
components due to proposed project. The environmental, biological, ecological and social
impacts can be direct as well as indirect. Scientific techniques and methodologies based on
mathematical modeling are also available for studying impacts of various project activities on
environmental parameters.
The next step is prediction of impacts which is an important component in environmental
impact assessment process. Several techniques and methodologies are used for predicting
anticipated impacts due to proposed project. The proposed resin manufacturing plant may
cause adverse environmental impacts on surrounding environment unless proper
environmental management plan is adopted during construction and operation phase.
Selecting suitable mitigative measures in terms of sites, technology, machinery and
operations can minimize the major possible adverse environmental impacts due to the
proposed plant.
The following environmental components have been studied to identify the possible
environmental impacts due to the proposed resin plant:
Air Environment
Noise Environment
Water Environment
Land Environment
Ecological Environment
Socio-Economic Environment
The main procedural steps of environmental impact assessment can be summarized as

follows:
178 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
A. Identification:
This involves identification of the major project activities, environmental attributes, the
impacts of the activities on the environmental attributes and formulation of activity-impact
matrix. The impact rating assessment matrix is presented below in Table 4.1.
T ABLE 4.1: I MPACT R ATING ASSESSMENT M ATRIX
Nature
impact
Duration
impact
Impact
of Beneficial
Adverse
of Short term
Long term
Impacted Area
Localized
Regional
Criteria
Positive
Negative
Impacts shall be confined to a stipulated time
Impacts shall be continued till the end of life cycle of the
plant
Impacts shall be confined within the plant boundary
Impacts shall be continued beyond plant boundary
The impact of proposed plant activities on each environmental attribute was assessed. The
construction and operation phases were considered to identify the possible impacts due to
plant. The matrix method has been chosen to list the potential impacts of the proposed plant.
The activities have been arranged in columns and the environmental attributes in the row of
the matrix. The beneficial and adverse impacts have been analyzed in the following section
on prediction and evaluation of impacts.
For anticipated environmental impact identification, proposed plant activities has been
divided into two phases:
1. Construction Phase
2. Operation Phase
1. Construction Phase
This phase will involve the activities starting with site clearing and ending with mechanical
and electrical erection of equipments/ machineries and commissioning of the plant. The
board activities during this period will be as follows:
Cleaning of site
Leveling and internal road lying
Foundation work and civil structure work
Erection of mechanical equipments
Synchronization of various equipments/ processes and final commissioning of plant.
The construction phase of the proposed plant will be for shorter duration for about 10-12
months only. The construction work mainly involves generation of dust, noise pollution and
179 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
demand for water during excavation, civil works, erection and commissioning. Though
aesthetics and socio-economic factors are also identified, impact on these will be marginal
only. Mostly, local workers will be deployed during construction phase.
2. Operation Phase
Because of the potential to create long-term impacts, operation phase is very important from
the environmental impact assessment point of view. The basic impacts like particulate and
gaseous emissions from Boiler, DG set, fugitive emission from process and raw material
handling, movement of vehicles, water consumption and waste water generation and solid
waste may have potential adverse impact on air quality, water quality, noise level, soil and
land. The operation phase will broadly include following direct and indirect activities.
Entire chain of activities related to production cycle.
Storage and transportation of fuels, raw materials and finished products.
Generation and supply of electricity
Particulate and gaseous emissions
Effluent and sewage generations
Noise generation
Solid and hazardous waste generation
General equipment failure
Occupational health and safety of workers
B. Prediction:
This involves prediction of the nature, magnitude and significance of the impacts. It also
includes analysis of the possibilities and/or probabilities of occurrences of the impacts. The
matrix establishes Cause-effect relationship between the activities and the environmental
factors responsible for them as shown in Table 4.2 and Table 4.3 with respect to activities
during construction and operation phases, respectively.
180 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 4.2 I MPACT P REDICTION M ATRIX DURING C ONSTRUCTION P HASE
Activities
Air
Site cleaning
Excavation
Construction of Civil Works
Installation of Equipments
Transportation
Material Handling of
Construction Materials
Employment
Environmental Attributes
Socio
Land &
Noise
Water
Economic Aesthetics
Soil
s
T ABLE 4.3 I MPACT PREDICTION M ATRIX DURING O PERATION P HASE

Activities
Air
Noise
Environmental Attribute
Water Land
Socio
Flora& Aesthetics
& soil Economics Fauna
Handling & Charging of

Raw Materials
Operation of Boiler
Operation of STP
Isolated Storage Facilities
Storage Facilities of Liquid

Raw Materials/Products
Storage Facilities of Solid

Raw Materials/Products
Transportation of Raw
Materials/Products
Development of Greenbelt
Employment Generation
C. Evaluation
All the potentially significant environmental impacts are evaluated and a qualitative
assessment is made. An impact level is rated as low, medium or high. The impact rating
is based on two parameters i.e. the severity of impact and the likelihood of occurrence of
impact.
181 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Severity of Impact: The severity of an impact is a function of a range of considerations

including impact magnitude, impact duration, impact extent, compliance of prescribed
legal framework and the characteristics of the receptors/ resources; and
Likelihood of Occurrence: How likely is the impact (this is particularly important

consideration in the evaluation of unplanned/ accidental events)
4.2
AN TI CIP ATE D ENV IR O NMENT AL IMP ACT S
The qualitative impacts assessed for each parameter are discussed below:
4.2.1 T O P O G R A P H Y A N D P H Y S I O G R A P H I C
A. Construction Phase
The proposed plant activities, such as, levelling, excavation, construction of buildings and
other activities will be limited within 1.34 Acres (5422.81 sqm) of land within the proposed
plant site, which is currently industrial plot. Therefore, topography and physiography of the
area will not be affected during the construction of the plant. Hence, no significant impact is
anticipated on the topography and physiography due to construction of the proposed plant.
B. Operational Phase
During operation phase of proposed HAC plant, no impact is anticipated on the topography
and physiography of the area.
Hence, the impact on the topography and physiography of the study area is as per given
below.
Impact Rating
Significance and Nature of impact
Duration of impact
Impacted Area
Likelihood of occurrence
Severity of impact
Topography & Physiography

Negligible and Adverse
Long term
Localized
Low
Slight
4.2.2 I M P A C T O N S O I L Q U A L I T Y
During the construction phase, soil would be excavated at the plant site for levelling,
foundations of buildings, etc. Prior to levelling and excavation, top soil will be segregated
and stockpiled. Top soil will be used during the greenbelt development and landscaping at
the plant site.
182 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
At the time of construction, some amount of debris, cuttings of construction materials, etc,
may be observed at the construction site. However, the quantity of these waste materials
would be very small and limited up to the construction site. These wastes may contaminate
soil of the plant site. However, the extent of the contamination would be minor. Wastes and
debris generated at the site will be collected time to time and disposed suitability to avoid
such contamination. The debris generated during construction will be used for land filling at
the site only.
During the construction phase, loose soil may be washed out from the site with runoff during
rainfall and may increase the turbidity of runoff. However, this impact may last as first rain is
over and loose soil will be stabilized after first rainfall. To avoid such impact, excavation of
foundations will be carried out during dry season. Therefore, the impact on soil during
construction phase will be marginal and reversible in nature.
During construction phase of proposed HAC plant, 20-25 kg/day solid waste may be
generated from construction workers. The type of wastes expected to be generated will be
segregated into the following possible categories:
Waste from food, etc.,
Paper, packing, plastic bottles and polythene waste, etc.,
This will be segregated and disposed off by substantial disposal techniques Therefore, soil
at the plant site and area will not be affected by the solid waste generated at the project site
during construction phase. Hence, no impact on soil is anticipated during construction
phase.
There will be a small amount of waste, such as, spillage of oil, grease, etc. from construction
of proposed HAC plant that may contaminate soils at the site. However, extent of
contamination will not be significant. Hence, no significant impact is anticipated on soil
during construction phase of the proposed HAC plant.
Mitigation Measures
Prior to leveling and excavation, top soil will be segregated and stockpiled. Top soil will
be used during the greenbelt development and landscaping at the plant site.
Wastes and debris generated at the site will be collected time to time and disposed
suitably to avoid such contamination. The debris generated during construction will be
used for land filling at the site only.
Excavation of foundations will be carried out during dry season.

183 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
B. Operation Phase
During operation phase of proposed HAC plant, hazardous wastes generated process can
contaminate soil of site and nearby area, if not disposed properly,
About 80 liters of used oil will be generated per year from DG set during maintenance. It can
contaminate soil of site, if not disposed properly.
Domestic waste generated by proposed plant personnel, canteen, etc, may contaminate soil
of site and nearby area due to improper disposal. Hence, domestic waste generated at the
site will be collected and disposed as per Municipal Waste (Handling & Management) Rules
2000.
About 50 kg per month sludge will be generated from effluent treatment plant (ETP), which is
categorized as hazardous waste. Improper disposal of ETP waste may contaminate soil of
the site and near by area. The sludge generated from ETP will be collected in impervious pit
and sent to West Bengal Waste Management Group, Haldia for treatment and disposal in
environmental sound manner.
Mitigation Measures
Temporary storage of hazardous wastes in impervious pit located in covered and

isolated place
Used oil generated from DG set will be collected and given to MOEF&CC/WBPCB
approved used oil recyclers for recycling.
Domestic waste generated by plant personnel, canteen, etc, will be collected and
disposed as per Municipal Waste (Handling & Management) Rules 2000.
Sludge generated from ETP should be collected in impervious pit and sent to West
Bengal Waste Management Group, Haldia for treatment and disposal in environmental
sound manner.
In view of implementation of mitigation measures, possible soil contamination will be

insignificant. Hence no significant impact is anticipated on the soil of the plant site and
study area during operation phase of the proposed HAC plant.
Hence, the impact on the soil quality of the study area is as per given below.
184 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Impact Rating
Duration of impact
Impacted Area
Severity of impact
Soil Quality
Long term
Localized
Low
Slight
4.2.3 W A T E R R E S O U R C E S
4.2.3.1
SURFACE WATER RESOURCE
The proposed plant will be located on 1.34 Acres of land. During construction phase, proper
drainage will be provided for runoff movement during rains, hence, no changes in the natural
drainage pattern of the site and area is envisaged, the impact of construction of proposed
plant on surface water resources is likely to be insignificant.
B. Operation Phase
The proposed plant operation will not have any adverse impact on surface water resources
as water withdrawal of fresh water and disposal of treated waste water in surface water body
is not proposed.
Hence, the impact on the surface water resources of the study area is as per given below.
Impact Rating
Duration of impact
Impacted Area
Severity of impact
4.2.3.2
Surface Water Resources

Long term
Localized
Low
Slight
GROUND WATER RESOURCES
The construction of the proposed plant will have no significant impact on the ground water
resources of the study area because water requirement during construction phase will be
relatively small and will be met through groundwater borewell to be drilled at site. Necessary
permission for drilling borewell has already been obtained as given in Figure 4.1.
185 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 4.1: P ERMISSION FOR G ROUND W ATER W ITHDRAWAL FOR HAC P LANT
186 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Mitigation Measures
Minimize use of fresh water.
Provision of rainwater harvesting
B. Operation Phase
About 13 KLD water will be required for plant operation, which will be met through ground
water resource. Necessary permission for drilling bore well has already been obtained.
Water from boiler blow down will be completely utilized for green belt development within the
plant premises. The unit will be zero effluent discharge unit.
Mitigation Measures
Distillate from process will be re-used for vessel washing.
Effluent generated from washing and cooling tower blow down will be treated in
treatment plant and to be evaporated in evaporator. Sludge generated from evaporator
will be disposed to West Bengal Waste Management Group, Haldia
Provision of rainwater harvesting from non process area.
Hence, the impact on the ground water resources of the study area is as per given below.
Impact Rating
Duration of impact
Impacted Area
Severity of impact
Ground Water Resources

Long term
Localized
Low
Slight
4.2.4 W A T E R Q U AL I T Y
The construction of proposed plant will result in increase in soil erosion during rain from the
site as all vegetation will be cleared at the time of construction. The runoff from the site
during rainfall may cause some increase in the quantity of suspended solids and turbidity of
run off water. However, this impact will be of temporary in nature and may last after the
excavated soil and construction debris are disposed off properly.
Mitigation Measures
Excavation will be carried during dry season.
187 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
B. Operation Phase
About 2.5 KLD effluent will be generated from the process vessel washing and cooling blow
down. It may contaminate surface and ground water resources on disposal without proper
treatment.
Mitigation Measures
The effluent generated at the plant will be collected and treated in well designed ETP.
Treated waste water will be evaporated in evaporator. Sludge generated from evaporator
and settler will be disposed to West Bengal Waste Management Group, Haldia
Hazardous waste generated from sludge from ETP will also have potential source of
surface and ground water contamination in the event of improper disposal.
Sewage generated by plant personnel will treated in septic tank followed by soak pit.
Therefore, possible water quality deterioration and contamination will be insignificant. Hence,
no significant impact is anticipated on the water quality during operation phase of proposed
plant.
Hence, the impact on the ground water quality of the study area is as per given below.
Impact Rating
Duration of impact
Impacted Area
Severity of impact
Water Quality
Long term
Localized
Low
Slight
4.2.5 C L I M AT O L O G Y A N D M E T E O R O L O G Y
The construction and operation of the proposed plant will have no impact on climatology and
meteorology of the study area.
4.2.6 A I R E N V I R O N M E N T
The potential sources of air emissions during construction phase of the proposed plant will
be as follows:
Dust from earth works (during site preparation);
Emissions from power generator at the site;
Emissions from the operation of construction equipment and machines;

188 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Fugitive emissions from vehicles running to site;
Fugitive emissions during the unloading of cement bags;
Fugitive emissions during mixing of cement with other building materials;
Air emissions other than dust arise from combustion of hydrocarbons. The pollutants
of concerns are NOx, SO2, CO, particulate, and un-burnt hydrocarbons.
Impact of construction activity on air quality is a cause for concern mainly in the dry months
due to settling of dust particles. The main sources of dust emissions during the construction
period will be the movement of equipment at site and dust emitted during the levelling,
grading, earthworks, foundation works and other construction related activities. The dust
emitted during the above mentioned activities will depend upon the type of soil being
excavated and the moisture content. The impact is likely to be for short duration and
confined locally to the construction site itself. The composition of dust in this kind of
operation is however mostly coarse particles, inorganic and non-toxic in nature and these
are not expected to travel long distance before settling.
Exhaust emissions from vehicles and equipment deployed during the construction phase will
also result in marginal increase in the levels of SO2, NOx, SPM, CO and un-burnt
hydrocarbons. The impact will, however, be reversible, marginal, and temporary in nature.
The impact of construction activities would be temporary and restricted to the construction
phase. The impact will be confined within the project boundary and is expected to be
negligible outside the proposed plant boundaries. Proper upkeep and maintenance of
vehicles, sprinkling of water at construction site, providing sufficient vegetation etc. are some
of the proposed measures that would greatly reduce the impact on the air quality during the
construction phase of the plant site.
During the excavation, unloading of cement bags and mixing of cement with other building
materials, fugitive dust emissions may be emitted at the construction site. It may be noted
that these emissions would be in the form of coarse particulate matter and will be settled
down ultimately in the closed vicinity of construction site.
Emissions from the DG set may cause localised impact on ambient air quality for short
duration. DG set will be operated only in case of grid power failure. Adequate height of
stacks will be provided to the DG set as per guidelines of CPCB to facilitate the dispersion of
flue gases in the atmosphere.
189 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
B. Operation Phase
From the proposed plant, the following will be source of particulate and gaseous emissions:
LDO fired boiler continuous source of particulate and gaseous emissions.
140 kVA Capacity DG set Intermittent sources particulate and gaseous emissions
Very small quantity of fugitive emissions from process vessels, material handling,
charging, etc.
The emissions from LDO fired boiler and DG set stacks have been considered as point
source from the proposed plant. Each point source is identified based on the location of the
each stack, emissions strength and flue gas properties. In LDO fired boiler and DG set
pollution control will be achieved through stack of appropriate height as per CPCB/WBPCB
guidelines. DG set will be operated in the event of grid power failure.
The impact on ambient air quality due to stack emissions from LDO fired boiler and DG set is
evaluated by use of mathematical model. When air pollutants are emitted into the
atmosphere, they are immediately diffused into surrounding atmosphere, transported and
diluted due to winds. The air pollution dispersion models are designed to simulate these
processes mathematically and to relate emissions of primary pollutants to the resulting
downwind air quality. The inputs include emission load, stack parameters, micrometeorology and surrounding topographic details to predict the impacts of pollutants on the
ambient air quality and discrete receptors in the area.
4.2.6.1
A I R P O L L U T A N T S D I S P E R S I O N M O D E L I N G F O R P R E D I C T I O N O F I M P AC T S
ON
AM B I E N T AI R Q U A L I T Y
The objective of dispersion modeling is to predict the ground level concentration during the
operation of proposed resin plant and its impact on ambient air quality of the area. The
ground level concentrations of pollutants have been computed using computer simulation
model BREEZE AIR SUITE based on Industrial Source Complex Short Term (ISCST-3) of
United State Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) and considering guidelines
stipulated by CPCB for air pollution dispersion modeling.
The key emissions from the proposed plant will be Particulate Matter (PM), Sulphur Dioxide
(SO2) and Nitrogen Oxide (NOx).
190 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Mathematical Model Used For Computation

Prediction of GLC values are made by using Industrial Source Complex Short Term Model
Version - 3 (ISCST-3) software approved by U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(USEPA). This model uses a steady state, sector-averaged Gaussian plume equation for
application in complex terrain (i.e. terrain stack or release height) and is run using stability
classes developed by Pasquill and Gifford.
The following are the assumptions made while using the model:
The plume rise is estimated by Briggs formulae, but the final rise is always limited to that
of the mixing layer;
Stack tip down-wash is not considered;
Buoyancy Induced Dispersion is used to describe the increase in plume dispersion

during the ascension phase;
Calms processing routine is used by default;
Complex terrain is used for computations;
It is assumed that the pollutants do not undergo any physico-chemical transformation

and that there is no pollutant removal by dry deposition;
Washout by rain is not considered;
Cartesian co-ordinate system has been used for computations;
No dry and wet depletion of pollutants;
Receptors are on flat terrain with no flag pole.
Source Characteristics
The emissions sources at the proposed plant are as given in Table 4.4:
T ABLE 4.4: E MISSIONS S OURCES AT P ROPOSED P LANT
Sl.
No
1
Stack
attached
to
Boiler
(Baby)
1.5 MT
Stand-by
DG Set
(140 KVA)
Height & Dia. Fuel

of the stack
In meter
30
LDO: 65
Lts/Day
10
Expected
Pollutant
Particulate
matter (PM),
SO2, NOx
HSD: 23 PM,
SO2,
Lts/Hr
NOx
APC Measures
Adequate stack height provided

to vent out flue gas emissions to
provide natural dispersion.
Adequate Stack height provided
to control and disperses the air
pollutant within the satisfactory
levels.
191 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Emission Sources Characteristics

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) and Particulate Matter (PM) are the major
pollutants likely to be emitted in stack gases from the baby boiler and DG set. Discharge of
flue gases from stacks to be provided as per CPCB guidelines will result in natural
dispersion and greatly reduce the impact of flue gas emissions at ground level.
Stack emissions data have been estimated for prediction of short-term incremental GLC
values of Particulate Matter (PM), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) and Nitrogen Oxide (NOx) using
the meteorological data collected at the site during the study period. The details of estimated
emissions loads given in Table 4.5:
T ABLE 4.5: E MISSIONS D ETAILS FOR P ROPOSED HAC P LANT
Sl.No. Parameters
Stack Details
Baby Boiler Stack
DG Set
1.
Stack Height (m)
30
10
2.
Number of Flue Stacks
3.
Material of Construction
Steel
Steel
4.
Top Diameter of Flue, m
0.4
0.15
5.
Flue Gas Velocity. m/s
1.5
3.6
493
518
(PM)
0.00307
0.0000154
(SO2)
0.2763
0.01357
(NOx)
0.0813
0.0288
6.
Flue Gas Temperature K
7.
Particulate
Matter
Emission Rate, g/s

8.
Sulphur
dioxide
Emission Rate, g/s

9.
Oxides
of
Nitrogen
Emission Rate, g/s

Atmospheric Stability
The persistence of atmospheric stability class has been estimated using hourly monitored
wind velocity data along with compiled data for sunrise, sunset, solar isolation for day-time
and cloud cover for night-time for the site.
Mixing Height
The knowledge of the site specific mixing height (convective stable boundary layer and
inversion height or nocturnal boundary layer) is crucial in a realistic adoption of appropriate
plume rise and vertical dispersion parameters. In the absence of site specific mixing heights,
192 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Hourly Mixing Height and Assimilative Capacity of Atmosphere in India published by

Environmental Monitoring and Research Centre, India Meteorological Department, New
Delhi, 2008, has been referred for hourly mixing heights.
Maximum 24-Hourly and Seasonal Incremental GLC Isopleths
Using mathematical model as described above, the maximum 24-hourly and seasonal
incremental ground level concentration (GLCs) values calculated at different grid points
using 24-hourly and seasonal averaging period are used for obtaining the maximum 24hourly and seasonal incremental ground level concentrations (GLCs) isopleths for the study
period and considering that X, Y coordinates of the stack centre (0.0).
The following conclusions can be made from the air pollution dispersion modeling:
1. GLCs Value for Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)
The highest 24-hourly incremental GLC values for Sulphur Dioxide due to stack emissions
from Boiler and DG set stacks are given in Table 4.6 along with co-ordinates of their
location. Isopleth of maximum 24-hourly incremental GLCs values of Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)
are given in Figure 4.2.
Highest 24 hourly GLC value 7.73833 g/m3 for Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) is obtained at (+) 000
m, (-) 500 m at distance of 0.500 km and 180o angle from North (clockwise).
24 Hourly GLC values for SO2 at discrete locations and resultant values after summing GLC
with background monitored values are shown in Table 4.7.
T ABLE 4.6: H IGHEST 24- H OURLY AND S EASONAL I NCREMENTAL GLC V ALUES FOR
S ULPHUR D I - OXIDE (SO 2 ) AND G RID P OINT L OCATIONS
Pollutant Concentration & Location
Highest GLCs for SO2
Location of Highest GLCs
Grid Point (m)
Distance (km)
Angle from North (Clockwise)
24 Hourly GLCs
7.73833 g/m3
(+) 000,
(-) 500
0.500
180
193 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 4.7: 24 H OURLY GLC S V ALUES FOR SO 2 AT D ISCRETE L OCATIONS

Code
Location
24
Hourly Mean
3
GLCs (g/m )
Background Resultant
Values Value (g/m3)
Monitored
(g/m3)
AAQ1
Dangadihila
1.27
12.8
14.07
AAQ2
Ishwaripur
2.74
13.8
16.54
AAQ3
Balagarh
1.47
10.7
12.17
AAQ4
Project Site
12.3
12.3
AAQ5
Chhota Kanthalia
0.64
11.9
12.54
AAQ6
Surjyapur
0.80
11.5
12.3
2. GLCs Value for Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)

The highest 24-hourly incremental GLCs values for Oxides of Nitrogen due to stack
emissions are given in Table 4.8 along with co-ordinates of their location. Isopleth of
maximum 24-hourly incremental GLCs values of Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) are given in
Figure 4.3.
Highest 24 hourly GLCs value 3.932 g/m3 for NOx is obtained at (+) 000 m, (-) 500 m at
distance of 0.5 km and 180 angle from North (clockwise). 24 Hourly GLCs values for NOx at
discrete locations and resultant values after summing GLC with background monitored
values are shown in Table 4.9.
T ABLE 4.8: H IGHEST 24- H OURLY I NCREMENTAL GLC V ALUES FOR NO X AND G RID
P OINT L OCATION
Maximum GLCs for NOx
Location of Highest GLCs
Grid Point (m)
Distance (km)
24 Hourly GLCs
3.932 g/m3
(+) 000,
(-) 500
0.500
180
194 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 4.9: 24 H OURLY GLC S V ALUES FOR NO X AT D ISCRETE L OCATIONS

Code
Location
24
Hourly
3
GLCs (g/m )
Max Background Resultant Value

Monitored Values
(g/m3)
(g/m3)
AAQ1
Dangadihila
0.55
20.1
20.65
AAQ2
Ishwaripur
1.63
17.8
19.43
AAQ3
Balagarh
0.61
18.8
19.41
AAQ4
Project Site
0.00
18.3
18.3
AAQ5
Chhota Kanthalia
0.25
17.8
18.05
AAQ6
Surjyapur
0.32
19.1
19.42
3. GLCs Value for Particulate Matter (PM)

The highest 24-hourly and seasonal incremental GLCs values for Particulate Matter due to
stack emissions are given in Table 4.10 along with co-ordinates of their location. Isopleth of
maximum 24-hourly incremental GLCs values of Particulate Matter (PM) are given in Figure
4.3.
Highest 24 hourly GLCs value 0.08 g/m3 for Particulate Matter is obtained at (+) 000 m, (-)
500 m at distance of 0.5 km and 180 angle from North (clockwise). 24 Hourly GLCs values
for particulate matters at discrete locations and resultant values after summing GLC with
background monitored values are shown in Table 4.10.
T ABLE 4.10: H IGHEST 24- H OURLY I NCREMENTAL GLC V ALUES FOR PM10 AND G RID
P OINT L OCATION
GLCs for Particulate Matter
Location of Highest GLC
Grid Point (m)
Distance (km)
24 Hourly GLCs
0.07695 g/m3
(+) 000,
(-) 500
0.500
180
195 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 4.11: 24 H OURLY GLC S V ALUES FOR P ARTICULATE M ATTER AT D ISCRETE

L OCATIONS
Code
Location
24
Hourly
GLCs (g/m3)
Mean Background Resultant Value

Monitored Values (g/m3)
(g/m3)
86.5
86.513
AAQ1
Dangadihila
0.013
AAQ2
Ishwaripur
0.026
87.9
87.926
AAQ3
Balagarh
0.015
86.7
86.715
AAQ4
Project Site
73.2
73.2
AAQ5
Chhota Kanthalia
0.006
82.9
82.906
AAQ6
Surjyapur
0.008
79.9
79.908
F IGURE 4.2: I SOPLETHS FOR 24 HOURLY GLC S VALUES FOR SO 2
196 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 4.3: I SOPLETHS FOR 24 HOURLY GLC S VALUES FOR NO 2
197 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 4.4: I SOPLETHS FOR GLC FOR PM

4.2.6.2
I M P A C T O F T H E T R A N S P O R T O F T H E R AW M A T E R I AL S A N D E N D
PRODUCTS ON THE SURROUNDING ENVIRONMENT
During operation phase, on an average 2 to 3 trucks will approached and dispatched from
the proposed plant transporting of the raw materials and end products. The emissions from 2
to 3 trucks every day will be very small and mingle in the ambient air within 50 m from the
road. Therefore, no significant impact is anticipated on the surrounding environment.
Mitigation Measures
The following measures are proposed to mitigate negative impact on air quality due to
operation phase of the proposed plant on the surrounding air environment.
198 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Height of stacks of DG set and boiler will be as per statutory requirement. All the
stacks shall have stack monitoring facility consisting of sampling port-hole, platform
and access ladder.
Transport vehicles shall be properly maintained to reduce air emissions.
Trucks transporting of the raw materials and end products to proposed plant will be
have pollution under control certificate (PUC).
Change of raw materials will be carried in such manner fugitive emissions area
lesser.
Regular maintenance of machinery in order to control emissions.
A good housekeeping and proper maintenance shall be practiced in the industry.
Hence, the impact on the air quality of the study area is as per given below.
Impact Rating
Duration of impact
Impacted Area
Severity of impact
Air Quality
Minor and Adverse
Long term
Localized
Medium
Slight
4.2.7 I M P A C T O N N O I S E E N V I R O N M E N T
The assessment of the impacts of noise on the surrounding community depends upon:
Characteristics of noise source (instantaneous, intermittent, or continuous in nature);
Time of day at which noise occurs; and
Location of noise source with respect to noise sensitive receptor.
During the construction phase of the proposed plant, noise will be generated from various
sources, such as, due to use of machinery and vehicles for transporting construction
materials.
Some major sources of noise generation at the plant site are listed here:
Generation of noise during movement of vehicles carrying materials, loading &

unloading activities,
Generation of noise from excavation machines, concrete mixer and other

construction machines,
Generation of noise during the operation of DG set,
Generation of noise during concreting, hammering, etc,
Noise from the mechanical operations, like, hammering fitting, etc, at site.
199 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
All the above mentioned sources at the proposed plant will be intermittent and would be
experienced occasionally. It may also be noted that, most of the construction activities will be
carried out only during the daytime.
The expected noise levels from these activities are given here under in Table 4.12:
T ABLE 4.12: T YPICAL N OISE L EVELS OF C ONSTRUCTION E QUIPMENT
Particulars
Noise Levels dB(A)

Earth Movers
Front End Loaders
72-84
Tractors
76-96
Scrapers, Graders
80-93
Pavers
86-88
Trucks
82-94
Material Handlers
Concrete mixers
75-88
Concrete pumps
81-88
Stationary Equipment
Pumps
69-71
Generators
71-82
4.2.7.1
RESULTANT NOISE LEVEL
The combined effect of above sources can be determined as per the following equation:
Lp (total) = 10 log(10(Lp1/10) + 10(Lp2/10) + 10(Lp3/10) + .)
Where: Lp1, Lp2 and Lp3 are noise pressure level at a point due to different sources in dB
(A).
For an approximate estimation of dispersion of noise in the ambient air from the source
point, a standard mathematical model for sound wave propagation is used. The sound
pressure level generated by noise sources decreases with increasing distance from the
source due to wave divergence. An additional decrease in sound pressure level from the
source is expected due to atmospheric effect or its interaction with objects in the
transmission path. The noise level generated from a source would decrease with increase in
distance from the source because of the wave divergence.
200 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
For hemispherical sound wave propagation through homogenous loss of free medium, noise
levels at various locations can be calculated due to different sources using model based on
the first principles as per the following equation:
Lp2 = Lp1 20 log(r2)
(1)
Where: Lp2 and Lp1 - Sound Pressure Level (SPLs) at points located at source and at
distances of r2 from the source respectively in dB (A).
The resultant maximum noise level for the above sources as calculated using combined
effect equation is 85 dB(A). Assuming no environmental attenuation factors, noise modelling
has been done, which shows noise level will mingle with the baseline noise level within short
distance. Noise modelling results for construction phase have been given in Table 4.13 and
shown in Figure 4.5:
T ABLE 4.13: N OISE M ODELING R ESULTS
Area
Permissible Limits (Day Time)
Distance from source
Silence Zone
50 dB (A)
56.2 m
Residential
55 dB (A)
31.6 m
Commercial
65 dB (A)
10.0 m
Industrial
75 dB (A)
3.2 m
F IGURE 4.5: ATTENUATION OF N OISE FROM S OURCE
201 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The noise produced during construction phase will have temporary impacts on the existing
ambient noise levels at the project site but restricted to small distance (maximum upto 60 m)
and only during daytime and will not affect even the nearest human habitation (around 200
m from the main plant). Therefore, the impact of noise levels on surrounding area will be
insignificant during the construction phase.
B. Operation phase
During operation of the proposed plant, LDO fired boiler and DG sets may generate some
noise. Suitable noise control system will be provided to ensure that noise at the ventilation
openings does not exceed 90 dB (A) at 1 m distance in conformity with ISO: 3746. The only
continuous source of noise during plant operation will be boiler as DG set will operate only
during grid power failure. Further, DG set will be acoustically treated for noise control as per
CPCB guidelines. Therefore, free field noise level due to all sources at the plant boundary,
closest boundary is unlikely to exceed 55 dB (A) and the same will decrease to nearly 50 dB
(A) at a distance of 200 m, the distance of nearest habited area from the plant boundary.
The operators, workers and other personnel within the plant, however, have to be provided
with protective measures such as earplugs at the noise generating area. The noise
protective enclosures shall be provided at the noise generating area. The permissible noise
exposure for the workers working at the noise sources is listed in the following Table 4.14.
Hence measures shall be taken to avoid such exposures.
T ABLE 4.14: P ERMISSIBLE N OISE E XPOSURES FOR I NDUSTRIAL W ORKERS
Exposure Time (in hr/day)
8
4
2
1
1/8
1/16
1/32
Limit in dB (A)
90
93
96
99
102
105
108
111
114
Therefore, no significant adverse impact is anticipated due to proposed plant operation on

noise levels of area.
Mitigation Measures
Mitigation measures to control noise levels during operation phase are as given below:
DG set will be fitted with acoustic enclose to control the noise.

202 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Ear muff and plugs to workers working relatively high noise areas.
Green belt development is planned for the attenuation of noise pollution and to
maintain ambient nise quality within the statutory limit.
The operation of high noise generating equipment shall be restricted during the night
time.
All the equipment in the synthetic resin manufacturing unit will be designed/ operated
in such a way that the noise level shall not exceed 85 dBA as per the requirement of
OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration).
Proper maintenance of pump, machinery, blower etc to control noise levels.
Hence, the impact on the noise levels is as per given below.

Impact Rating
Duration of impact
Impacted Area
Severity of impact
Noise Levels
Negligble and Adverse
Long term
Localized
Low
Slight
4.2.8 I M P A C T O N L A N D E N V I R O N M E N T & A E S T H E T I C S
The proposed plant construction will have no significant impact on land use of the study
area, since 1.34 Acres of land has been required for the proposed plant, which has been
purchased as industrial plot.
B. Operation Phase
The operation of the proposed plant will also have no impact on the land use pattern, as no
appreciable change in land use pattern of the study area is anticipated.
Hence, the impact on Land Environment and Aesthetics is as per given below.
Impact Rating
Duration of impact
Impacted Area
Severity of impact
Noise Levels
Long term
Localized
Low
Slight
203 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
4.2.9 I M P A C T S D U E T O W A S T E D I S P O S A L
During the construction phase, the typical solid waste will be generated from the project
includes waste from canteen, labour establishment and administrative buildings land clearing
activities and construction waste. Impact from construction waste may arise owing to storage
on site, transportation, workshops, etc. Proposed mitigation plan suggests maximum
reuse/recycle of construction waste on site or removal of waste at the site and proper
disposal, which would reduce the impact significantly.
B. Operation Phase
During operation solid waste will be generated from the plant. Safe and scientific
arrangement for handling, storage and disposal of all solid wastes will be ensured for as glue
sludge, cotton waste, polybags, bottom ash, process trimmings etc. The details of waste
generation from the plant are given in Table 4.15:
T ABLE 4.15: S OLID & H AZARDOUS W ASTE G ENERATION AND M ANAGEMENT
Sl.
No
Description Category
Source
Used Oil/
Spent oil
5.1
Hazardous Waste
DG sets/
1.5 Litre/
Maintenance
Month
Discarded
Plastic Bags
ETP sludge
33.1
Cotton
Waste
Discarded
Drums/
Container
5.2
3
4
5
34.3
33.3
Hence, no negative impact
Quantity
Mode of Disposal

West
Bengal
Waste
Stores
50 Kg/ Month Sent to West Bengal Waste
ETP
20 Kg/ Month Sent to West Bengal Waste
Maintenance 20 Kg/ Month Sent to West Bengal Waste
Stores
300
Collection,
storage
and
Nos./Year
decontamination or Reuse
vendor
on land and soil quality of the solid & hazardous waste on the
project site are expected due to the proposed project activities.

4.2.10
IMPACT ON FLORA AND FAUNA
The potential primary and secondary impacts from the proposed plant on the biological
environment have been identified and the significant ecological impacts are evaluated based
on:
Habitat Quality
204 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Species affected
Size/abundance of habits/organisms affected
Duration of Impacts
Magnitude of environmental changes
There is no reserved forest, wildlife sanctuary or any other sensitive area located in within 10
km distance from the plant site. The project will not have adverse impacts on the existing
flora and fauna.
The proposed plant site is free from trees and shrubs. The proposed plant site will be
cleared from all kind of vegetation in the grasses and ground flora. However, no tree needs
to be cut for proposed plant construction. Therefore, some loss of vegetation in the form of
ground flora is anticipated during construction phase.
The green belt plantation at the site will be started during construction phase; this will be
positive and beneficial impact of project in terms of flora at the site.
B. Operation Phase
The proposed plant will be very small scale proposed synthetic resin manufacturing unit and
therefore, there will be no adverse impact on the terrestrial ecology. However greenbelt/
plantations will be developed at the periphery of the factory premises, which will have
positive impacts on flora and fauna of the area.
The green belt will provide shelter to the faunal species and there for positive impact
on the fauna due is anticipated.
There are no significant impacts envisaged on the ecological environment of the

region as the area is almost covered with fallow land devoid of any considerable
ecological conditions.
Further there would not be any considerable sources (noise, gaseous pollutants,
effluent and hazardous waste) of impacts on ecology and thus, no significant impacts
on ecological conditions due to operational activities are envisaged.
The greenbelt development will significantly improve the ecological conditions of the
area considering the baseline ecological status of the immediate surrounding area.
Thus the overall impacts, considering the normal hazard free operation, appreciable
beneficial impacts are anticipated on the ecological conditions of the region.
Hence, the impact on the air quality of the flora and fauna levels is as per given below.
205 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Impact Rating
Duration of impact
Impacted Area
Severity of impact
4.2.11
Noise Levels
Minor and Positive
Long term
Localized
Low
Slight
O C C U P AT I O N AL H E A L T H & S A F E T Y
During construction and operation phases of proposed HAC plant, occupational health and
safety of workers may be impacted by dust, high noise levels and chemical exposures.
During construction phase occupational health and safety may be affected by the following
reasons:
Exposure to dust during excavation
Hazardous fumes during arc welding
Electrical hazards by loose electrical wiring
Exposure to high noise levels
Working at height falling danger
Injuries to the workers during construction operation
To enhance the occupational health and safety during contraction phase, the following
measures will be taken:
Water sprinkling to avoid dust emission
Use of suitable PPEs like mask during arc welding operation
Electrical safety to be maintained as per regulations
Use of ear muff and plug in high noise area
Use of safety belt while working at height
Induction training to worker to enhance safety of worker
First aid facilities will be provided.
B. Operation Phase
During operation phase workers may be directly or indirectly exposed by chemical like
phenol, formaldehyde, sodium hydroxide, melamine during charging, process or material
handling. Hazardous chemical have Threshold Limit Value (TLV) like phenol: 5 ppm,
formaldehyde: 0.3 ppm, sodium hydroxide: 2 mg/m3. The exposure of hazardous chemicals
and work floor hazards may affect occupational health and safety of the workers. During the
206 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
operation phase of necessary mitigation measures and health checkup will be carried to
ensure to enhance occupational health and safety of plant personnel.
Process will be carried out in isolated area or closed system.
Dilution ventilation/local exhaust ventilation system will be provided.
Chemical handled by competent person
MSDS of hazardous substance will be maintained by company.
Quantity of substance will be kept to absolute minimize
Flame proof electric fitting will be be provided.
Safety devices like temp. Control and pressure control will be provided to vessel
Labeling and sign board will be provided.
Fire fighting, sprinkling system and emergency exit will be provided.
PPE will be used during handling of chemicals.
Routine health check-up will be carried out for workers engaged in hazardous
operation.
Hence, the impact on the occupational health and safety is as per given below.
Impact Rating
Duration of impact
Impacted Area
Severity of impact
4.2.12
Noise Levels
Long term
Localized
Low
Slight
SOCIO ECONOMIC IMPACTS
Invariably, industrial projects lead to a change in quality of life in the area and respective
region. The requirements of workforce for various activities also result in demand for
housing, communication facilities, education, health and recreational facilities thus
contributing to changes in the quality of life in the vicinity of a proposed site also. Some of
these impacts would be more effective in the immediate vicinity with short term beneficial
effects, whereas the others would be of higher order or of long term in nature.
It is necessary to identify the extent of these impacts for further planning of control measures
leading to mitigation of the adverse impacts. The impacts due to proposed project on
parameters of human interest (socio-economic) have been identified and are as follows:
207 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The direct beneficial impacts are involved due to the engagement of workers in construction
activities.
The indirect impact beneficial to the community is the provision of skilled/unskilled workforce
in associated activities. Local contractor will be employed for construction. Hence, no other
issues like social conflict etc. envisaged, economic benefits to the local contractors. As no
habitation on land and hence, no displacement is required.
The relatively short-lived economic impacts of the construction phase are likely to be
experienced in local area for the duration of construction phase as workers make everyday
purchases from local traders in nearby areas. This is likely to give a short-lived stimulus to
the traders that will disappear as soon as the construction is complete. Noticeable, flow-on
economic impacts will be experienced in other sectors of economy as a result of purchase of
construction materials and the payment of wages and salaries to the personnel engaged in
the plant activities.
B. Operation phase
The operation of plant will create direct and indirect employment opportunities during plant
operation, transportation of raw materials and transportation products as well as secondary
services. Therefore, operation of the plant would have positive impact on the status of job
opportunities in the study area.
Impact on Civic Amenities: During the construction period there will be short-term socioeconomic impacts in the study area that may include increase in floating population (contract
labourers). As number workers will be about 30 therefore, only insignificant strain is
anticipated on the civic amenities like drinking water, sanitation, road transport and other
facilities.
Impact on Historical, Archeological and Architectural Sites: There are no historical or
archeological monuments within the study area and hence no negative impact in this regard
is anticipated.
Anticipated impacts on socio-economic variables of the area during construction and
operation phases are given in Table 4.16.
208 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 4.16: I MPACTS ON S OCIO -E CONOMIC V ARIABLES

Construction phase
Operational Phase
Parameters
Population
Change
Population
in No change
No change
Inflow/ outflow Majority of unskilled workers will be Minor outflow

of
temporary from the surrounding localities
workers
workers
of
temporary
Community and Institutional Structures

Employment/
income
Characteristics
Employment to construction labour and Employment

to
specialists,
support staff
support staff within the facility
Individual and Family Changes
Displacement
No relocation /displacement
and relocation
concerns
No relocation/ displacement
Residential
stability
No change
No change
Attitudes
The proposed plant would generate
Towards Policy/ goodwill
if
creates
employment
Project
opportunities and if community can be
assured that the facility shall not create
health problems for the community.
The proposed plant would

generate goodwill if creates
employment opportunities and if
community can be assured that
the facility shall not create health
problems for the community.
Social
Being
The proposed plant shall provide

employment opportunities to
people at various levels from the
nearby villages only.
Well The proposed plant shall provide

employment opportunities to people at
various levels hence shall empower
them to access facilities for their wellbeing.
Community Resources
Change
in Short term impact on civic amenities No change
Community
due to influx of workers
during
Infrastructure
construction phase
Landuse
No noticeable change in the vicinity
Patterns of the
area
No change
Conclusion of Social Impacts

Analysis of various social impacts both adverse and beneficial in the present study reveals
that the implementation of the project will considerably improve the socio-economic
209 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
conditions of the people. On the basis of present social study the following conclusions may
be drawn.
The project has strong positive employment and income effects, both direct as well
as indirect.
The project is going to have positive impact on consumption behavior by way of

raising average consumption and income through multiplier effect.
People perceive that the project will bring job opportunities for the people along with
the development of social infrastructure.
The project is likely to bring about positive changes in life style and quality of life for
people located in that area.
There will be overall socio-economic development of the area.
Enterprise Social Commitment

Enterprise social commitment (ESC) activities to be carried out by proponent in the area,
which will have beneficial impact on local people and area.
Hence, the impact on the socio-economic environment and emplyement is as per given
below.
Impact Rating
Duration of impact
Impacted Area
Severity of impact
4.3
Noise Levels
Minor and Benificial
Long term
Localized
Mediuam
Low
IMPACT EVALUATION
The evaluation of the impacts of the proposed project activities on the environment, both in
terms of quality & quantity have been made. For quantification of impacts, matrix system as
modified to some extent has been used as per given below:
For quantifying impacts on the environment, the guidelines and standards prescribed by
national and international agencies are being considered. 1000 numbers are distributed as
per the weightage to each parameter considered based on its importance as per given below
in Table 4.17.
210 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 4.17: E VALUATION OF I MPACT P REDICTION

Parameters
Importance Value
Air Quality
200
Water Quality
100
Water Resources
100
Noise and Vibration
200
Soil & Solid Waste
200
Land Use Pattern
50
Forest & Vegetation and Wildlife
50
Socio economic
50
Employment
50
The severity has been divided in impact scores from 0-5 for calculating the severity of
impacts on the environmental parameters due to various project activities as given below in
Table 4.18.
T ABLE 4.18: I MPACT ASSESSMENT S CORE
Severity criteria
Impact score
No impact
Significant impact-slight and short term
Significant impact-slight and long term
Moderate impact- short term
Moderate impact- long term
Major Impact Permanent
The impact score can be negative or positive depending on whether the impact is adverse or
beneficial.
Based on the above importance values and impact scores, the impact value (impact score x
importance value) for each environmental parameters is calculated. The impact value for
individual parameter is added to arrive at the total impacts value. The criterion used to make
conclusive statement is based on the total impacts value without control measures is defined
as given below in Table 4.19.
211 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 4.19: I MPACT ASSESSMENT C RITERION

Total impact value
Upto (-)1000
(-) 1000 to (-) 2000
(-) 2000 to (-) 3000
(-) 3000 to (-) 4000

Above (-) 4000
Conclusions
No appreciable impact on environment
Appreciable but reversible impact.
Mitigation measures important.
Significant impact which is mostly irreversible. Mitigation
measures crucial.
Major impact which is mostly Irreversible. Selection of process
and raw material to be crucial.
Permanent irreversible impact, alternative sites to be considered.
The environmental impact matrix based on the above principles has been attempted for the
proposed project and are given in Table 4.12.
T ABLE 4.12: I MPACT E VALUATIONS P ROPOSED HAC P ROJECT
Environmental
parameters
Air Quality
Importance
value
200
Impact Score
Without EMP With EMP
-1
-1
Overall Value
Without EMP With EMP
-200
-200
Water quality
100
-3
-1
-300
-100
Water resources
100
-2
-1
-400
-100
Noise and vibration
200
-2
-1
-400
-200
Soil Quality & Solid
200
-2
-1
-400
-200
Land Use Pattern
50
-1
-1
-50
-50
Forest & Vegetation
50
-1
-50
50
Socio economic
50
50
50
Employment
50
50
50
-1200
-400
waste
and wild life
Total
Thus, it can be evaluated that there will be no appreciable impact on environment due to
proposed HAC project is envisaged with implementation of proper mitigation measures.
212 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
CHAPTER 5
ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES
213 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
C HAPTER 5: A NALYSIS OF A LTERNATIVES

5.1
INTRODUCTION
M/s Hindustan Adhesive & Chemicals (HAC) intends to set-up a synthetic resin
manufacturing facility at the identified land in industrial area near Ishwaripur village of 24
Pargana (North) district. The proposed project is envisaged to produce synthetic resins. PF
resin, MF resin, UF resin and Furan resin units will be set-up to meet the market demand.
The plant shall be based on advanced process technology. The plant will also be equipped
with the most efficient auxiliary sub systems, material handling facilities and pollution control
equipment.
Demand of synthetic resins in the country is increasing day by day. These resins are
industrial additives used as bonding materials in plywood industries, foundries, steel casting
and in specific engineering items. These resins are one of the most versatile chemicals and
are a basic building block to many important industries. The growth and demand of the
resins largely plays an important role for the growth and demand of synthetic resins. Since
last 2-3 years the plywood, laminate, fabric items, steel industries and engineering products
are growing at a remarkable space, which in turn increased the demand of various industrial
inputs.
The market demand of synthetic resins also filling the upward growth tendency living a
scope for further investments in these sectors, especially because the existing capacities
may not be sufficient to meet the new demands. Some of the existing manufacturer of
synthetic resins is in this line over a long period and their plant capacities are at optimum
level of utilization. Moreover the recently invented process technology for better quality
product also needs further investments and shall open new markets..
5.2
P R O J E C T AL T E R N A T I V E
5.2.1 W I T H O U T P R O J E C T A L T E R N AT I V E
Without project alternative scenarios, the scenario is considered to be less advantageous in
view of increasing demand of synthetic resin within the region and employment opportunity.
5.2.2 W I T H P R O J E C T A L T E R N A T I V E
Demand for synthetic resin is directly related to the growth of steel, foundry, casting,
laminate and plywood industries which supports this upward trend in demand of synthetic
resins. Due to restrictions on manufacturing of phenolic products (like PF resin) in European
countries and USA, additional capacities are not expected in these regions which provide
further boost to the Indian export market.
214 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Employment Generation (Direct and Indirect) Due to the Project

The total requirement of manpower for the plant is estimated at 39 numbers. The required
manpower is available locally. Specialized training required for plant operation and
maintenance is proposed to be given by HAC to selected candidates well in advance before
commissioning of the plant.
5.3
AN A L Y S I S O F AL T E R N A T I V E S
A number of factors related to economical, land availability, power availability and

environmental aspects are involved in site selection. The important factors which influence
the project site selection are given below:
Techno-economic considerations.
Available infrastructure.
Environmental considerations
5.3.1 T E C H N O -E C O N O M I C C O N S I D E R A T I O N S
The techno-economic considerations in the selection of proposed plant site are as detailed
below:
Availability of suitable land for proposed project.
Availability of facility for receipt of raw material.
Availability of adequate water for process.
No displacement of people.
Availability of construction water and power.
The proposed plant site of HAC has been selected, considering above alternatives.
5.3.2 A V A I L A B L E I N F R A S T R U C T U R E
Available infrastructure considerations in the selection of the plant site are as detailed below:
Availability of infrastructure facilities such as highway road access to the proposed

plant site for ease of transportation of workforce, consumables, plant equipments
and fuel etc.
Facility for interconnection with transmission and distribution systems also.
215 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Availability of facilities like medical, education, civic amenities and railway station
within a reasonable distance from the site.
5.3.3 E N V I R O N M E N T A L C O N S I D E R A T I O N
The environmental considerations critical to the selection of the proposed plant site are listed
below:
Avoiding the use of forest land.
No use of cultivable land.
Away from thickly polluted town.
No cutting of trees.
No displacement of people
Far away from critical polluted area
Far away from national park and wildlife sanctuaries
Far away from archeological sites
Far away from defense installations
As per above, site selection of the proposed plant is most suitable for set-up the plant.
5.4
AL TE RN ATIV ES F O R TECH N OLO GI ES
5.4.1 F U E L A L T E R N AT I V E S
LDO and HSD are required as fuel for boiler and DG set, respectively, which are widely
available from the local markets. Use of coal and wood has been avoided.
5.4.2 A L T E R N A T I V E S F O R R E S O U R C E O P T I M I Z A T I O N / R E C Y C L I N G A N D R E U S E
HAC plans to utilize the available land as per byelaws. The unit will undertake following
resource optimisation and cleaner production measures. The project activity has
considerable environment benefits in terms of:
Energy Conservation Reduced power requirement
Boiler blow down will be re-used for irrigation of greenery. Distillate from process will
be used for vessel washings.
Effluent treatment plant will be installed and treated water will be evaporated.
Domestic wastewater will be treated in septic tank followed by soak pit.

216 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Enhancement of local employment
Hazardous wastes will be sent to West Bengal Waste Management Group, Haldia
Zero Discharge Concepts
Effluent generated from process will be treated in ETP and evaporated. Sludge
generated will be hazardous wastes in nature and will be sent to West Bengal
Boiler blow down will be used for irrigation of greenery.
Distillate from process will be used for vessel washings.
Greenbelt development
HAC will develop green belt around the periphery of the plant and internal areas. About 0.45
acres of land will be used for green belt. Indigenous plant species will be planted for
development of green belt on the plant
217 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
CHAPTER 6
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
PROGRAMME
218 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
C HAPTER 6: E NVIRONMENTAL M ONITORING P ROGRAMME

6.1
INTRODUCTION
Environmental monitoring plan describes the processes and activities that need to take place
to characterize and monitor the quality of the environment during life cycle of the proposed
resin plant. Environmental monitoring strategies and programmes have reasons and
justifications which are often designed to establish the current status of an environment or to
establish trends in environmental parameters.
To ensure the effective implementation of the mitigation measures and environmental
management plan during construction and operation phases of the proposed fertilizer plant,
it is essential that an effective environmental monitoring plan be designed and followed.
Suitable mitigation measures will be taken in case monitored parameters are exceeding
limits.
6.2
OBJECTIVES OF THE ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
The objective of carrying out environmental monitoring for the proposed plant is given below:
To provide a database against which any short or long term environmental impacts of
proposed plant can be determined.
To provide an early indication that any of the environmental control measures fail to
achieve the acceptable standards.
To monitor the performance of the proposed plant and effectiveness of implemented

mitigation measures.
To verify the environmental impacts predicted during the EIA study.
To determine project compliance with regulatory requirement, standards and

government policies.
To provide data to enable an environmental audit to be performed.
To submit six monthly compliance report.
To ensure effective implementation of the mitigation measures and environmental

management plan during the construction and operation phases of the proposed synthetic
resin manufacturing plant of HAC, it is essential that an effective environmental monitoring
plan must be designed and followed. Suitable mitigation measures shall be taken in case of
219 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
monitored parameters is exceeding the permissible limits. Also a system of reporting of noncompliance / violation related to environmental norms have also prepared in consultation
with project management to address the issue as per the hierarchical management cell.
Environmental monitoring plan for various environmental parameters is given and discussed
below.
6.2.1 W A S T E M I N I M I Z AT I O N , R E C Y C L I N G - R E U S E - R E C O V E R
N AT U R A L R E S O U R C E C O N S E R V A T I O N
TECHNIQUES
AND
A. Waste Minimization: Process optimization by using latest and advance technology

equipments.
B. Recycle-Reuse-Recover: The wastewater collected from cleaning operation will be
recycled completely in the resin manufacturing process. Other hazardous waste like
spent oil, glue sludge etc. shall be given to WBPCB approved recyclers and processors.
C. Natural Resource conservation: Rain harvesting will be carried out to store rain water
for future use and thus minimizing the ground water consumption.
6.3
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
Environmental Management Cell (EMC) will be formulated by the management of HAC to

ensure proper implementation of EMP.
A. Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) Monitoring
Ambient air quality shall be monitored six monthly for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NO2, CO and
VOC. A MoEF&CC or NABL accredited laboratory may be engaged to monitor ambient air
quality at the plant and adjoining area.
B. Stack Emissions Monitoring
LDO fired boiler will be major source of SPM, SO2, NOx and CO. Six monthly stack
monitoring of SPM, SO2, NOx and CO concentrations in emissions of the stack will be
carried out by engaging NABL approved laboratory.
C. Water Quality Monitoring
The sampling and analysis of ground water quality will be carried out at the plant and two
adjoining village in accordance with the Indian Standard Drinking Water Specification - IS
10500:2012 by engaging NABL approved laboratory.
D. Waste Water Quality Monitoring
The important parameters like pH, TSS, BOD, COD, Oil & Grease, phenol will be monitored
monthly in treated waste water at Effluent Treatment Plant (ETP), while chlorides, sulphates,
220 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
phosphates, fluorides, iron and heavy metals (Hg, Cd, Cr, Pb, Zn, As, Cu) will be analyzed
half yearly by engaging NABL approved laboratory.
E. Noise Levels Monitoring
The measurement of noise level would be carried out at the boundaries of the proposed
plant in accordance to the ambient noise standards formulated by Ministry of Environment,
Forest and Climate Change (MoEF & CC). Noise levels would be monitored on hourly basis
for twenty-four hours. Noise will be recorded at A weighted frequency using a slow time
response mode of the measuring instrument.
F. Soil quality
During construction and operation phases of the proposed plant, soil may be contaminated if
suitable mitigation measures are not taken for disposal of solid & hazardous waste, effluent
and waste water generated from the plant. Therefore, composite samples of soil will be
collected and analyzed annually by engaging NABL approved laboratory during operation
phase of the proposed plant.
G. Occupational Health Check-up
Occupational health check up, especially for diseases of eye, ear, lung and chest for the
workers and staff who work in the plant area shall be carried out annually. If any
abnormalities found after occupational health check up, person shall be extended treatment
at nearby hospital in Khardah or Barackpore depending upon on the type and severity of the
health effect.
6.4
AC TI O N PL AN FO R E N VIR ONME NT AL MO NIT ORI N G
The action plan for environmental monitoring programme for the proposed plant is presented
in Tables 6.1 and 6.2 for construction and operation phases. The proposed plant will be
based on latest technology of manufacturing, equipment & machinery and treatment of
waste water, etc, which will help in reducing the pollution from the plant.
T ABLE 6.1: E NVIRONMENTAL M ONITORING P LAN DURING C ONSTRUCTION P HASE
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
Attribute
Parameters
Ambient
Air
Quality
Groundwater
Quality
PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx,

& CO, VOC.
As per IS 10500:2012
No. of
Sampling
Locations
Frequency
of
Monitoring
/
Data Collection
Period
24 hourly sample
Half yearly
One sample at
each location
Half yearly
221 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No.
3.
Attribute
Parameters
No. of
Sampling
Locations
Frequency
of
Monitoring
/
Data Collection
Period
Noise level
Noise levels in dB(A)

Leq
At the
boundary of
the plant
Hourly
Measurement for
24 Hours
Half yearly
T ABLE 6.2: E NVIRONMENTAL M ONITORING P LAN DURING O PERATIONAL P HASE

Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Attribute
Parameters
Ambient
Air
Quality
Stack Emission
Monitoring
of
LDO Fired Boiler
& DG set
Groundwater
Quality
Analysis
of
Waste Water
Noise level
No. of
Sampling
Locations
Frequency
of
Monitoring
/
Data Collection
Period
PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx,

& CO, VOC.
SPM, SO2, NOx and CO
24 hourly sample
Half yearly
Grab Sample at
Iso-sampling
sampling rate
Half yearly
As per IS 10500:2012
Half yearly
pH, TSS, BOD, COD, oil

&
grease,
phenol
chloride,
sulphate,
phosphate,
fluorides,
iron and heavy metals
(Hg, Cd, Cr, Pb, Zn, As,
Cu)
Noise levels in dB(A)
Leq
One sample at
each location
Grab Sample
At the
boundary of
the plant
Hourly
Measurement for
24 Hours
Half yearly
Composite
Sample at each
location
Annual
checkups
Half yearly
Soil
Physical and chemical

parameters
Occupational
Health Check-up
Eye, Ear, Lung & Chest
6.5
Plant
Workers
Half yearly
Annually
AU D ITS AN D IN SPE CTI ON S
The environmental monitoring Cell (EMC) of HAC will be responsible for environmental
compliance, monitoring and environmental management programs. Regular audit and
inspection shall be carried out by EMC.
222 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
A. Reporting
HAC will have various reporting requirements. These include periodic reports and
performance reviews. HAC will also require to record and report incidents and complaints.
B. Periodic Reports
As a part of the environmental monitoring program, the following compliance reports shall be
submitted to WBPCB and Regional Office of MoEF&CC:
Half yearly compliance report on 1st December and 1st June of each financial year to
MoEF&CC.
Environmental Statement for the financial year ending 31st March to WBPCB on or
before 30th September every year - WBPCB
Annual returns in Form 4 as per Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and

Transboundary movement) Rules, 2008 on or before 30th June every year - WBPCB
Maintaining Records of Hazardous Waste, in Form 3 as per Hazardous Waste

(Management, Handling and Transboundary movement) Rules, 2008.- WBPCB
Water Cess returns in Form 1, as per Rule 4 (1) of Water (Prevention & Control of
Pollution) Cess Rules 1978 on or before the 5th of every calendar month WBPCB
C. Compliance Monitoring
The record will be kept of any complaint received by the HAC Plant Management that
nuisance or pollution has occurred as a consequence of operation of resin manufacturing
related activities. The record will include the following details:
The date and time of the complaint
The name and address of the complainant, if known
The nature of the complaint
The likely source of the alleged pollution
Action taken in relation to the complaint, including any follow-up contact with the
complainant.
The records of complaints received from public or government will be retained for the
operational lifetime of the HACs synthetic resin unit, as follows:
Total numbers of complaints received

223 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Actions taken by HACs management to address the complaint;
Actions taken to prevent recurrence;
A description of any significant unresolved issues arising from the complaints.
A dedicated email address will be created to receive generic complaints, while

maintaining the anonymity of the complainant.
224 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
CHAPTER 7
RISK ASSESSMENT AND DISASTER
MANAGEMENT PLAN
225 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
C HAPTER 7: R ISK A NALYSIS AND D ISASTER

M ANANGEMENT P LAN
7.1
INTRODUCTION
The proposed resin manufacturing plant of M/s Hindusthan Adhesives and Chemicals will
store and handle various hazardous chemicals in solid and liquid form. Hazardous materials
will be stored in bags, jerry cans, barrels and tanks.
7.2
H AZ A R D I D E N T I F I C A T I O N
Hazard is defined as a chemical or physical condition which has the potential for causing
damage to people, property or the environment. Hazard identification is the first step in the
risk analysis and entails the process of collecting information on:
The types and quantities of hazardous substances stored and handled at the plant,
The location of storage tanks and other facilities, and
Potential hazards associated with the accidental release of hazardous chemicals/solvents.

7.2.1 H AZ A R D O U S M A T E R I A L S S T O R E D AT T H E P L A N T
The proposed plant will be engaged in handling and storage of various flammable, corrosive
and toxic hazardous materials. Details of hazardous materials to be stored at the proposed
plant and their quantities are given in Table 7.1:
The physical and chemical properties of the raw materials are as given in Table 7.2.
T ABLE 7.1: D ETAILS OF H AZARDOUS M ATERIALS S TORED
Sl.
No.
Raw Materials
1.
2.
3.
4.
Phenol
Formalin
Caustic Soda
Para Toluene
Sulphonic Acid (PTSA)
Para Toluene
Sulphonic Acid (PTSA)
Caustic Potash
Para Formaldehyde
Urea
Melamine
Furfural Alcohol
Silane
Tri Acetone
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Form
Quantity
(Tonnes)
2000
5300
320
70
Type of
Packing/Storage/
Mode of Storage
Tank
Tank
In bags
In bags
Capacity of
Storage
(Ton/ Month)
100 MT
100 MT
10 MT
10 MT
Liquid
Liquid
Flakes
Solid Flakes
Liquid
470
In barrel
30 MT
Flakes
Granule
Granule
Powder
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
216
130
640
215
490
17
340
In bags
In bags
In bags
In bags
In barrel
In barrel
In barrel
15 MT
10 MT
20 MT
10 MT
10 MT
3 MT
30 MT.
226 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No.
Raw Materials
Form
Quantity
(Tonnes)
13.
Ethylene Glycol
Diacetate (EGDA)
Dibasic Ester (DBE)
Ethylene Dichloride
(EDC)
Dipentine
Phosphoric Acid
Tri Sodium Phosphate
(TSP)
Ammonia
Mono Ethylene Glycol
(MEG)
Borax
Phthalic anhydride
Sulphuric Acid
Hydrofluoric Acid
Ammonium bi-fluoride
Liquid
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
50
Type of
Packing/Storage/
Mode of Storage
In barrel
Capacity of
Storage
(Ton/ Month)
10 MT
Liquid
Liquid
50
50
In barrel
In barrel
10
05
Liquid
Liquid
Powder
3
2
1
In barrel
In barrel
In bags
01
01
01
Liquid
Liquid
35
2
In barrel
In barrel
02
02
Powder
Flakes
Liquid
Liquid
Powder
2
2
90
30
30
In bags
In bags l
In barrel
In barrel
In bags
0.5
03
05
03
02
T ABLE 7.2: D ETAILS O F F INISHED P RODUCTS
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
42
50
323
103
1.7/ 8.6
6/36.5
-
5
0.3
2.0
-
317
100
2480
1.057
1.08
2.13
-
3.24
1.03
>1.0
6.0
Flakes
1320
360
2.0
273
2.044
Para
Formaldehyde
Urea
Melamine
Furfuryl alcohol
Granule
160
7/73
800
1.03
Granule
Powder
Liquid
171
132
345
-31
10.0
10.0
8471
3161
177
Tri Acetone
Ethylene
Glycol
Diacetate (EGDA)
Ethylene
Dichloride (EDC)
Dipentene
Phosphoric Acid
Tri
Sodium
Phosphate (TSP)
Liquid
Liquid
258
186
-78
-31
1.8/
16.3
1.6/8.4
1.251.35
1.323
1.573
1.129
25.0
3000
6850
1.154
1.1
7.52
5.04
Liquid
83.5
-35
10.0
670
1.253
3.42
Liquid
Liquid
Powder
170
158
41
73
6.2/
15.9
0.7/6.1
-
10.0
5300
1530
>300
0.856
1.69
1.62
>4.7
3.4
2.5
Vapour
Density
181.9
98
1388
140
Sp.
Gravity
Liquid
Liquid
Flakes
Liquid
LEL /
UEL %
Phenol
Formalin
Caustic Soda
Para
Toluene
Sulphonic
Acid
(PTSA)
Caustic Potash
M.P/ F.P.
C
LD50
mg/kg
5.

TLV ppm
or mg/m3
1.
2.
3.
4.
Full Name Of State

The
Raw -Solid,
Materials
Liquid
Or Gas
B.P. C
Sl.
No
2.07
4.34
3.37
227 | P a g e
197
-13
1.2/8.5
100.0
4700
1.115
2.14
300
284
170
130
5.0
6.1
2600
1530
1.43
1.53
5.1
Sulphuric Acid
Liquid
Hydrofluoric Acid
Liquid
Ammonium
Bi- Powder
fluoride
290
19.5
240
3.0
-84
125
1.7/
10.4
-
1.0
0.5
2.5
2140
>90
-
1.84
0.97
1.51
3.4
2.21
-
19.
20.
21.
7.3
Vapour
Density
LD50
mg/kg
Mono
Ethylene Liquid
Glycol (MEG)
Borax
Powder
Phthalic anhydride Flakes
Sp.
Gravity
TLV ppm
or mg/m3
16.
17.
18.

M.P/ F.P.
C
Full Name Of State

The
Raw -Solid,
Materials
Liquid
Or Gas
B.P. C
Sl.
No
LEL /
UEL %

WEST BENGAL
C H A R A C T E R I S T I C S O F H AZ A R D O U S M AT E R I A L
For manufacturing of Phenol Formaldehyde (PF) Resin,
Melamine Formaldehyde (MF)
Resin, Urea Formaldehyde (UF) Resin, Furan Resin, Catalyst Acid base and Catalyst Ester
base, hazardous chemical like Phenol, Formalin, Caustic Soda, Para Toluene Sulphonic
Acid (PTSA), Para Toluene Sulphonic Acid (PTSA), Caustic Potash, Para Formaldehyde,
Urea, Melamine, Furfural Alcohol, Silane, Tri Acetine, Ethylene Glycol Diacetate (EGDA),
Dibasic Ester (DBE), Ethylene Dichloride (EDC), Dipentine, Phosphoric Acid, Tri Sodium
Phosphate (TSP), Ammonia, Mono Ethylene Glycol (MEG), Borax, Phthalic anhydride,
Sulphuric Acid, Hydrofluoric Acid, Ammonium bi-fluoride, will be stored and handled at the
proposed plant. For hazard identification, characteristics of hazardous materials are
important, which are described in subsequent sections.
Details of raw material storage, quantity (maximum) and associate hazards, hazard rating
systems and control measures are given in Table 7.3.
Process hazards and controls at proposed plant, type of hazard (fire/ explosion, run away
reaction/rupture and control measures provided are given in Table 7.4.
General hazard control at the proposed plant including type of emergency, identification of
area, possible causes, possible results, preventive/ control measures are given in Table 7.5.
228 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 7.3: D ETAILS OF R AW M ATERIAL S TORAGE H AZARD AND C ONTROL

Sl.
No.
1.
Name of
Material
Stored
Phenol
Hazard Rating
Systems
Type of Hazard / Risk Involved
TLV 5 PPM
STEL-10 PPM
Toxic when contact with Skin

Causes burns
Toxic if swallowed
Irritating to Skin, Eyes and
Respiratory System
Spills and leaks
NFPA Ratings:
Health: 4;
Flammability: 2;
Instability: 0
Flash Point:
79.44C
2.
Formalin
TLV 0.3 PPM

TWA:250 ppm
NFPA Ratings:
Health - 3
Flammability - 2
B
Reactivity - 0
Flash Point: 50C
3.
Furfural
Alcohol
TLV 15 PPM
TWA:200 ppm
B
NFPA Ratings:
Health - 1
Flammability - 2
Reactivity - 1
Control Measures
Dyke provision to storage tank

Safety boards displayed on the tank
Local exhaust / General dilution ventilation must be provided.
For accidental contact with skin, nearby provision of soap-suds
Use water spray to keep fire-exposed containers cool. Wear a
self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) to prevent contact
with thermal decomposition products.
Handling of Phenol with Safety glasses, hand gloves, gumboot.
Workplace monitoring and measurement
Stored separately from strong oxidizers , acid , halogens
Flammable
Dyke provision to storage tank
Very toxic by inhalation.
Very toxic in contact with skin.
Good ventilation must be provided
Very toxic if swallowed.
Trap & collect spills with Sand or other inert solids
Causes burns.
Use an approved gas mask in un-ventilated areas if necessary
because of fumes.
Limited evidence of a carcinogenic
effect.
Handling of Formaldehyde with Safety glasses, Nitrile or butyl
rubber gloves
Risk of serious damage to the
eyes.
May cause sensitization by skin
contact.
Combustible.
Store in light-resistant container.
Flammable in presence of open Keep container in a cool, well-ventilated area.
flames and sparks, of heat.
Keep container tightly closed and sealed until ready for use.
Non-flammable in presence of Avoid all possible sources of ignition (spark or flame).
shocks.
Do not store above 25C
May have explosive reactions or Provide exhaust ventilation or other engineering controls to
229 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No.
4.
Name of
Material
Stored
Liquid
Ammonia
Hazard Rating
Systems
Control Measures
Flash Point:
75 C
polymerization with cyanoacetic

acid, formic acid, mineral acids,
and organic acids.
Light Sensitive.
Highly reactive with acids. Reactive
with oxidizing agents
Hazardous in case of skin contact
(irritant, permeator), of ingestion.
keep the airborne concentrations of vapors below their

respective threshold limit value.
Ensure that eyewash stations and safety showers are proximal
to the work-station location.
Keep container closed when not in use. Store in a tightly
closed container.
Store in a cool, dry, well-ventilated area away from
incompatible substances.
TLV/TWA = 25
ppm
TLV/STEL = 35
ppm
IDLH = 300 ppm
Ammonia highly hazardous and

toxic chemical,
Ammonia is corrosive to the skin.
Exposure to Ammonia can cause
moderate to severe eye irritation.
It poses an immediate fire and
explosion
hazard
when
concentrations exceed 15%.
Store containers in a well-ventilated,

Safety glasses for handling cylinders.
Chemical goggles with full faceshield for connecting,
disconnecting or opening cylinders.
Leather gloves for handling cylinders.
Rubber or Neoprene gloves and chemical resistant outer
garment should be worn when handling liquid ammonia.
Always have an ample supply of water nearby.
Keep at least 100 litres of water in the supply tank, and carry a
small squeeze bottle of water in affected area.
Keep a third container of water on your tractor
Use corrosion-resistant tools and equipments.
Keep containers tightly closed when not in use or empty.
Do not handle swollen drums.
Store in an area that is cool, dry, well-ventilated, and separate
from incompatible materials.
Never add water to Caustic Soda. In case of insufficient
ventilation, wear suitable respiratory equipment.
Use of PPEs by workers while handling of caustic soda.
NFPA Ratings:
Health - 3
Flammability - 0
Reactivity - 1
Caustic
Soda
STEL: 2 (mg/m3)
from ACGIH (TLV)
NFPA Ratings:
Health-3
Flammability-0
Reactivity-1
Corrosive solid.
Slightly explosive in presence of
heat.
Much heat is evolved when solid
material is dissolved in water.
Therefore cold water and caution
must be used for this process.
Very hazardous in case of skin
230 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No.
Name of
Material
Stored
Hazard Rating
Systems
6.
Para
Toluene
Sulphonic
Acid (PTSA),
NFPA ratings:
Health - 3
Flammability - 1
Reactivity - 1
7.
Caustic
Potash
NFPA Ratiings:
Health-3
Flammability-0
Reactivity-2
contact
(corrosive,
irritant,
permeator), of eye contact (irritant,
corrosive), ingestion and inhalation.
May be combustible at high
temperature.
open flames and sparks
Fine dust dispersed in air in
sufficient concentrations, and in the
presence of an ignition source is a
potential dust explosion hazard.
Corrosive solid.
Reactive with metals. Slightly
reactive to reactive with moisture.
Corrosive solid.
Much heat is evolved when solid
material is dissolved in water.
Therefore cold water and caution
must be used for this process.
Highly reactive with acids. Reactive
with organic materials, metals,
moisture.
heat.
Very hazardous in case of skin
contact
(corrosive,
irritant,
permeator), of eye contact (irritant,
corrosive), ingestion and inhalation.
Control Measures
Keep away from sources of heat and ignition.

Keep container tightly closed and sealed until ready for use
Keep container in a cool, well-ventilated area
Use of PPEs by workers while handling of caustic soda.
Use process enclosures, local exhaust ventilation, or other
engineering controls to keep airborne levels below
recommended exposure limits. If handling or changing
generate dust, fume or mist, use ventilation to keep exposure
to airborne contaminants below the exposure limit.
In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with plenty of water
for at least 15 minutes. Cold water may be used. Get medical
attention.
Keep containers tightly closed when not in use or empty.
Store in an area that is cool, dry, well-ventilated, and separate
from incompatible materials.
Use corrosion-resistant tools and equipments.
Do not touch spilled material.
Do not handle swollen drums.
Never add water to Caustic Potash. In case of insufficient
ventilation, wear suitable respiratory equipment.
attention.
Use of PPEs by workers while handling
231 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No.
8.
9.
Name of
Material
Stored
Urea
Hazard Rating
Systems
Control Measures
Health-2
Flammability- 1
Reactivity-0
May be combustible at high

temperature.
Slightly flammable to flammable in
presence of heat
Hazardous in case of skin contact
(irritant), of eye contact (irritant), of
ingestion, of inhalation.
Ethylene
Dichloride
(EDC)
ACGIH-TLV - 10
ppm (8-hr TWA)
Dangerous
fire
hazard
and
explosion hazard when exposed to
heat or flame.
Vapors of ethylene dichloride are
heavier than air and may travel a
considerable distance to a source
of ignition and flash back.
Ethylene dichloride decomposes in
air to form hydrochloric acid.
Combustion of ethylene dichloride
produces phosgene and hydrogen
chloride.
Fatal if inhaled.
Causes severe skin burns and eye
damage
Corrosive liquid
Reacts with metals to liberate
flammable hydrogen gas.
Extremely hazardous in case of
inhalation (lung corrosive)
May cause damage to organs,
Keep container tightly closed. Keep container in a cool, wellventilated area.

Excess heat, excess dust generation, incompatible materials
should be avoided.
attention.
Do not breathe mist/vapors.
Keep container tightly closed.
Wear protective gloves and eye/face protection. Store
container tightly closed in cool/ well-ventilated place.
Wash thoroughly after handling.
If a person breathes large amounts of this chemical, move the
exposed person to fresh air at once.
Use Carbon Dioxide extinguishers, and water spray or alcohol
foam for small fires
Large fires should be extinguished with alcohol foam. Water
sprays may be used to keep containers.
Exposed to fire cool but may not be sufficient to put out fire.
NFPA Ratings
Health-2
Flammability- 3
Reactivity-0
10
Phosphoric
Acid
TWA: 1 STEL: 3
(mg/m3) from
ACGIH (TLV)
NFPA Ratings
Health-3
Keep container tightly closed. Keep container in a cool, wellventilated area.

Do not breathe gas/fumes and vapor.
Never add water to this product
In case of insufficient ventilation, wear suitable respiratory
equipment.
232 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No.
Name of
Material
Stored
Hazard Rating
Systems
Flammability- 0
Reactivity-0
11
Tri Sodium
Phosphate
(TSP)
TWA: 15 (mg/m3)
from OSHA (PEL)
NFPA Ratings
Health-2
Flammability- 0
Reactivity-0
11
Sulphuric
Acid
TLV/STEL= 3
mg/m3
IDLH= 80mg/m3
NFPA Ratings:
Health-3
Flammability-0
Reactivity-2
blood, liver,
marrow.
skin,
eyes,
Control Measures
bone Keep container tightly closed. Keep container in a cool, wellventilated area
Wear protective gloves and eye/face protection. Store
container tightly closed in cool/ well-ventilated place.
It is corrosive, and can cause

moderate to severe irritation to
contaminated tissues which come
in contact with its dusts or
particulates
heat.
Containers may explode when
heated
Extremely hazardous in case of
skin contact (corrosive), eye
contact (corrosive), inhalation (lung
corrosive).
Sulphuric acid is corrosive in
nature.
Fire may be result from the heat
generated
by
contact
of
concentrated sulphuric acid with
combustible material.
Extremely corrosive to all body
tissues, causing rapid tissue
destruction and serious chemical
burns.
Use local exhaust ventilation, or other engineering controls to

keep airborne levels below recommended exposure limits. If
dust, fume or mist is generated, use ventilation to keep
exposure to airborne contaminants below the exposure limit.
Worker whose clothing has been contaminated by Tri Sodium
Phosphate should change into clean clothing promptly.
Keep container tightly closed. Keep container in a cool, wellventilated area
Label process containers

Provide employee with hazard information and training.
Monitor airborne chemical concentrations.
Use engineering controls if concentrations exceed
recommended exposure levels.
Always wash at the end of the workshift
Keep container tightly closed. Keep container in a cool, wellventilated area
Do not eat, smoke, or drink in areas where Sulphuric Acid is
being handled, processed or stored.
233 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No.
12
Name of
Material
Stored
Hydrofluoric
Acid
Hazard Rating
Systems
STEL: 2.3 (mg/m3)

from ACGIH (TLV)
NFPA Ratings:
Health-4
Flammability-0
Reactivity-1
13
Ammonium
Bi-fluoride
TLV = 2 ppm
NFPA Ratings:
Health-3
Flammability-0
Reactivity-0
Control Measures
Reacts
with
most
metals,
particularly when diluted with
water, to form flammable hydrogen
gas which may create an explosion
hazard.
Hydrofluoric Acid is one of the most
dangerous acids known. It needs to
be treated differently than even
strong acids like Sulfuric and
Hydrochloric.
Oral exposure may result in severe
burns to the mouth, esophagus and
stomach which can lead to
vomiting
(possibly
bloody),
abdominal
pain
and
bloody
diarrhea.
.
Ammonium Bifluride is a corrosive

chemical and contact can severely
irritate and burn the skin and eyes
with possible eye damage.
Ammonium bifluoride can affect
when breathed in and by passing
through your skin.
High exposure can cause fluride
Use Splash-proof chemical goggles with plastic face shield

Use Full-length lab coat with a chemical-resistant apron over
top
Use Closed-toe, preferably leather shoes (not fabric or mesh)
or boots made of polyvinyl alcohol (PVA)
Never work with HF alone or after hours.
Hydrofluric acid reacts with glass, which should never be used
to store or transfer it. Use chemically compatible containers,
such as those made from polyethylene or Teflon.
Ensure all containers of HF are clearly labeled.
Always work with a chemically compatible secondary
containment tray.
Ensure HF containing vials and flasks are securely supported
and not likely to tip over.
Keep containers closed to minimize exposure and prevent
etching of fume hood glass from HF vapor
Workers whose clothing has been contaminated by ammonium
Bifluride should change into clean clothing promptly.
Do not take contaminated clothes home. Family members
could be exposed.
Do not eat smoke, or drink where Ammonium Bifluride is
handled, processed, or stored, since the chemical can be
swallowed.
Exposure to 25 mg/m3 is immediately dangerous to life and
234 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No.
Name of
Material
Stored
Hazard Rating
Systems
Control Measures
nausea, vomiting and loss of

health. If the possibility of exposure above 25 mg/m3 exists,
appetite.
use a NIOSH approved self-contained breathing apparatus
with a full face piece operated in a pressure-demand or other
Very high exposure can cause
positive-pressure mode.
fluride poisoning with stomach
pain,
weakness,
convulsions, Use process enclosures, local exhaust ventilation, or other
collapse and death.
engineering controls to keep airborne levels below
recommended exposure limits. If handling or operations
generate dust, fume or mist, use ventilation to keep exposure
to airborne contaminants below the exposure limit.
T ABLE 7.4: P ROCESS H AZARDS AND C ONTROLS AT P ROPOSED P LANT
Name
of Material in the
Hazardous
Process /
Process And
Operation
Operation
Condenser
Steam
&
Cooled Water
Reactor Vessel Phenol

Formaldehyde
Type
of
Hazard
(fire/ Control Measured Provided
explosion
run
away
reaction/rupture, etc).
Bursting of
tubes
Cold burns
Condensing
Run-away
Licensed Condensers
Annual inspections
Safety interlocks to be provided
Safety and pressure gauge valves fitted
Properly supported and protected against corrosion
Testing of Jackets and joints of tubes regularly
Exothermic
Raw materials quantity must be controlled either volumetrically or
reaction
gravimetrically.
Release of Heat and Process control devices must be installed including use of sensors, alarms,
Flammable gases
trips and other control systems that either take automatic action or allow for
manual intervention to prevent the conditions for uncontrolled reaction
Fire, Toxic gas release and
occurring.
Explosion
High Temperature indicator valve and alarm system must be provided
235 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Auto cutoff system must be provided after reaching of predetermined

maximum safe temperature.
Pressure gauge must be provided.
Safety Control valve is must to be provided.
The Vessel Emergency Relief vent should discharge to a suitably designed
catch pot or should be so positioned that people working in the area and
members of the public will not be in danger if the contents of the vessel are
discharged.
Use skilled worker
Proper selection of MOC
Mechanical seal in all pumps and reactors
T ABLE 7.5: G ENERAL H AZARD C ONTROL AT THE P ROPOSED P LANT

Type
of Identification of Possible Causes
Possible Results
Emergency
Area
Fire
Tankfarm Area
Fire due to bottom Major fire in the tank
nozzle failure
farm, it may spread
all over the company
Damage of HSD
and
surrounding
/LDO storage tank
area
Pump
discharge
May cause fatalities
nozzle failure
Unloading
road
tanker
hose
rupture
Explosion
Preventive/ Control Measures
Licensed and isolated storage tank farm.

Flame proof fittings.
Earthling while unloading.
Spark arrestor at main gate.
Dip pipes on the tank for unloading.
Provision of dyke.
Earthling of tanks and pumps.
Get approval form an explosive department for plan
approval, equipment layout & emergency control
measures.
No electrical junction box close to storage materials.
Hot work permit system followed for hot working in the
ware house.
All
material Vapor explosion Improper discharge Flameproof electric installation areas & use spark less
handling areas
due to contact of
of static charge
tools
236 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Type
of Identification
Emergency
Area
of Possible Causes
Storage and other

Operation Area
Material
Within the plant
Handling and
Charging
Possible Results
Preventive/ Control Measures
spark
to Use of non FLP
accumulated
equipment
for
flammable vapor
solvent handling
in confined area
Metal
to
metal
impact
Electrical
short
circuit
Open flame
Spillage
and Fire Hazard
overflow
Flammable,
irritation
eye Fire
and
Hazards
health
Isolated storage of Flammable material drums

Hot work permit for hot working in the plant
Earthling for human static charge
Good ventilated area for Flammable material storage
Required Fire Extinguisher Provided

Flame Proof Electrical Fitting
Proper Earthling arrangement
Fire Hydrant System with Jockey Pump
Gas Detector
Trained employee
Required PPE and Fire Protective equipment provided
Good engineering practice
Separate storage are with dyke valve system provided
237 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
7.4
H AZ A R D S F R O M S T O R A G E A N D H A N D L I N G O F H A Z A R D O U S M AT E R I AL S
7.4.1 P O O L F I R E
A leak or spill of sufficient size of flammable liquid will result in an accumulation of flammable
liquid on the ground or in bund or dyke. If ignited, the resulting fire is known as spreading or
fixed pool fire. Objects coming in contact with the flame above the pool will be severely
damaged or destroyed and personnel exposed to flame will suffer extensive burn injuries.
Objects and personnel outside the actual flame volume may also be affected or injured by
radiant heat. The extent of damage or injury depends on the heat flux and duration of fire
and exposure. If a large area of the body receives second and third degree burns, it can
result in fatalities.
The extent of injury to people depends on the heat flux and duration of exposure. The extent
of damage to property or environment depends on the size of the pool and the duration of
fire.
7.4.2 J E T F I R E
Jet fire will occur in the event of release of flammable hydrogen gas followed by fire. If
released flammable gas/vapors and liquid is ignited immediately, jet fire may take place. The
extent of injury to people depends on the heat flux and duration of exposure to heat.
7.4.3 V AP O U R C L O U D E X P L O S I O N
If released flammable vapour is not ignited immediately, the cloud of vapour will spread in
the surrounding area. As long as the concentration of gas/vapour is between the lower and
upper flammability limits, the vapour cloud may be set on fire by an ignition source. For
generation of over pressure effect, some degree of confinement of the flammable cloud is
required.
7.4.4 F L AS H F I R E
When released quantities of flammable vapours/gas are not ignited immediately, vapour
cloud of flammable vapours/gas spreads in the surrounding area, some amount of
flammable vapours/gas concentration will be between the lower and upper flammable limits,
and the vapour cloud may be set on fire by an ignition source in entire length of flammable
vapour cloud resulting flash fire. In the event of flash fire, essentially, no over pressure effect
is occurred.
238 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
7.5
H AZ A R D O U S C O N D I T I O N S D U E T O R E L E A S E O F H A Z A R D O U S M A T E R I A L S
As a result of release of flammable liquid followed by immediate or delayed ignition, the

following hazardous conditions may be encountered at and surrounding the HAC plant.
7.5.1 T H E R M AL E F F E C T S
In case of pool/ jet fire, thermal effect is likely to cause injury or damage to people and
objects. A substantial body of experimental data exists and forms the basis for thermal effect
estimation. The consequence caused by exposure to heat radiation is a function of:
Radiation energy onto the human body [kW/m2];
Exposure duration [s];
Protection of the skin tissue (clothed or naked body).
The following damage distances for thermal radiation are used in the risk analysis:
37.5kW/m2
12.5kW/m2
4.0 kW/m2
:
:
:
Damage to process equipment. 100% fatality in 1min. 1% fatality in 10s.

First degree burn for 10 s exposure
First degree burn for 30 s exposure
7.5.2 D E L A Y E D I G N I T I O N & E X P L O S I O N
In case of delayed ignition of flammable inventories, two physical effects may occur in
following ways:
Flash fire over the whole length of vapour cloud;
Vapour cloud explosion that results in blast wave with typical peak overpressures in
circle around the ignition source. For vapour cloud explosion some degree of
confinement essential.
TNO Multi-energy method is used to calculate the blast overpressure. The following damage
criteria as given in Table 7.6 may be distinguished with respect to the peak overpressures
resulting from a blast wave:
T ABLE 7.6: D AMAGE E FFECTS D UE TO O VERPRESSURES
Peak Overpressure
Damage Type
0.830 bar
Total Destruction
0.350 bar
Heavy Damage
0.170 bar
Moderate Damage
0.100 bar
Minor Damage
239 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
In Table 7.7 given below provides an illustrative list of damage effects caused by peak
overpressure.
T ABLE 7.7: I LLUSTRATIVE D AMAGE E FFECTS DUE TO O VERPRESSURES
Peak Overpressure (Bar)
Failure
0.005
5 % Window Shattering
0.02
50 % Window Shattering
0.07
Collapse of a roof of a tank
0.07-0.14
Connection failure of panelling
0.08-0.1
Minor Damage to Steel Framework
0.15-0.2
Concrete block wall shattered
0.2
Collapse of Steel Framework
0.2-0.3
Collapse of self framing Steel panel building
0.2-0.3
Ripping of empty oil tanks
0.2-0.3
Deformation of a pipe bridge
0.2-0.4
Big trees topple over
0.3
Panelling torn off
0.35-0.4
Piping failure
0.35-0.8
Damage to Distillation Column
0.4-0.85
Collapse of pipe bridge
0.5
Loaded Train Wagon overturned
0.5
Brick walls shattered
0.5-1.0
Movement of round tank, failure of connecting piping
(Source: TNO)
7.6
H AZ A R D S D U E T O L O S S O F C O N T AI N M E N T
Hazardous materials handled and stored at the proposed HAC plant are flammable and
corrosive/toxic in nature. In the event of leakage or accidental release of flammable
materials, these will create thermal radiations in the event of fire. In the event of release of
flammable liquid, methanol, fire and flash fire hazards may take place.
Suitable safety measures including fire fighting facilities will be provided to attend any
emergency due to handling and storage of these hazardous materials at HAC Plant. In the
bulk storage of hazardous materials, adequate size of dykes will be provided at HAC plant
for full containment of hazardous materials in an unlikely event of leakage or spillage.
240 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The detailed release and consequence computations have been carried out for selected
scenarios of potential hazardous materials to be handled and stored at the HAC plant.
7.7
S E L E C T E D S C E N A R I O S F O R C O N S E Q U E N C E AN A L Y S I S
The plant after construction will be dealing with many hazardous substances as described
above. Most of the hazardous chemicals are flammable and toxic in nature and will not
create threat to life and property beyond the boundary of plant in the event of spillage as
dykes have been provided for full containment. If pool fires occur, the consequence will be
confined within short distances in the form of thermal radiation.
Various scenarios for consequence analysis as a result of accidental releases of hazardous
materials are given in Table 7.8.
T ABLE 7.8: S CENARIOS S ELECTED FOR C ONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS
Sl.No. Type of Release
1.
Outcomes
Release of Phenol from catastrophic rupture of 10 Pool Fire

Km Tank
2.
Release
Flash Fire/ Explosion

of
Formaldehyde
from
catastrophic Pool Fire
rupture of 10 Km Tank
7.8
Flash Fire/ Explosion
C O N S E Q U E N C E AN A L Y S I S
The consequence analysis has been carried for the selected release scenarios to estimate
the vulnerable zones. When the vulnerable zones are identified for failure cases, mitigation
measures can be taken for risk mitigation and to eliminate/avoid damage to the plant and
injury to personnel.
As a part of risk assessment study, worst case scenarios consequence analysis is carried
out to determine the maximum loss scenarios. The selection of the accident scenarios is
based on engineering and professional judgment, accident descriptions of the past in similar
type of plants and the expertise in risk analysis studies.
7.8.1 M O D E L U S E D F O R C O N S E Q U E N C E A N A L Y S I S
The Risk Assessment study involves a large number of calculations for which established
computing aids are essential.
PHAST/SAFETI (Version 6.53.1) Software of DNV has been used to perform the
consequence calculations. PHAST/SAFETI is a consequence and risk assessment software
for calculation of physical effects (fire, explosion, atmospheric dispersion) of the escape of
241 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
hazardous materials. PHAST/SAFETI software allows detailed modeling and quantitative

assessment of release of pure and mixtures of liquid and gaseous materials.
7.8.2 C O N S E Q U E N C E A N A L Y S I S F O R R E L E AS E S C E N A R I O S
Consequence for release scenarios as a result of (1) Release of Phenol from catastrophic
rupture of 10 Km Tank, (2) Release of Formaldehyde from catastrophic rupture of 10 Km
Tank discussed in detail in following subsection.
7.8.3 R E L E A S E O F P H E N O L C AT A S T R O P H I C R U P T U R E O F 10 KL T A N K
In the event of release of Phenol due to rupture of tank, pool will be formed in dyke. Phenol
vapours will be generated and vapour cloud will move towards wind direction. On ignition of
phenol pool thermal radiation of various intensity will be occurred. Outcome of model are
summarized below:
IDLH Concentration of Phenol Vapours
In the event of release of Phenol due to rupture of tank, pool will be formed. Phenol vapours
will be generated from pool and move towards wind direction. IDLH Concentration of Phenol
vapours respect to distance will be as given below:
Concentration
Concentration Distance (m)
IDLH (250 PPM)
B, 3m/s
D, 3m/s
E, 2 m/s
F, 1 m/s
5.69756
3.75247
3.48757
2.88977
Note: All values are in m

Maximum concentration footprints are shown in Figure 7.1.
Over Pressure
Phenol vapours may explode if mass between LEL and UEL is getting source of ignition with
degree of confinement. In this scenario intensity of explosion will not reach to 0.1 bars.
Therefore, there is no over pressure hazards.
Over Pressure
0.1 bar
Stability Class, Wind Speed

B, 3m/s
D, 3m/s
E, 2 m/s
F, 1 m/s
No Hazard
No Hazard
No Hazard
No Hazard
Flash Fire Envelope

Vapours of Phenol will result in flash fire on getting source of ignition. Furthest extent
distances of flash fire are as given below:
242 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Flash Fire Distance
Furthest extent (15000 ppm)
B, 3m/s
D, 3m/s
E, 2 m/s
2.84881
2.85022
2.85095
F, 1 m/s
2.85147
Flash Fire Envelope is shown in Figure 7.2.

Late Pool Fire Ellipse
In the event of ignition in pool of Phenol, thermal radiation of various intensities will be
occurred at different distances. Thermal radiation level distances are as given below:
Thermal Radiation Level Distances (m)
Thermal
Radiation Level
B, 3m/s
D, 3m/s
E, 2 m/s
F, 1 m/s
37.5 kW/m2
5.48776
5.48775
5.1201
4.50724
12.5 kW/m2
12.5836
12.5836
12.0783
10.8732
4 kW/m2
19.3898
19.3897
19.1035
18.4933
Late pool fire thermal radiation distances are shown in Figure 7.3.
F IGURE 7.1: M AXIMUM C ONCENTRATION F OOTPRINT FOR P HENOL RELEASE
243 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 7.2: F LASH F IRE E NVELOPE FOR P HENOL R ELEASE
F IGURE 7.3: I NTENSITY R ADII FOR P HENOL R ELEASE

244 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
7.8.4 R E L E A S E O F F O R M A L D E H Y D E F R O M C A T A S T R O P H I C R U P T U R E O F 10 KL
TANK
In the event of release of Formaldehyde due to rupture of tank, pool will be formed in dyke.
Formaldehyde vapours will be generated and vapour cloud will move towards wind direction.
On ignition of Formaldehyde pool thermal radiation of various intensity will be occurred.
Outcome of model are summarized below:
IDLH Concentration of Formaldehyde Vapours
In the event of release of Formaldehyde due to rupture of tank, pool will be formed.
Formaldehyde vapours will be generated from pool and move towards wind direction. IDLH
Concentration of Formaldehyde vapours respect to distance will be as given below:
Concentration
Concentration Distance (m)
IDLH (30 PPM)
B, 3m/s
D, 3m/s
E, 2 m/s
F, 1 m/s
18.2003
16.9634
16.453
2.3226
Note: All values are in m.

Maximum concentration footprints are shown in Figure 7.4.
Over Pressure
Formaldehyde vapours may explode if mass between LEL and UEL is getting source of
ignition with degree of confinement. In this scenario intensity of explosion will not reach to
0.1 bars. Therefore, there is no over pressure hazards.
Over Pressure
0.1 bar

B, 3m/s
D, 3m/s
E, 2 m/s
F, 1 m/s
No Hazard
No Hazard
No Hazard
No Hazard
Flash Fire Envelope

Vapours of Formaldehyde will result in flash fire on getting source of ignition. Furthest extent
distances of flash fire are as given below:
Flash Fire Distance
Furthest extent (25000 ppm)

B, 3m/s
D, 3m/s
E, 2 m/s
F, 1 m/s
2.2714
2.27483
2.27536
2.27522
Flash Fire Envelope is shown in Figure 7.5.
245 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Late Pool Fire Ellipse

In the event of ignition in pool of Formaldehyde, thermal radiation of various intensities will
be occurred at different distances. Thermal radiation level distances are as given below:
Thermal Radiation Level Distances (m)
Thermal
Radiation Level
B, 3m/s
D, 3m/s
E, 2 m/s
F, 1 m/s
37.5 kW/m2
5.87199
5.87199
5.54534
4.88779
12.5 kW/m2
8.61015
8.61015
8.47644
8.25716
12.9728
12.9728
13.0655
12.9756
4 kW/m
Late pool fire thermal radiation distances are shown in Figure 7.6.
F IGURE 7.4: M AXIMUM C ONCENTRATION F OOTPRINT FOR F ORMALDEHYDE RELEASE
246 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 7.5: F LASH F IRE E NVELOPE FOR F ORMALDEHYDE R ELEASE
F IGURE 7.6: I NTENSITY R ADII FOR F ORMALDEHYDE R ELEASE

247 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
7.9
R I S K R E D U C T I O N M E A S U R E S F O R O P E R AT I O N O F P R O P O S E D H AC P L A N T
For risk mitigation/reduction, attempts will be made to either reduce inventories that could
get released in the event of loss of containment or failure likelihoods or both as feasible.
Risk analysis identifies the risk contributors, which enables prioritization of the plant that
deserve special attention in terms of inspection and maintenance in particular and over all
safety management as a whole. For the risk reduction at the proposed plant after expansion,
the following salient suggestions are made:
A written process safety information document will be compiled for general use. The
document compilation will include an assessment of the hazards presented including :
a. toxicity/flammable information
b. Permissible exposure limits.
c. Physical hazard data
d. Thermal and chemical stability data
e. Reactivity data
f.
Corrosivity data
g. Information on process and mechanical design.
The process design information in the process safety information compilation will include
P&IDs/PFDs; process chemistry; maximum intended inventory; upper and lower limits,
pressures, flows and compositions and process design and energy balances.
Personnel engaged in handling of hazardous chemicals will be trained to respond in an

unlikely event of emergencies.
Safety measures in the form of Dos and Donts will be displayed at strategic locations
especially in Bangla and English language.
The plant will check and ensure that all instruments provided in the plant are in good
condition and documented.
Safe work practices will be developed to provide for the control of hazards during
operation and maintenance.
Personnel especially contractor workers at the plant will be made aware about the
hazardous substance stored at the plant and risk associated with them.
248 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The adequate numbers of heat and smoke gas detectors will be provided at strategic
locations in the plant and indication of detectors/ sensors will be provided in main control
room.
Predictive and preventive maintenance schedule will be prepared for equipment, piping,
pumps, etc. and thickness survey will be done periodically as per standard practices.
7.9.1 R I S K M I T I G AT I O N M E A S U R E S F O R P H E N O L
Phenol can pose a severe health hazard and should be handled with extreme caution.
Phenol is highly corrosive to the skin and readily absorbed through it, where upon it can
affect the central nervous system and cause damage to the liver and kidneys. It is also a
mutagen, and there is some evidence that phenol may be a reproductive hazard. When
heated, phenol will produce flammable vapors that are highly toxic (at just a few parts per
million) and explosive (at concentrations of 3% to 10% in air). Phenol is a crystalline solid or
a thick liquid with a sweet, tarry odor, and it ranges from colorless to pink in color.
Good work practices can help reduce hazardous exposures of Phenol.
Phenol handling should be handled or use where there is fume collection system
especially when heating it.
Prevent phenol from contacting skin by wearing neoprene gloves. Change gloves
frequently. Wear chemical goggles to protect the eyes.
Review a phenol Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) before handling the material.
Ensure that there is immediate and unobstructed access to an eye wash/shower unit in
the work area.
As with any chemical, do not eat, drink, or smoke where phenol is handled, processed,
or stored, since the chemical could be ingested.
Store phenol in a cool, dry, well-ventilated area, away from heated surfaces or ignition
sources.
Always wash hands thoroughly after handling phenol, even if gloves are used.
249 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
7.9.2 R I S K M I T I G AT I O N M E A S U R E F O R F O R M A L D E H Y D E
Because formaldehyde is very water soluble it affects the mucous membranes. The effects
of formaldehyde exposure can vary from person to person. Eye irritation, skin irritation and
respiratory irritation are typical acute exposure effects. Long-term, chronic exposure effects
may include cancers of the lung, nasopharyngeal and oropharynx, and nasal passages.
The following measures should be taken for handling of formaldehyde safely:
Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) need to be developed used for the use of
formalin / formaldehyde.
Employees who handle formaldehyde must receive documented training on the hazards
of formaldehyde and what to do in case of an exposure or spill.
Through exposure monitoring, it should be ensured that workers are not over-exposed.
Formaldehyde should always be used with adequate ventilation, preferably in a fume

hood, to minimize inhalation of formaldehyde vapor.
Workers Training for Formalin / Formaldehyde Handling

Workers who handle formaldehyde will be given documented training on the hazards of
formaldehyde and what to do in case of an exposure or spill. A Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) for formaldehyde will be kept in the work area where formaldehyde is
being used.
Exposure Monitoring
Exposure monitoring need be carried for formaldehyde in storage and handling area.
Ventilation
Formaldehyde should always be used in a chemical fume hood, with spot (snorkel)
ventilation or in an enclosure exhausted to the outside of the building.
Eye Protection
Always use chemical splash goggles when handling formaldehyde to minimize the risk of
even a small splash or vapor exposure to the corneas.
250 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Body Protection
Wear a laboratory coat and appropriate footwear that covers the entire foot.
Gloves
Medium or heavyweight nitrile, neoprene, natural rubber, or PVC gloves should be worn
when handling concentrated formaldehyde. Disposable nitrile gloves may be used when
handling dilute concentrations (10% or less).
Safe Work Practices
Formaldehyde containers should be clearly labeled with the chemical name and hazards.
Always wash hands thoroughly after using formaldehyde, even if gloves are worn.
Storage
Formaldehyde should be stored in labeled, chemically compatible containers, away from
heat and flame. Always place large-volume containers on a low, protected floor or in
another location where they will not be accidentally spilled or knocked over. Containers
larger than 4 litres should be stored in secondary containment.
7.10
7.10.1
R I S K M I T I G AT I O N M E A S U R E S F O R S P I L L S
CHEMICAL SPILLAGE MANAGEMENT
In all chemical and hazardous material emergency situations, the primary concern is the
protection of personnel. The secondary concern is to confine the contamination, but proper
training for the same. The release or spill of hazardous material will require a prompt
response based on a variety of factors, including the amount, type and location of the spill.
Hazardous materials spills can occur in during storage, handling or charging on reactor.
Injury or Illness
Workers must notify their immediate supervisor of an illness or injury related to exposure to
hazardous materials. All injuries that may be work related must be reported.
Chemical Exposure to Skin:
Immediately flush with cool water for at least 15 minutes.
If there are no visible burns, remove all jewelry and soap area.
Seek medical attention if a reaction occurs or if there is any doubt about possible
problems.
251 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Chemical Exposure to Skin Serious:
Remove all contaminated clothing.
Locate the nearest emergency shower and soak for at least 15 minutes.
Seek immediate medical attention.
Chemicals in Eyes:
Irrigate eyes for at least 15 minutes with tempered water from emergency eyewash
station.
Remove contact lenses if possible.
Smoke and Fumes

Anyone overcome by smoke or fumes should be removed to fresh air. Never attempt to
enter a location where potentially dangerous fumes might place you at risk. If someone is
down, contact emergency personnel and let them enter. Seek medical attention for exposure
as soon as possible.
Clothing on Fire (Stop, Drop and Roll):
Extinguish burning clothing by using the drop and roll technique, douse with cold water
or use emergency shower or fire blanket. If using a fire blanket, do not allow the person
to remain standing.
Remove contaminated clothing if possible.
Cover injured person to prevent shock. Seek medical attention.
Chemical Spills
There will be many chemicals present in the plant. The safe clean up of a chemical spill
requires some knowledge of the properties and hazards posed by the chemical, and any
added dangers posed by the location of the spill.
Minor spills
The following measures will be taken in the event of minor spills of hazardous materials at
the plant:
Notify such area immediately.
Limit access, prevent contamination spread.
Survey personnel before exiting.

252 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Cover spill with absorbent materials (unless liquid is flammable or oxidizing).
Remove contaminated clothing and footwear.
Package and label clean up materials for disposal.
Record spill details and contamination monitoring results.
Major Spills
The following measures shall be taken in the event of major spills of hazardous materials at
the plant:
Persons not involved in the spill will leave the area immediately.
Limit the movement of contaminated personnel until they are monitored.
Close off and secure the spill area to prevent entry.
Warning signs will be posted.
Select the appropriate PPE, shielding and absorbent spill materials like absorbent paper
or spill pillows if the liquid is not a flammable or oxidizing agent.
Personal Protective Equipment

Personal protective equipment (PPEs) is devices that are fitted and issued to each worker
personally for their exclusive use. They are intended for temporary use and emergency
response action only. If a worker must enter a contaminated area, he must wear adequate
protective equipment.
Employees will be taught when and how to use respiratory apparatus (SCBA) provided, and
how to recognize defects in the equipment. Without SCBA entry into the contaminated area
will not be attempted.
Personal protective equipment will be kept there, where it can be accessed quickly,
outside the hazardous material storage area and away from areas of likely
contamination.
Each employee will maintain his personal protective equipment in clean, working
condition at all times.
All equipment will be used and maintained in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions.
Equipment installed for body and eye wash will be checked properly for round the clock
operation.
253 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Treatment of Workers by Accidentally Affected of Chemical
Eye Contact:
Check for and remove any contact lenses. In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with
plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Cold water may be used. Get medical attention
immediately.
Skin Contact:
In case of contact, immediately flush skin with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes while
removing contaminated clothing and shoes. Cover the irritated skin with an emollient. Cold
water may be used. Wash clothing before reuse. Thoroughly clean shoes before reuse. Get
medical attention immediately.
Serious Skin Contact:
Wash with a disinfectant soap and cover the contaminated skin with an anti-bacterial cream.
Inhalation:
If inhaled, remove to fresh air. If not breathing, give artificial respiration. If breathing is
difficult, give oxygen. Get medical attention immediately.
Serious Inhalation:
Evacuate the victim to a safe area as soon as possible. Loosen tight clothing such as a
collar, tie, belt or waistband. If breathing is difficult, administer oxygen. If the victim is not
breathing, perform mouth-to-mouth resuscitation. WARNING: It may be hazardous to the
person providing aid to give mouth-to-mouth resuscitation when the inhaled material is toxic,
infectious or corrosive. Seek immediate medical attention.
Ingestion:
Do NOT induce vomiting unless directed to do so by medical personnel. Never give anything
by mouth to an unconscious person. Loosen tight clothing such as a collar, tie, belt or
waistband. Get medical attention if symptoms appear.
Treatment of Person Affected by Accidental Spillage
In the case of serious injuries
The treatment of serious injuries takes precedence over any other consideration.
1. Requests for medical assistance.
254 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
2. Advise the called assistance of the nature of the hazard, the amount of material, the
chemical form of the material and any other pertinent information such as location.
3. Direct someone to meet the emergency medical personnel.
4. Ensure that the victim is comfortable and cannot be further contaminated by other
chemicals.
In case of minor wounds not requiring hospitalisation

1. Get Trained First Aid worker to treat the affected person immediately.
2. Wash the contaminated wound with copious amounts of warm water.
3. Clean the affected area with swabs.
4. Encourage minor bleeding.
5. In the case of contaminated facial wounds, ensure that contamination does not
spread to the mouth, ears, eyes or nasal passages.
6. After decontamination, apply first aid dressing.
If the skin is intact

1. It is very important that skin contamination be removed immediately. Early, effective
removal of the contamination can help to reduce chemical exposure.
2. During skin decontamination, it is important to proceed from mild treatments to
harsher ones only if necessary. Abrasion or any other breaks of the skin must be
avoided, as these will allow rapid penetration of the chemicals. Therefore, hard
scrubbing is discouraged.
3. Flush contaminated area with copious amounts of water.
4. Exercise caution so as to not spread contamination to other areas of the body.
5. Rinse thoroughly. 6. Repeat wash/rinse procedure several times using a soft brush, if
necessary.
Eyes, Ears, Nose, and Mouth

1. Use eyewash station or shower to flush eyes, ears, and nose.
2. Rinse mouth with water, but do not to swallow the water.
Hair
1. Tilt head back so water doesn't run across face.
2. Be sure to close eyes and mouth during decontamination.
3. Wash gently with soap and warm water for 2-3 minutes in sink and rinse well.
Treatment of Clothing Contamination

1. In the event that personal clothing or lab coat becomes contaminated it is important
that it be removed quickly to reduce the persons exposure to the chemicals.
255 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
2. All contaminated clothing must be sealed in plastic bags to be removed.

3. A full emergency shower can be used for major chemical spills.
7.10.2
R I S K M I T I G AT I O N M E A S U R E T O M I N I M I Z E R I S K
Safety Communication/Motivation/Promotion
1. Safety signage and slogans will be displayed prominently in English and Bengali
languages.
2. Brief literature on safety and occupational health may be provided in the form of
small booklet to the employees in English and Bangla languages.
Safety Education And Training
1. There will be provision at the plant for induction training for new workers. The
assessment of the trainee is done to ensure the effectiveness of training.
2. Classroom trainings will be organized regularly to promote safety measures as well
as fire prevention and control among the employees.
3. Safety Day and Competitions on Safety are organized in the plant.
4. The system for safety suggestion schemes will be implemented at the plant.
First Aid
1. First aid boxes are available within various locations.
2. Trained first aiders are available in each shift at the plant.
Occupational Health
1. Occupational Health Center (OHC) will be established at the plant.
2. Antidotes for all hazardous chemicals will be available at occupational health center
at the plant.
3. Local hospitals will be empanelled to attend any emergency.
4. Well equipped ambulance facility will be available round the clock at OHC premises.
Handling of Hazards
1. Personal protective equipment (PPE) will be provided and PPE used by the workers
during handling of hazardous chemicals will be replaced after certain time.
2. If any spillage of hazardous chemicals, it will be cleaned and disposed as per
standard practiced.
3. Empty drums of hazardous chemicals will be neutralized immediate.
256 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
4. Workers engaged in handling of hazardous chemicals will be made aware of

properties of hazardous chemicals.
General Working Conditions
1. All the passages, floors and stairways will be maintained in good conditions.
2. The system will be made available to deal with any spillage of dry or liquid chemicals
at the plant.
3. Walkways will be always kept free from obstructions.
4. In the plant, precaution and instructions will be displayed at strategic locations in
Bangla and English Languages.
5. All pits, sumps will be properly covered or securely fenced.
6. Adequate ventilation will be provided in the work floor environment.
7. The work environment will be assessed and monitored regularly as local ventilation is
most effective method for controlling dust and gaseous emissions at work floor.
Safe Operating Procedures
1. Safe operating procedures will be available for mostly all hazardous materials,
operations and equipment.
2. The workers will be informed of consequences of failure to observe the safe
operating procedures.
Work Permit System
Work permit system will be followed at the plant.
Accident Reporting, Investigation And Analysis
Records for near-miss, incidents and accidents will be maintained and analyzed to
take precautionary measures. There is no reportable accident in past years at the
plant.
Safety Inspections and Internal Audit

1. At the plant, safety audit will be carried out by the Audit team comprising of safety
professional, technical services, maintenance and process personnel.
2. Safety surveillance and process safety review are being conducted on a routine
basis.
3. General safety inspections will be carried out regularly at the plant after expansion.
257 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Fire Protection
1. The fire fighting system and equipment will be provided, tested and maintained at the
plant after expansion as per relevant standards.
2. Smoke detectors to be provided at the plant after expansion and will be calibrated
and maintained properly.
3. At least one diesel pump will be available in the fire pump room.
4. Two reliable sources of power to fire water pumps will be available to ensured
reliable power supply in the event of emergency.
5. At last one hydrant point will be provided at every 30 m in the plant.
6. Two delivery hoses of 15 m length with nozzles will be provided in a hose box for
each hydrant point
7. Fire pumps will be run at least 5 minutes every week.
8. Emergency light will be available in fire pump room.
9. No obstructions will be allowed around fire hydrant points;
10. Adequate persons will be trained for use of fire extinguishers.
11. Fire alarms will be kept in working conditions;
12. There will be structured inspection system for fire fighting facilities and equipment.
13. Adequate numbers of fire extinguishers will be provided in production area.
14. Easy availability of fire extinguishers and trained personnel will be insured to operate
extinguishers.
Static Electricity
1. All equipment and storage tanks/containers of flammable chemicals will be bounded
and earthed properly.
2. Electrical pits will be maintained clean and covered.
3. Electrical continuity for earthing circuits will be maintained.
4. Periodic inspections will be done for earth pits and record will be maintained.
Hazardous Materials Handling
1. The workers will be made aware about the hazards associated with manual material
handling.
2. The workers will be made aware and trained about the use of personal protective
equipment (PPE) while handling hazardous chemicals.
258 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Communication System
1. Communication system including Public Address System will be provided in the
provided.
2. Communication facilities will be checked periodically for its proper functioning.
Safety Inspections
The system will be initiated for checklist based routine safety inspection and internal
audit of the plant. Safety inspection team will be formed from various disciplines and
departments.
Predictive and Preventive Maintenance
Predictive and preventive maintenance schedule will be followed in religious manner.
Control of Hazards During Maintenance

1. Safety permit system will be followed like hot work, cold work, confined space entry,
2. Preventive maintenance will be carried out as per schedule.
3. Adequate inventory of spare parts will be maintained.
4. Scaffoldings/Ladders are used.
5. Protective appliances will utilized for protection against fall, hand injury, head injury
etc.
6. Maintenance procedures will be developed and followed.
7. All physical hazards will be eliminated.
8. Lifting tackles will be maintained and examined periodically as per rules and
regulations.
9. Hand tools/power tools used will be of approved types and of good quality.
Colour Coding System
Colour coding for piping and utility lines will be followed in accordance with IS:
2379:1990.
Check for Trucks and Tankers

Before entering the tankers and trucks engaged in the transportation of hazardous
materials to the plant, following documents will be checked before allowing to enter the
plant premises:
1. Registration certificate for transportation of hazardous materials;
2. Deriver license to drive vehicles carrying hazardous materials;
259 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
3. Fitness Certificate;
4. Valid National permit;
5. TREM Card; and
6. Insurance papers.
Electrical Hazardous
1. Earth pits will be cleaned, covered and maintained in good condition.
2. Resistance test date for earth pit will be displayed.
3. The system will be introduced to ensure flame proof ness of flame proof fixtures.
4. Flame proof emergency lights will be made available in hazardous handing and
storage area.
5. During maintenance on electrical panel, electrical work permit will be followed and
Electrical Inspector approved authorized person will be available for maintenance.
6. Electrical maintenance will be carried under supervision of Electrical Inspector
approved authorized supervisors.
7.11
DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN
The Disaster Management Plan defines the organisation for the co-ordinated response
necessary in the event of a disaster. The organisation plan shows the structure of the
organisation and a brief overview of the tasks of personnel in the key roles. Role
descriptions are provided for all key personnel for prompt emergency response.
7.11.1
EMERGENCY RESPONSE PLAN
For combating any emergency/disaster, a well-rehearsed plan of co-ordination is required.

HAC has responsibility of safety of human, machine, material and environment within and
outside the premises. At the time of disaster/ emergency, everybody has a role to play.
Some have to save themselves, some have to save others and some key personnel will
have the responsibility of saving the entire things. In order to eliminate the chaos at the time
of disaster, a systematic plan of co-ordination has been prepared. It includes the general
instructions and the duties of the key personnel. For any clarification with the regard to the
content of this booklet, please contact EHS Department.
7.11.2
EMERGENCY CONTROL PLAN
An emergency can be defined as an accident that has potential to cause serious injury or
loss of life or damage to environment. It may cause extensive property damage and
adversely affect the environment as a whole.
260 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Emergency will generally manifest itself into the three basic forms i.e. fire, explosion or
release of toxic materials.
Principle:
Recognizing that accident are possible, assessment of possible consequences of the
credible accident scenarios and implementation of both onsite and offsite emergency
procedures to be carried out in the event of an emergency.
7.11.3
C O M M U N I C AT I O N F A C I L I T I E S
Mode of Alarm:
Work siren: 30 second on
Emergency / Disaster siren:
20
On
pause
20
on pause
20
on pause
20
on
pause
on
All Clear:
60 second on
7.11.4
DECLARING EMERGENCY
20
The person responsible for declaring the emergency (EMERGENCY MAIN CONTROLLER)
will assess the situation and declare emergency. The main emergency controller or person
authorized to give the emergency alarm will direct security to blow as maintained in mode of
alarm. The situation will also be immediately declared by coded siren which will help to
inform the people in the vicinity of the industry about the emergency situation. Local power
backup has been given through UPS (Un-Interrupted Power Supply).
7.11.5
i)
O F F I C E R S AU T H O R I Z E D T O G I V E D I S A S T E R AL A R M
Emergency Main Controller/ Production Head
ii) Emergency Site Controller/ Alternate Site Controller

Any of the above officers present at the scene of disaster are authorised to instruct directly
the timekeeper /security guard to blow the emergency / disaster siren.
7.11.5.1 S H I F T I N - C H A R G E O F C O N C E R N E D P L A N T
In the event of emergency in the plant after office hours and holidays the shift in charge in
the plant shall immediately rush to the scene of emergency and take over the incident
controller responsibility, till Incident controller arrive the spot.
261 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The communication to the important persons to be made by the admin officer in the shift to
the following persons through telephone & walky talky.
Throughout the factory there is an internal telephone system and a number of external
telephone connections. Some of these are direct and some going through the exchange.
The telephone exchange board is manned during general shift working hours i.e. 9.00 am to
5.00 pm from Monday to Saturday. Flame proof walky talky & mobile phones are available
with all departmental heads and key personnel round the clock.
As per the instructions of the officers who are authorised to give disaster scene, the Admin
Officer / security guard will operate the disaster siren as under:
20
i)
20
20
20
20 Seconds
Call out the other key personnel on walky talky or phone as per directory. If phone is
engage, call next person as mentioned in the priority list and try again. Do not waste time
on engaged phones.
ii) Being informed that situation is under control by the Emergency Main Controller /
Incident Controller, denote all clear by operating the siren as under:
60 Seconds on continuous
All key personnel are to perform their duties as per guidelines appended in this plant bit
these are mere guidelines only. Key personnel have to do their best to control and contain
the emergency as per situation demand.
7.11.5.2 T H E O U T S I D E E M E R G E N C Y S E R V I C E S
The outside emergency services will be contacted on telephone numbers displayed in
Emergency Control Center and given at the end of this Chapter. If the telephone does not
function, Police Station will be requested to pass on the message to District Administration
for further communication to the Emergency Services.
7.11.6
E M E R G E N C Y C O N T R O L C E N T E R (ECC)
Considering the wind direction at the moment, the Emergency Control Center will be
selected near the scene of Emergency at a safe location.
Time Office Gate (Walky Talky & Phone) will be Emergency Control Center. The Emergency
Control Center Room is the place under the control of Emergency Main Controller, where the
262 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
operations to handle the emergency are directed and co-ordinated. The center of Resources
Mobilisation, Informations and Media Communication, which is to be installed by the
Emergency Main Controller.
Functions
The Emergency control center will be equipped to receive & transmit information and
directions from Emergency Main Controller, Areas of the incident, emergency services,
public, mutual aids, private organisations and other sources.
In addition to the means of communication, the center will be equipped with relevant data as
well as with adequate communication facility and enable them to plan accordingly.
Essential Requirements:
i)
The Admin Room will work as directed by the Emergency Main Controller.
ii) It will be attended by the all key personnel.

iii) Adequate number of walky talky & external telephones. It is strongly recommended that
at least one will be ex-directory or capable of use for outgoing calls only. This will avoid
the telephone switchboard being overloaded with calls from anxious relatives. The latest
telephone directories will have a separate list of important numbers.
24-Hour Command Center
Location-EHS Department
i)
Walky talky & direct telephone number
ii) All relevant data including MSDS of all the raw materials and products, details and
phone no. of other command centres phone nos.
iii) Having detailed emergency response procedure with assigned responsibilities to
handle roadside accidents and off-site emergencies (Specially our consignment)
iv) Existing ECC of EHS Department having 24-hours well-trained emergency response
team to attend and respond to the call and inform/redirect to responsible person.
v) 24 x 7 hours availability of first aid services at command center.
vi) 24 x 7 hours availability of transportation and fire rescue team and well trained
experts in ready-to-go position within the approachable range.
vii) Emergency contact Number is to be printed on TREM Card/MSDS/Tankers
Emergency Information Panel.
263 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Requirements for Emergency Control Center

1)
Communication facilities
Walky Talky & direct Telephone number
Telephone for attending incoming calls
2)
Telephone numbers of
Plant intercom
Outside fire services
Medical services
Civil Authorities
3)
Address data
All key personnel
All nearby emergency services like fire, medical services etc.
4)
List of key personnels
Emergency Responders
First-aiders
Emergency contact Nos. display board to contact with other emergency command
centres in West Bengal.
5)
Documented Emergency plan
On Site
Off Site
Fire Manual
MSDS
6)
Office Stationary items
Writing Pad
Pen
Pencil
Camera or video to record incident and evidence of the cause and effect of the
actions to control the emergency.
Torches, umbrellas, raincoats etc
A Public Address System (PAS), a vehicle with loud speaker.

264 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
7.11.7
ROLES & RESPONSIBILITY OF KEY PERSONNEL
Emergency Main Controller (EMC Unit Head)
Assess the wind direction and select Emergency Control Center.
Proceed to the Emergency Control Center (ECC).
Ensure that the outside Emergency Services are called in and if required that nearby
firms are informed.
Ensure that key personnel are called in above list.
Maintain a speculative continuous review of possible development and assess these to

determine most probable course of events.
Direct the shutting down and evacuation of plants in consultation with the incident
controller.
Ensure that casualties are receiving adequate attention. Arrange for additional help if
required.
Ensure that relatives of injured are informed.
Ensure that Senior Officers of Civil Administration are informed.
Ensure personnel head count.
If emergency is prolonged arrange for the relief of personnel and the provisions of
catering facilities.
Issue authorised statements to the news media.
Ensure that proper consideration is given to the preservation of evidence.
Control rehabilitation of affected areas in cessation of emergency.
Emergency Site Controller (ESC Alternate Site Controller (ASC) Manager (EHS)
Proceed to the Emergency Area.
Assess the scale of Emergency.
Brief the situation to the Main Controller and Advice him to activate emergency
services.
Set up a communication point to contact with the ECC.
Direct all operation within the affected area.
Guide rescue and Fire fighting operation.
Ensure that affected area is searched for casualties area evacuated to the
appropriate assemble point.
265 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Shutting down nearby plants and evacuation of plant.
Report all significant development to the EMC at ECC.
Communication Controller HOD-HR & ADMIN
On hearing about the emergency report to EMC.
He will maintain the communication link with the incident controller.
Based on the information received he will interact with EMC and communicate the
further action to the concerned.
Maintains contact with the fire fighting crew, rescue team, security, first aid
requirements, evacuation requirements etc.
Maintain the inventory of items in the control center
Ensures availability of runners in case of power failure
He also obtains the prevailing meteorological data from the local offices.
He maintains log of the events.
All arrangements for transport.
Co-ordinates action for additional vehicle requirements and ensure proper condition
of ambulance. Also be responsible for making available cash in case of need.
Maintain the required following Inventory in the ECC:

i.
Emergency Control Plan
ii.
Site Layout Plan
iii.
Assembly Point List
iv.
List of Telephone Nos. of Civil Administration and other Govt. Authorities
v.
List of Internal Telephones, Walky talky channels & Mobile Phone Nos.
vi.
Note pads, pens, pencils to record messages received and any instruction of or
delivery by runner.
vii.
Name of File for list of employees on duty
viii.
List of Key personnel
Emergency Electrical & Instrumentation

(ELECTRICAL & INSTRUMENTATION)
Controller
(EEIC)
Manager
On hearing the emergency siren, proceed to electric station and report to the EMC &
ESC/ASC on walky talky/ phone.
Ensure availability of Emergency power and normal running of Emergency electrical

installation e.g. Fire pump, tube well pumps etc.
266 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Inform the incident controller of any likely situation that may affect continuous water
supply.
Ensure that all required personnel of Utilities section have reached to their respective
work place.
Be present with walky talky /mobiles to set up communication with all controllers.
Emergency Engineering Controller (EEC)Manager Engineering/Utility
On hearing Emergency alarm, proceed to the plant and report to the ESC/ASC.
Be present / or depute somebody near engineering services to set up communication

with the ESC/ASC.
Stop all hot work and other maintenance work ensuring that it is safe.
Help in controlling the situation when required by the ESC/ASC.
Ensure that all non-essential worker/contractors workers have reached the assemble
point.
Utility Services
Shift Engg. (Utilities) on hearing Emergency Siren.

Ensure that the fire pump is started to maintain uninterrupted water supply.
Ensure that the tube well pumps are running.
Inform the incident controller of any likely situation that may affect continuous water
supply.
Emergency
(STORES)
Commercial
Services
Controller
(ECSC)
Manager
(COMM)/SI
Stop the filling of all truck tankers and close all the valves properly.
Send the filled / partially filled tankers to the parking.
Ensure that all truck drivers/ helpers and other personnel have reached the assembly
points.
All trucks/ tankers which are on the way to the plant/ to the gate will be parked at
material gate or outside.
No truck/ tanker movement will be allowed during the emergency
Ensure that no commercial vehicle is parked on the road.
Ensure no hindrance to the emergency vehicles movement.
267 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
STORES:
On hearing Emergency Alarm, immediately report to Emergency Services Coordinator and be in touch with Incident Controller.
Ensure supply/issue of any item / equipment / material required for handling

emergency.
Medical Services Admin Officer/Manager
On hearing Emergency alarm proceeds to First Aid center and report to the EMC &
ESC/ASC on phone.
Render medical treatment to the injured.
Pharmacist will accompany the ambulance to carry the injured from the emergency
scene to First Aid center if required.
Keep inform to the Emergency services co-ordinator regarding availability of

medicines, oxygen cylinders and other facilities.
Transfer affected persons to the nearby hospitals.
Coordinate with EMC & ESC/ASC continuously.
Emergency Responders/Coordinators
On hearing Emergency alarm, proceed to the affected area and report the ESC/ASC.
Take instructions from ESC/ASC.
Organise necessary safety equipment to the disaster site.
Assess the situation and plan to the situation.
Carryout the operation in an organised manner to control the emergency.
Implement tactical assignments
Ensure proper selection and use of PPE
Continually evaluate situation, status and safety
Monitor personnel fatigue and stress
Aware of control zone locations
Assure proper positioning of personnel
Ensure water supply and backup systems are sufficient
Ensure decontamination of exposed equipment and PPE
Mobilize rescue equipment and conduct search and rescue operations if necessary
Coordinate with First Aid Team

268 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Send the injured to first aid center by the ambulance.
Ensure that safety measures/personal protective equipment is initiated.
Replacing of used breathing apparatus and other safety equipment.
Ensure the fire extinguishers/fire pumps water supply is normal.
Ensure safety of Fire Fighting / Rescue Personnel
Security Services Security Officer
On hearing emergency siren, report to EMC at ECC.
Ensure that plant security measures are effective.
Ensure all filled / partially filled tankers are taken to parking area.
Suspend all normal gate functions (including material gate) and ensure that plant
security measures are effective.
Send Maximum security guards under a responsible person to the scene of disaster
to help the emergency responder team. Advise them to report/take the instruction
from ESC/ASC.
Make arrangements to take out visitors.
Keep the road clear for vehicles.
Direct outside agencies who were called e.g. fire brigades to the disaster scene.
All gates to be closed for personnel from outside.
Transport Services Admin Officer
On hearing emergency siren, proceed to main gate and report to EMC.
Alert all drivers to be ready on drivers seat of their vehicles at the parking site.
Send vehicles on the advice of ESC/ASC.
Keep one vehicle ready for use on the advice of EMC.
Arrange for catering facilities as per advice of Emergency Services Coordinator.
Abatement Coordinator Next Senior in EHS
He shall keep watch on entire emergency operation.
He shall ensure that water, air and any other disaster fighting operation does not
pollute the environment.
If required he shall get the necessary test done on air/water discharge through ETP
Lab/QC or through outside test laboratory.
269 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Make all possible arrangement for preventing or mitigating, the effects of the incident
on the environment. This may include activities like containment of spillage,
diversion of effluents through ETP, decision between air pollution and water pollution
etc.
Shall investigate the cause of disaster and submit a report to management.
7.11.8
E M E R G E N C Y AS S E M B L Y P O I N T
During the times of emergency, if an area or more than one area needs to be shut down and
the personnel required to vacate such area / areas. Then, those personnel on instructions
from plant / department will move to any one of the assembly point depending up on the
wind direction.
In case of vapour nuisance at these places go to any other safe assemble point.
Please keep roads clear for vehicle movement.
HOD's and shift in charges will ensure that all personnel from their plants have reached the
assembly point.
Emergency assembly points are:
Emergency Assembly Point-1 located near main gate
Emergency Assembly Point-2 located at near boiler shed
7.11.9
MOCK & FIRE DRILL
HAC shall be conducted mock drill once in six months & fire drill shall be conducted once in
two months on regular basis for any emergency handling salutation as per mock drill
procedure.
7.11.10
C O N T R O L L I N G T H E S I T U AT I O N
Intimation of pre-emergency situation in time

Any person observes fire/massive release of chemical from any pipe line/ equipment/
storage tank/building will immediately inform EHS or Security Gate.
Decision of declaring emergency at appropriate time
Personnel authorized to give disaster siren will make overall assessment of the situation and
if he thinks that the emergency can occur, he will inform time office to declare the
emergency.
270 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Quick communication of Emergency

Quick emergency will be communicated by operating emergency siren installed at time office
in the wailing pitch. Outside Emergency services will be contacted over telephone or
wireless sets available at local police station through District Authorities.
Coordinating with outside emergency services
The Emergency Control Center (ECC) will make a close coordination with the District
Authorities and Police for getting help at the site, evacuating offsite area, controlling road
and rail traffic in reasonable time. Further Manager (EHS) and Manager (HR-admin) will
keep effective coordination with Fire/Rescue and Medical Services respectively on their
arrival.
Emergency Shutdown of Process plants
As soon as In-charges of the plant (Plant Head during General shift hours and Shift Incharges beyond General Shift hours) are aware of the Emergency declared by sounding
emergency siren, they would undertake emergency shutdown of their plants immediately.
Utilities and Fire pump will continue to run without interruption. Similarly the loading/
unloading operation of flammable liquids will also be suspended in commercial area. Area
In-charges will immediately stop all hot work.
Evacuation to Assembly Points
As soon as the emergency alarm sounds people in the process plants, workshops,
warehouse etc. will evacuate to their respective assembly points after taking emergency
shutdown of their plants. If there is an eminent danger, the evacuation will be carried out
immediately.
Handling of leakage before ignition and its containment
Minimizing or stopping or containing the leakage will be achieved mainly by closing the
emergency isolation valves, transferring the content from the leaking vessel to other
storage tanks, containing the leakage or diverting it to a safe location etc.
In order to minimise the ignition sources, efforts will be made to stop hot jobs, shutdown
furnaces, switch off ovens and heaters.
271 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Handling of Flammable Liquid fire and its containment
Efforts will be made to cut off the supply of flammable liquid to fire by closing emergency
isolation valves.
Cooling down the structure and equipment exposed to fire or radiant heat by activating
water spray systems.
Making an all out effort to control fire by appropriate fire extinguishing media like Carbon
Dioxide, Dry Chemical Powder and Foam.
Clearance of the Area Around Hazard Installation
Ensuring that the passage is clear to facilitate free movements of emergency vehicles.
Keeping the crowd away from the site of incident.
Handling of Victims
Manager-HR & Admin will arrange to transfer the casualties from the effected area to the
first aid. He will get help in this activity from the first aid trained personnel and the external
medical aid services. If required the injured personnel will be sent to hospitals, medical care
centers, nursing homes etc.
Accounting of Personnel
The in-charge of concerned area, after escorting people to the safe Assembly points will
note down the details of the regular employees (Name, Designation and Employee code),
Contractors workers (Name, Contractors name and address) and visitors (Name, Address
and age). Concerned Sis will provide assistance in taking down details of the evacuees. The
information will be sent to the ECC where factory manager will compare this information with
the actual attendance to make final accounting.
Access to Records
Important records are kept in library/filling cabinets. These filling cabinets are marked so that
access to the valuable records becomes easy.
Termination of Emergency
After the hazard emergency is brought under control and there are no threats as such or the
effects of the emergency are over, the Emergency Main Controller having assessed the
overall situation will announce termination of emergency. On his instruction all clear alarm
will be sounded. The District Authorities of 24 Parganas (South) District and other external
272 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
agencies will be communicated on telephone or by special messengers about the

termination of emergency.
Public Relations
If an incident occurs, the Emergency Main Controller will issue the news of the emergency to
the media and provide information what he can. This will reduce the likelihood of erroneous
reports. The Emergency Main Controller will be the sole authoritative source of information
about emergency. However, he may provide accurate information on emergency to the
general public through spokesman.
Rehabilitation
If need arises temporary arrangements for stay to those affected will be made till permanent
rehabilitation is stored.
Re-entry Procedure
The employees injured in the disaster will be allowed to resume their duties after providing
medical fitness certificates as per the prevailing rules of the company.
Emergency Shutdown Procedure
Detailed emergency shutdown procedures for each process plant has already been laid
down in the respective plant SOPs, which is readily available with respective plant Incharges. Moreover, all plant personnel have a thorough knowledge and experience of these
procedures for immediate action as and when required.
Action off-site
Informing the police, voluntary organisation, local administration for rescue operation and for
controlling and regulating the traffic in order to save the mobile population form effect of gas
leakage etc.
In the event of emergency, telephone or messenger will inform local police station. The
District administration and police of North 24 Parganas District may also be contacted by
telephone or over wireless set available in the local police station. Similarly the out-side
emergency services will be contacted on telephone or the district authorities will be
requested to pass on the massage. For regulating the traffic, local police will be contacted as
mentioned earlier.
273 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 7.9: E MERGENCY T ELEPHONE N UMBERS

Sl.No.
Designation
District Collector, 24 Parganas

(North) District
Addl.District Magistrate (General)
SDO, Barasat Sadar
Superintendent of Police, 24
Parganas (North) District
Chief Medical Officer of Health,
24-Parganas (North), Barasat
Fire Station (Barasat)
Contact Nos.
Tele (Office)
Tele (Residence )
03325523662
03325846200
03325846201
03325626177 (Fax)
03325846205
03325842212 (Fax)
03325846215
03325842286 (Fax)
033 2542 3055/2538 9202
033 2552 3657, 2584
7173 (Fax)
033 2552-3129,
033 2562-4789
2542 3444, 2552 4970
03325846209
03325523784
033 2562 1282
+91 9433355926
+91 8584027207,
+91 8584027208
Ambulance, Barasat
033 25520329
Barasat District Hospital
033 25523228
Plant Head
033 3041 5404
+91 9831095310
033 2453 1902 (Fax)
+91 9836544755
274 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
7.12
MSDS O F F O R M AL D E H Y D E
275 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
276 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
277 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
278 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
279 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
280 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
281 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
282 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
7. 1 3
MSDS O F P H E N O L
283 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
284 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
285 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
286 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
287 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
288 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
CHAPTER 8
PROJECT BENEFITS
289 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
C HAPTER 8: P ROJECT B ENEFITS

8.1
GENERAL
The objective of the project is to meet the market requirements of Phenol-Formaldehyde

(PF) Resin, Melamine Formaldehyde (MF) Resin, Urea Formaldehyde (UF) Resin, Furan
Resin for manufacturing of various products like laminates, steel casting, etc.
The benefits of PF, MF, UF, Furan resin are as given below:
Urea formaldehyde (UF) resin is one of the mainstays in the building and construction
industry. Nearly 95% of UF resins are used as a binder or adhesive in particleboard
and medium density fiberboard for composite panels, roofing tiles, hardwood plywood,
and coatings.
In addition, UF is thermosetting, providing strength, durability, and other desirable

physical attributes to the end-products. Once shaped into a permanent form, usually
with heat and pressure and with a curing agent, a thermosetting resin cannot be
remelted or reshaped because the basic polymeric component has undergone an
irreversible chemical change.
Phenol formaldehyde (PF) resin is another mainstay in the building and construction
industry. Nearly 75% of PF resins are used in this end use for applications like
structural panels, insulation binder, and laminates.
The largest economic benefit of MF comes from its paper impregnation applications in
laminates.
Other materials, mostly alternate resins, can usually be substituted for formaldehydebased materials in most other uses, but they are often more costly to use and may
result in reduced consumer benefits because the products made from them are inferior
to formaldehyde-based products in one or more ways.
The sand molds of Furan Resin do not need to be oven dry, so it shortens the period of
production and save energy. The sizes of metals castings are accurate, the outline of
the metal castings is clear, the surface of the metal castings is smooth, the appearance
quality is good and the micro-structure is compact reducing the intensity of labour.
290 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
8.2
DIRECT BENEFITS
PF, UF, MF, Furan resin are basic building block of many important industries.
The production of these resins shall meet the market demands and shall open new
markets.
8.3
SOCIO-ECONOMIC BENEFITS
No resettlement and rehabilitation issue is involved in the proposed plant as the plot was
purchased as industrial plot surrounded by industries.
More business opportunity to boost in area.
Enterprise social commitment benefits to near by villages.
Greenbelt development will significantly improve the ecological conditions of the area.
8.4
EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
The construction work & commissioning and operation of the proposed plant will require
man-power and resources. The proposed plant proposes to employ local work force for
these phases.
The proposed plant may lead to slight growth in the social status & improvement of the
quality of life in the surrounding area.
Considering the size of the project, the manpower requirement during operation will be
39 contractual persons.
8.5
Priority will be given to the local people in employment.

ECONOMIC BENEFITS
Revenue in the form of taxes will be generated from the plant production.
The relatively short-lived economic benefits of the construction phase are likely to be
experienced in local area for the duration of construction phase as workers make
everyday purchases from local traders in nearby areas.
Flow-on economic impacts will be experienced in other sectors of economy as a result of

purchase of construction materials and the payment of wages and salaries to the
personnel engaged in the plant activities.
291 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
CHAPTER 9
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
292 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
C HAPTER 9: E NVIRONMENTAL M ANAGEMENT P LAN

9.1
INTRODUCTION
Any industrial development is associated with both positive and negative impacts on the
environment. The negative impacts from an industry should not hinder industrial
development but they should be properly mitigated and managed. The proper Environmental
Management Plan (EMP) should be prepared for the proposed industrial plant activities to
minimize negative impacts on the basis of prevailing environmental conditions and likely
impacts of proposed activity on various environmental parameters. Environmental
Management Plan will also facilitate monitoring of environmental parameters.
Environmental Management Plan is required for the formulation, implementation and
monitoring of environmental mitigation measures. EMP includes schemes for proper and
scientific treatment and disposal mechanism for polluted emission, effluent, sewage, solid
and hazardous wastes. Apart from this, landscaping and green belt development, safety
aspect of the workers, noise control, etc. are also included in the EMP. Adequate budgetary
provisions are also made for EMP implementation. The plan for implementation of
environmental management plan should be framed. The detailed capital and recurring (per
annum) budget should be earmarked for pollution control/monitoring equipment; operation
and maintenance of pollution control facilities.
9.2
P U R P O S E O F E N V I R O N M E N T A L M A N A G E M E N T P L A N (EMP)
Various purposes of the Environmental Management Plan at the proposed plant are:
To treat and dispose of likely pollutants viz liquid, gaseous and solid & hazardous
wastes so as to meet statutory requirements with appropriate technology,
To support and implement resin proposed plant to achieve environmental standards

and to improve the methods of environmental management,
To promote green-belt development,
To encourage good working conditions for employees,
To implement best practices for environmental management,
To reduce fire and accident hazards,
Budgeting and allocation of funds for Environmental Management System,

293 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
To adopt cleaner production technology and waste minimization program.
The proposed synthetic resin manufacturing unit of M/s Hindustan Adhesives and Chemicals
(HAC) will have some pollution potential to cause both short term and long-term
environmental degradation, if suitable mitigation measures area not implemented. While the
industrial development is indispensable for the socio-economic development of the area, the
environmental aspects can never be ignored because of widespread and far-reaching
environmental degradation. Along with control and regulatory measures, mitigation
measures will yield fruitful results at proposed plant of HAC towards environment
management.
With the availability of cost effective advanced technology and innovative environment
management practices, the EMP can act as an effective management tool to provide
management solutions to all environmental pollution concerns including that of associated
regulatory compliance.
9.3
E N V I R O N M E N T , H E A L T H A N D S A F E T Y (EHS)
It is of utmost important for HAC to construct and operate proposed plant in a manner that it
will promote the protection of the occupational health, safety, environment and welfare of its
employees and others involved in or affected by its plant operations and address
environmental concerns regarding sustainable development.
To be responsive and responsible enterprise, the HAC will develop an organizational

culture of Environment, Health & Safety excellence.
HAC is committed to achieve high levels of performance in Environment, Health & Safety for
which an EHS policy will be prepared and implemented. The EHS policy of the HAC will be
continuously reviewed and improved which is essential for the future success.
9.4
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL
Apart from having an Environmental Management Plan, it is also necessary to have a

permanent organizational set up charged with the task of ensuring its effective
implementation of environmental mitigation measures and to conduct environmental
monitoring. The proposed plant will appoint Environmental Management Cell to keep a close
watch on the performance of the pollution control equipments, emissions from the sources
and the quality of surrounding environment in accordance with the monitoring program.
The Environmental Management Cell will also include the safety cell for observing,
inspecting and regulating the safety measures inside the plant premise. The Environmental
294 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Management Cell will be responsible for maintaining records of all the data, documents and
information in line with the statutory requirements. The major duties and responsibilities of
Environmental Management Cell shall be as given below:
To implement the Environmental Management Plan,
To assure regulatory compliance with all relevant rules and regulations,
To ensure regular operation and maintenance of pollution control devices,
To minimize environmental impacts of operations as by strict adherence to the EMP,
To initiate environmental monitoring as per approved schedule.
Review and interpretation of monitored results and corrective measures in case

monitored results are above the specified limit.
Maintain
documentation
of
good
environmental
practices
and
applicable
environmental laws as ready reference.
Maintain environmental related records.
Coordination with regulatory agencies, external consultants, monitoring laboratories.
Maintain log of public complaints and the action taken.
Organizational Structure of Environmental Management Cell is shown below in Figure 9.1.
F IGURE 9.1: O RGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE OF E NVIRONMENTAL M ANAGEMENT C ELL

295 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
9.5
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE
9.5.1 EMP F O R W A T E R E N V I R O N M E N T
During the construction phase, following mitigation measures will be taken as a part EMP:
Excavation will be carried during dry season.
Proper and sufficient sanitary facilities will be provided to construction workers to

maintain all hygienic conditions at site.
Care will be taken during construction work and will not create any obstruction/dips
which can lead to accumulation of water within premises leading to undesirable
consequences like health and hygiene problems etc.
9.5.2 EMP F O R A I R E N V I R O N M E N T
Construction phase will be for a short period and hence the impacts will also be temporary
for a short period. During construction activities, mainly emission of dust, gases from
movement of vehicle, excavation and construction activity is expected. However, following
measures will be taken to reduce such emission:
Water will be sprinkled on loose top soil to prevent re-suspension of dust into
ambient air due to movement of vehicles etc.
Separate civil construction material storage yard will be constructed within the site
and it will be covered.
Possibility of raising green belt will also be explored.
Transport vehicles and construction equipments / machineries will be properly

maintained to reduce air emissions.
Vehicles and equipments will be periodically checked for pollutant emissions against
stipulated norms. All vehicles Pollution under Control (PUC) Certificate shall be
checked regularly. Idle running of vehicles will be minimized during material loading /
unloading operations.
Exhaust vent of D.G. set will be kept at proper height to ensure quick dispersal of
gaseous emissions.
All construction workers will be provided appropriate PPEs like dust mask, ear plug,
helmet, safety belt etc. and made to wear them during working hours.
296 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
9.5.3 EMP F O R S O L I D W A S T E M AN A G E M E N T
Main solid waste generation during construction phase should be rubble, broken, packing,
debris, steel scrap, wooden scrap, gravel, etc. However, these materials will be inert in
nature and will not result into leaching of any substance or constituent. These wastes will be
properly sorted and shall be used within premises for filling of low lying areas. Wooden
scrap, steel scrap will be given to scrap dealers. On completion of civil work, all debris etc.
shall be completely removed from site to avoid any incompatibility with future use.
9.5.4 EMP F O R N O I S E E N V I R O N M E N T
The following mitigation measures will be implemented during construction period to mitigate
adverse impacts:
Construction machinery and vehicles shall undergo periodic maintenance to keep

them in good working condition.
All machineries to be used for construction purpose shall be of highest standard of

reputed make and compliance of noise pollution control norms by these equipments
will be emphasized by company.
Acoustic enclosure shall be provided to D.G. set to control the noise during
construction activity.
Construction workers working in high noise areas will be provided appropriate PPEs
like ear muffs and made to wear them during working hours.
Raising green belt along with construction activity will be carried out so as to serve as
a noise barrier.
9.5.5 EMP F O R S O I L & L A N D E N V I R O N M E N T

The following steps will be taken to take care of impact of construction activity on plant land
area:
On the completion of civil works, all debris etc. will be completely removed from site
to avoid any incompatibility with future use.
Other hazardous materials like diesel etc. will be properly stored and handled to
prevent any spillage on land.
All the wastes will be stored at a designated site within the premises to prevent
scattered discharge on land.
297 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
9.5.6 EMP F O R E C O L O G I C A L E N V I R O N M E N T
During the construction and post construction phase, no tree will be cut. Therefore, no
impact is anticipated on terrestrial ecology. 33% area has been allocated for green belt
development.
9.5.7 EMP F O R S O C I O -E C O N O M I C E N V I R O N M E N T
The following steps will be taken to take care of impact of construction activity on plant land
area:
Local people from nearby villages of the surroundings of the site shall be employed
for construction work to the maximum extent possible.
Proper sanitary and drinking water facilities will be provided to workers living in the
construction camps within the premises of the Proposed Plant.
Sanitation and Healthcare at Workers Camps

The following measures will be taken to ensure health aspects of workers:
The contractor shall install adequate lavatories and baths at the construction site for
workers.
Community canteen to be made and contractor to provide gas cylinders and gas
stoves.
Quarterly health check-ups of construction workers should be organized at workers

colony.
9.6
Adequate provision of water supply should be made at workers colony.
The living space at workers camp should meet the norms of Indian Labour Law.
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR OPERATION PHASE
Operation phase of the proposed resin plant being longer in duration and because of its
potential to create continuous environmental impacts is quite important from the impact point
of view. Comprehensive and effective EMP has been prepared for implementation to safeguard environmental concerns during operation phase.
9.6.1 EMP F O R A I R E N V I R O N M E N T
The air pollutants from the plant can be classified broadly in to particulate matter and gases,
like SO2, NO2 and SPM, etc. flue stacks and process operations. The measure to control air
298 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
pollution will ensure the ambient air quality standards as laid down by Control Pollution
Control Board and West Bengal Pollution Control Board. The system proposed for air
pollution control will provide acceptable environment condition in the working area of the
plant.
The following measures are proposed to mitigate negative impact on air quality due to
operation phase of the proposed plant on the surrounding air environment.
Height of stacks of DG set and boiler will be as per statutory requirement. All the
stacks shall have stack monitoring facility consisting of sampling port-hole, platform
and access ladder.
Transport vehicles shall be properly maintained to reduce air emissions.
Change of raw materials will be carried in such manner fugitive emissions are lesser.
Regular maintenance of machinery in order to control emissions.
A good housekeeping and proper maintenance shall be practiced in the industry.
Fugitive Emissions
From the proposed HAC plant, fugitive emissions will be generated from handling of phenol,
formaldehyde and other hazardous chemical handling. Fugitive emissions may also be
generated from leak of hazardous materials during transfer through piping, especially during
the transfer of phenol & formaldehyde from tanker to storage tanks. Some fugitive emissions
may be generated during charging of raw materials in the reactors.
The following measures will be adopted for control of fugitive emissions:
Dust masks provided to working personnel,
All production activities are to be carried out in closed conditions to minimize

possibility of fugitive emission,
Use of closed circuit system for all the process operations,
The plant set-up is a MS structure with shed, which can provide sufficient ventilation
to reduce work exposure,
Regular predictive and preventive maintenance will be carried for piping and pumps
to eliminate risk of leak and subsequently fugitive emissions,
299 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The fugitive emissions in terms of formaldehyde & phenol will be controlled by proper
storage and handling method preferably equipped with leak proof pipes,
Supervision shall be done at time of transfer of phenol & formaldehyde from tankers
and any kind of spill, leak will be prevented by immediate actions,
Work place monitoring at storage area as well as production area will be conducted
and necessary actions for keeping risk free workplace environment will be taken on
regular basis,
Necessary PPEs like face mask with charcoal filter as well as emergency facility shall
be provided at storage area of Phenol & formaldehyde.
9.6.2 EMP F O R W A T E R E N V I R O N M E N T
The mitigation measures for water environment for the operation phase of proposed resin
plant are as given below:
It should be ensured that, water consumption should not exceed than committed
requirement by installing water meter.
Surplus water will be stored in water tank for future use.
Wastes generated from the plant will be collected and disposed in environmental
sound manner.
Regular operation and maintenance of ETP should be done to achieve CPCB norms.
Maximum reuse and recycle of water shall be carried out and zero discharge shall be
followed to reduce fresh water consumption.
The effluent generated at the plant will be collected and treated in well designed
ETP.
Treated waste water will be evaporated in evaporator. Sludge generated from

evaporator and settler will be disposed to West Bengal Waste Management Group,
Haldia.
Hazardous waste generated from sludge from ETP will also have potential source of
surface and ground water contamination in the event of improper disposal.
Sewage generated by plant personnel will treated in septic tank followed by soak pit.
300 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Rain Water Harvesting

At the proposed plant, runoff generated during rains will be harvested by surface storage.
Run off from the proposed project site is calculated using rational formula:
Q=CxIXA
Q = Run-off in m3/hr
A = Catchment Area (sqm)
C = Coefficient of run-off
I = Intensity of Rainfall in mm/yr
Rainfall Data:
Intensity of rainfall (in mm) based on IMD Data = 1600 mm/year
No. of rainy days = 81
Rainfall per day = (1600/81) = 19.75 say 20 mm/day
1. Roof Top
Catchment area in sqm = 768.9 sqm
Coefficient of run-off = 0.95
Therefore, runoff = 0.95 x 0.020 x 768.9= 14.61 m3/day
2. Open Area & Road
Open Area & Road Area in sqm = 2185
Therefore, runoff = 0.50 x 0.020 x 2185 = 21.85 m3/day
3. Unpaved Surface (Green Area)
Green area in sqm = 1821
Therefore, runoff = 0.15 x 0.020 x 1821 = 14.61 + 21.85 + 5.46 = 41.92 m3/day
Hence, total rain water available = 41.92 m3/day
Volume of rain water will be stored in underground recharge tanks (for 7 days storage) =
(41.92 m3/day x 7 days) = 293.44 m3
Therefore, 2 underground tanks each (7.5 m x 7.5m x 3m = 168.75 m3) will be constructed
for runoff storage and reuse.
301 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
9.6.3 EMP F O R N O I S E E N V I R O N M E N T
During the operational phase, noise generation shall be from D.G set, machinery, equipment
pumps, motors, etc. However, implementation of the EMP for the noise can maintain the
noise level within the CPCB standards following precautionary measures should be adopted
to control the noise level.
The mitigation measures to control noise levels during operation phase are as given below:
DG set will be fitted with acoustic enclosures to control the noise.
Ear muff and plugs to workers working relatively high noise areas.
Green belt development is planned for the attenuation of noise pollution and to
maintain ambient noise quality within the statutory limit.
The operation of high noise generating equipment shall be restricted during the night
time.
All the equipment in the synthetic resin manufacturing unit will be designed/ operated
in such a way that the noise level shall not exceed 85 dB(A) as per the requirement
of OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration).
Proper maintenance of pump, machinery, blower etc to control noise levels.
9.6.4 EMP F O R S O L I D / H AZ A R D O U S W A S T E
Used Oil as hazardous waste as per the Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and
Transboundary Movement) Rule, 2008 generated from the proposed plant, at the time of
maintenance of DG set will be stored in drums and sent to registered recyclers West Bengal
Waste Management Group, Haldia for treatment and reuse.
Hazardous waste i.e. used lubricating oil will be stored in 200 liter MS barrels & Used
oil & lubricants will be sold to WBPCB authorized re-processors on monthly basis to
avoid the storage impact in factory premises.
Records of waste generation reuse and disposal to be maintained in log book as per
the format of Form-3 as per amended Hazardous Waste Management Rules 2008.
Transportation of hazardous waste should be governed as per the guidelines and

accompanied with Form-13.
Annual returns of the disposal of wastes in Form-4 and Form-13 should be submitted
regularly to the local office.
302 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Proper handling, loading & unloading of waste to avoid spillage and contamination
The raw material and solid waste storage area will be constructed with double
layered R.C.C with HDPE lining for prevention of leachate. Periodic monitoring of
ground water will be done to estimate the heavy metal content and toxic elements.
The storage area will be top covered from precipitation.
Above stated Hazardous wastes will be stored separately in a Hazardous Waste

Storage Area within the factory premises clearly demarcated with all applicable
warning sign. It will have non -percolating R.C.C. floor with leachate collection pits
and covered roof. The storage area will have proper illumination and ventilation and
equipped with fire extinguisher device wherever required. A sign - board will be put
out-side the storage area marked Hazardous Waste Storage Area and
Danger.
Non - hazardous dried bio-sludge from septic tank will be rich in nutrients and hence
will be used as fertilizer and nutrient within premises for gardening.
Maintenance of records for generation and disposal of the entire solid and hazardous
waste to be ensured and the storage duration onsite should not be more than 90
days.
Other hazardous wastes generated from the proposed plant and their disposals are given
Table 9.1:
Sl.
Description Category Source
Quantity
Mode of Disposal
No
Hazardous Waste
1.
Used Oil/
5.1
Spent oil
DG
sets/ 3 Litre/ month
Maintenance

West
Bengal
Waste

2.
Discarded
33.1
Stores
50 Kg/ month
Plastic Bags
3.
ETP sludge

34.3
ETP
50 Kg/ month

4.
Cotton
5.2
Maintenance
20 Kg/ month
Waste
5.
Discarded
Drums/

33.3
Stores
300
Collection,
storage
Nos./Year
decontamination
or
and
Reuse
303 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
Description Category Source
Quantity
Mode of Disposal
No
Container

vendor
9.6.5 EMP F O R E C O L O G I C A L E N V I R O N M E N T
9.6.5.1
PERIPHERAL GREENBELT AND LANDSCAPING
The peripheral green belt will be developed at the proposed plant. Selection of the plant
species will be based on their adaptability to the existing geographical conditions and the
vegetation composition of the forest type of the region. During the development of the green
belt within the proposed plant area, it has to be emphasized that those native plant species
should be planted which are having good ornamental values and are fast growing with
excellent canopy cover. Tree plantation is one of the effective remedial measures to control
the air pollution and noise pollution. It also causes aesthetics and climatologically
improvement of area as well as sustains and supports the biosphere. It is an established fact
that trees and vegetation acts as a vast natural sink for the gaseous as well as particulate air
pollutants due to enormous surface area of leaves. It also helps to attenuate the ambient
noise level. The plantation around the pollution sources control the air pollution by filtering
the air particulate and interacting with gaseous pollutant before it reaches to the ground.
Tree plantation also acts as buffer and absorber against accidental release of pollutants.
9.6.5.2
GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT
A green belt is provided to mitigate various emissions. Green belts are strip of trees and
shrubs planted in rows to reduce air velocity there by facilitating settling of the particles on
the leaf surfaces and allowing absorption of the pollutant gases. It also serves to cool the
atmosphere by transpiration from the leaf surface and also provide habitat for birds, reptiles
and insects.
The advantages of a green belt are given below:
Greenbelts are important habitats for birds, which add to the aesthetic value of the
environment. Generally, birds prefer to make their habitat, nest, on trees. Further trees
provide shade and hiding places to wild life.
Greenbelt helps to restore the ecological balance.
Greenbelt helps in prevention of soil erosion.
Greenbelt helps to improve the aesthetics in the area.
304 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The greenbelt also diminishes noise pollution by absorbing high degree of noise due to
their spongy foliar crown.
Trees are the most important sinks for air pollution. Trees also absorb noise, act as barrier. It
will improve the ecology and aesthetics of the area. They have major long-term impacts on
soil quality and the ground water table. The green belt will be developed around dust
generating areas like raw material storage area, conveyors of raw material handling.
Approximately 300 plants will be planted during the construction phase. A greenbelt
development plan will be prepared and implemented along with the project.
The main objective of the greenbelt is to provide a barrier between the plant and the
surrounding areas. The greenbelt helps to capture the fugitive emissions and to
attenuate the noise generated in the plant apart from improving the aesthetics of the
plant site.
The Greenbelt will be adequately sized, 33% of plant area i.e. 0.45 Acres and will
have a suitable density so as to mitigate the effects of emissions from the plant. The
treated effluents from the plants will be utilized for the greenbelt development.
Total number of tree to be planted around 300 nos. The greenbelt area will be
developed within plant boundary and at the periphery of the company premises.
Thus, the proposed project will have significant positive impact on the ambient air &
will reduce pollution load from environment.
The landscaping of the plant will be carried out. Roads for vehicular movement will
be paved and adequate mitigation measures will be provided to prevent fugitive
emissions.
It is to be noted that only indigenous species will be planted. The species will be selected in
consultation with local District Forest Officer (DFO). Mixed plantations will be done keeping
optimum spacing between the saplings. Kitchen waste from the plant canteen can be used
as manure either after composting or by directly burying the manure at the base of the plant.
The selection of plant species for the development depends on various factors such as
climate, elevation and soil. The plants should exhibit the following desirable characteristic in
order to be selected for plantation.
The species should be fast growing and providing optimum penetrability.
The species should be wind-firm and deep-rooted.
The species should form a dense canopy.
As far as possible, the species should be indigenous and locally available
Species tolerance to air pollutants like PM10 & PM2.5, SO2 and NO2 should be
preferred.
305 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The species should be permeable to help create air turbulence and mixing within the
belt.
There should be no large gaps for the air to spill through.
Trees with high foliage density, leaves with larger leaf area and hairy on both the
surfaces.
Ability to withstand conditions like inundation and drought.
Soil improving plants (nitrogen fixing, rapidly decomposable leaf litter).
Attractive appearance with good flowering and fruit bearing.
Bird and insect attracting tree species.
Sustainable green cover with minimal maintenance
The green belt development plan is shown in Figure 9.1. Suggested trees species are given
in Table 9.2.
306 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
F IGURE 9.2 G REEN B ELT D EVELOPMENT P LAN

307 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 9.2: S UGGESTED T REES FOR P ERIPHERAL G REEN B ELT D EVELOPMENT

Sl.No.
Scientific Name
Standard Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Azadirachta indica
Mangifera indica
Cassia fistula
Syzygium cumini
Albizia lebbeck
Albizia procera
Leucaena leucocephala
Bauhinia variegata
Erythrina indica
Grevillea robusta
Butea monosperma
Ailanthus excels
Nyctanthes arbortristis
Emblica officinalis
Neem
Aam
Amaltas
Jamun
Sirish
Safed Sirish
Subabul
Kanchan
Dadap
Silver oak
Palash
Maharuk
Harsingar
Amla
Time when flowering fruiting

occurs
June-July
April-July
March-June
June-July
January-March
January-March
February-May
May-June
July-August
February-April
February-April
January-March
Throughout the year
January
9.6.6 EMP F O R S O C I O -E C O N O M I C E N V I R O N M E N T
The social management plan has been designed to take proactive steps and adopt best
practices, which are sensitive to the socio-cultural setting of the region. The proposed plant
envisages addressing the wider goal of environmental protection through a social investment
strategy for the communities around the proposed plant. By investing in social projects in the
neighboring community, seeks to increase the benefits to the local population and contribute
towards meeting communitys expectation of benefits from the project. In order to mitigate
the impacts likely to arise out of the proposed project and also to maintain good will of local
people, it is necessary to take steps for improving the social environment. Necessary social
welfare measures by the industry shall be useful in gaining public confidence depending on
local requirement.
The adequate measures are suggested for smooth functioning of the activities is given
below:
It is estimated that about 39 construction workers on average will be involved and

about 39 workforce including labours and office, security and managerial staff will be
required in operation phase. The manpower required for these activities should
preferably be employed from nearby villages so that avenues of employment will be
open to local people,
308 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Proposed plant will undertake social welfare programes for the betterment of the
Quality of Life of villages around in collaboration with the local bodies,
Job oriented skill training, courses will be organized through industrial/technical

training institutions for educational youth (both for male and female), like home need
appliances, tailoring, plumbing, light & heavy vehicles driving,
Enterprise social commitment of 2.5% of cost of the plant will be implemented in

nearby area.
9.6.7 H E A L T H , S AF E T Y & E N V I R O N M E N T M AN A G E M E N T
HAC shall adopt a practice of preventive and predictive maintenance. All the equipment in
the plant areas shall be inspected/ tested by an outside agency. The various safety
equipment and critical instrumentation provided on various equipments shall be inspected
and tested frequently to ensure their operability all the time. Beside, all the first aid fire
fighting devices shall also be inspected, tested and maintained by a competent third party
and kept all the time in ready to use condition. Occupational health of all the employees in
proposed plant area shall be regularly monitored by external physician. If any abnormality is
found, necessary treatment will be given immediately. Necessary history cards, records shall
also be maintained which will be up dated regularly.
To ensure prevention of occupational hazards is delineated below:
All pump motors shall be earthed.
Housekeeping of the plant shall be as per prescribed norms.
Floors, platforms, staircases, passages shall be kept free of any obstruction.
All safety measures shall be explained to the workers. They shall be periodically
trained and kept updated on the safety measures.
Dedicated supply of fire fighting water shall be available in the plant.
Only authorized persons shall be allowed inside the plant.
All instrument and safety devices shall be checked and calibrated during installation.
They shall also be calibrated, checked at a frequent interval. Calibration records shall
be maintained.
All electrical equipments shall be installed as per prescribed standards.

309 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
All the equipments of the plant shall be periodically tested as per standard and
results shall be documented. All equipments shall undergo preventive maintenance
schedule.
Proper Earthing shall be provided to each tank.
DG Sets would be available for emergency power supply backup.
In addition to fire hydrant system, nos. of fire extinguishers shall be installed at

different locations within premises.
Adequate ventilation arrangement will be provided for safe and better working in the
plant as per the standard.
Protection against lightning shall be taken care in the plant.
Precaution against ignition will be taken. Emergency response plans are developed.
A similar emergency response plan shall also be developed for the particular unit.
Safety Precautions
To prevent any spillage, accident and impacts of human health for safety measure will be
taken while handling the raw material and products:
Separate storage area for the raw material & product.
Solid raw material stored in separate storage area with proper identification labeling.
Liquid raw material is stored in suitable tanks at separate demarcated space.
Separate area for packing of the product.
Storage area with separate bunds for separate chemicals to contain any kind of
leakage and to avoid mixing of the chemicals in case of leakages.
Liquid raw material charging will be done with utmost care and by mechanical seal
type of pump to avoid any leakages.
Personal protective equipment (viz. dust mask, gloves, goggles & gum boots) are
being provided to the workers and plant operators.
Occupational health centre with male nurse is provided within the company premises.
First Aid kit has been provided at various locations within the plant.
310 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Fire hydrant has been installed within the premises.
Fire extinguisher has been provided at the vulnerable points within the premises.
Medical Check-up for workers and employee at pre-employment and periodical

stages.
EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES
The project will provide job opportunities to those people from adjoining areas during
construction and operation phase that fulfills the desired requirements on preferential basis.
9.6.8 E N E R G Y C O N S E R V A T I O N
At the proposed plant, the following energy conservation measures will be taken:
BOILERS
Clean burners, nozzles, strainers, etc.
Inspect oil heaters for proper oil temperature.
Close burner air and/or stack dampers when the burner is off to minimize heat loss
up the stack.
Improve oxygen trim control (e.g. -- limit excess air to less than 10% on clean fuels).
(5% reduction in excess air increases boiler efficiency by 1% or: 1% reduction of
residual oxygen in stack gas increases boiler efficiency by 1%)
Automate/optimize boiler blow down. Recover boiler blow down heat.
Use boiler blow down to help warm the back-up boiler.
Establish a boiler efficiency-maintenance program. Start with an energy audit and

follow-up, then make a boiler efficiency-maintenance program.
ELECTRICAL UTILITIES
Electricity Distribution System
Schedule operations to maintain a high load factor,
Shift loads to off-peak times,
Minimize maximum demand by tripping loads through a demand controller,
311 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Stagger start-up times for equipment with large starting currents to minimize load
peaking,
Use standby electric generation equipment for on-peak high load periods,
Correct power factor to at least 0.90 under rated load conditions,
Set transformer taps to optimum settings,
Check utility electric meter with your own meter,
Shut off unnecessary computers, lights, fans, printers, and copiers at night,
Motors
Properly size to the load for optimum efficiency. (High efficiency motors offer of 4 5% higher efficiency than standard motors),
Use energy-efficient motors where economical,
Use synchronous motors to improve power factor,
Check alignment of motors,
Provide proper ventilation (For every 10 oC increase in motor operating temperature

over recommended peak, the motor life is estimated to be halved),
Check for under-voltage and over-voltage conditions,
Balance the three-phase power supply. (An imbalanced voltage can reduce 3 - 5% in
motor input power),
Demand efficiency restoration after motor rewinding. (If rewinding is not done
properly, the efficiency can be reduced by 5 - 8%),
Drives
Use variable-speed drives for large variable loads,
Use precision alignment,
Check belt tension regularly,
Eliminate variable-pitch pulleys,
Use flat belts as alternatives to v-belts,

312 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Use synthetic lubricants for large gearboxes,
Eliminate eddy current couplings,
Shut them off when not needed,
Fans
Use smooth, well-rounded air inlet cones for fan air intakes,
Avoid poor flow distribution at the fan inlet,
Minimize fan inlet and outlet obstructions,
Clean screens, filters, and fan blades regularly,
Use aerofoil-shaped fan blades,
Minimize fan speed,
Use low-slip or flat belts,
Eliminate variable pitch pulleys,
Use variable speed drives for large variable fan loads,
Use energy-efficient motors for continuous or near-continuous operation,
Turn fans off when not needed.
Blowers
Use smooth, well-rounded air inlet ducts or cones for air intakes,
Minimize blower inlet and outlet obstructions,
Clean screens and filters regularly,
Minimize blower speed,
Use low-slip or no-slip belts,
Eliminate variable pitch pulleys,
313 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Use variable speed drives for large variable blower loads,
Use energy-efficient motors for continuous or near-continuous operation,
Turn blowers off when they are not needed,
Pumps
Operate pumping near best efficiency point,
Modify pumping to minimize throttling,
Adapt to wide load variation with variable speed drives or sequenced control of
smaller units,
Repair seals and packing,
Balance the system to minimize flows and reduce pump power requirements.
Cooling Towers
Control cooling tower fans based on leaving water temperatures,
Control to the optimum water temperature as determined from cooling tower and
chiller performance data,
Use two-speed or variable-speed drives for cooling tower fan control,
Turn off unnecessary cooling tower fans when loads are reduced,
Balance flow to cooling tower hot water basin,
Periodically clean plugged cooling tower water distribution nozzles,
Install new nozzles to obtain a more-uniform water pattern,
Optimize cooling tower fan blade angle on a seasonal and/or load basis,
Correct excessive and/or uneven fan blade tip clearance and poor fan balance,
Divert clean air-conditioned building exhaust to the cooling tower during hot weather,
Re-line leaking cooling tower cold water basins,
Check water overflow pipes for proper operating level.
Optimize chemical use,

314 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Consider side stream water treatment,
Restrict flows through large loads to design values,
Shut off loads that are not in service,
Take blow down water from the return water header,
Optimize blow down flow rate,
Automate blow down to minimize it,
Install interlocks to prevent fan operation when there is no water flow,
Establish a cooling tower efficiency-maintenance program. Start with an energy audit

and follow-up, then make a cooling tower efficiency-maintenance program.
Lighting
Reduce excessive illumination levels to standard levels using switching, delamping,

etc,
Aggressively control lighting with clock timers, delay timers, photocells, and/or
occupancy sensors,
Install efficient alternatives to incandescent lighting, mercury vapor lighting, etc,
Select lamps carefully with high power factor and long-term efficiency in mind,
Upgrade obsolete fluorescent systems to Compact fluorescents,
Consider day lighting, skylights, etc,
Consider painting the walls a lighter color and using less lighting fixtures or lower
wattages,
Use task lighting and reduce background illumination,
Re-evaluate exterior lighting strategy, type, and control. Control it aggressively,
Change exit signs from incandescent to LED.
DG Sets
Optimize loading,
315 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Use waste heat to generate steam/hot water /power an absorption chiller or preheat
process or utility feeds,
Use jacket and head cooling water for process needs,
Clean air filters regularly.
Miscellaneous
Meter any unmetered utilities. Know what is the normal efficient use. Track down
causes of deviations,
Shut down spare, idling, or unneeded equipment,
Make sure that all of the utilities to redundant areas are turned off - including utilities
like compressed air and cooling water.
9.6.9 N AT U R A L R E S O U R C E C O N S E R V A T I O N
At the proposed HAC plant, natural resource conservation will be adopted in the following
ways:
Effluent generated from the plant will be treated and reused/ recycled at the plant to
save the water resources,
Wastes like paper, plastic, packing and used oil, etc, generated from the proposed
plant, will be reused and recycled. Hazardous wastes, which can not be used for any
purpose will be sent to TSDF site at Haldia,
Energy conservation measures will be adopted to save the energy and avoid
wastage of energy under the policy of "energy saved is energy produced,"
9.6.10
Rain water harvesting system will be adopted to use rain water.

B E S T
M AN U F A C T U R I N G P R A C T I C E A N D S A F E P R A C T I C E
H A N D L I N G S T O R A G E , T R A N S P O R T AT I O N A N D U N L O A D I N G O F
H AZ A R D O U S C H E M I C A L S
FOR
THE
The Best Manufacturing Practice and Safe Practice for handling storage, transportation
and unloading of the Hazardous Chemicals, to be adopted at the proposed HAC plant are as
given below:
316 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
9.6.10.1 B E S T M AN U F A C T U R I N G P R A C T I C E S
The best manufacturing practice guidelines provide guidance for manufacturing, testing, and
quality assurance in order to ensure that desired quality of product has been produced
maintaining occupational health and safety. The best manufacturing practices for proposed
HAC plant are as given below:
Proposed HAC plant will maintain a clean and safety manufacturing area.
Safe working conditions in order to prevent minimize risk and safety.
Manufacturing processes will be clearly defined and controlled. All processes will be
validated to ensure consistency and compliance with specifications.
Manufacturing processes will be controlled, and any changes to the process will be
evaluated.
Instructions and procedures will be written in clear and unambiguous language.
Operators will be trained to carry out and document procedures.
Records will be made, manually or by instruments, during manufacture that the

demonstrated steps required by the defined procedures and instructions are in fact
taken and that the quantity and quality of the product was as expected. Deviations
will be investigated and documented.
Records of manufacture that enable the complete history of a batch to be traced are
retained in a comprehensible and accessible form.
9.6.10.2 S AF E P R A C T I C E S
At the proposed HAC plant, safety practices will be followed to minimize risk and same have
been discussed in Chapter 7 in details and summarized below:
A written process safety information document will be compiled for general use. The
document compilation will include an assessment of the hazards presented
toxicity/flammable information, Permissible exposure limits, physical hazard data,
thermal and chemical stability data, reactivity data, corrosivity data and information
on process and mechanical design.
The process design information in the process safety information compilation will
include P&IDs/PFDs; process chemistry; maximum intended inventory; upper and
317 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
lower limits, pressures, flows and compositions and process design and energy
balances.
Personnel engaged in handling of hazardous chemicals will be trained to respond in

an unlikely event of emergencies.
Safety measures in the form of Dos & Donts will be displayed at strategic locations
especially in Bangla and English language.
The plant will check and ensure that all instruments provided in the plant are in good
condition and documented.
Safe work practices will be developed to provide for the control of hazards during
operation and maintenance.
Personnel especially contractor workers at the plant will be made aware about the
hazardous substance stored at the plant and risk associated with them.
Predictive and preventive maintenance schedule will be prepared for equipment,

piping, pumps, etc. and thickness survey will be done periodically as per standard
practices.
Safety Communication/Motivation/Promotion will be implemented.
Safety education and training will be imparted to the workers available at the plant
area.
Necessary first aid facilities will be provided at the plant at strategic locations.
Occupational Health Centre will be established at the plant. Antidotes for all
hazardous chemicals will be available at occupational health center at the plant.
Workers engaged in handling of hazardous chemicals will be made aware of

properties of hazardous chemicals.
In the plant, precaution and instructions will be displayed at strategic locations in

Bangla and English Languages.
Adequate ventilation will be provided in the work floor environment.
The work environment will be assessed and monitored regularly as local ventilation is
most effective method for controlling dust and gaseous emissions at work floor.
318 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Safe operating procedures will be available for mostly all hazardous materials,
operations and equipment.
The workers will be informed of consequences of failure to observe the safe

operating procedures.
Work permit system will be followed at the plant.
Records for near-miss, incidents and accidents will be maintained and analyzed to
take precautionary measures. There is no reportable accident in past years at the
plant.
At the plant, safety audit will be carried out by the Audit team comprising of safety
professional, technical services, maintenance and process personnel.
Necessary fire protection facilities will be provided at the plant
Adequate numbers of fire extinguishers will be provided in production area.
Easy availability of fire extinguishers and trained personnel will be insured to operate
extinguishers.
All equipment and storage tanks/containers of flammable chemicals will be bounded

and earthed properly.
The workers will be made aware about the hazards associated with manual material
handling.
Communication system including public address system will be provided.
The system will be initiated for checklist based routine safety inspection and internal
audit of the plant. Safety inspection team will be formed from various disciplines and
departments.
Predictive and preventive maintenance schedule will be followed in religious manner.
Colour coding for piping and utility lines will be followed in accordance with IS:
2379:1990.
Before entering the tankers and trucks engaged in the transportation of hazardous
materials to the plant, Registration certificate for transportation of hazardous
materials, driving license to drive vehicles carrying hazardous materials, fitness
319 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
certificate, valid National permit, TREM Card, Insurance papers, will be checked
before allowing to enter the plant premises:
Electrical Hazardous and safety will be properly managed at the proposed plant.
Electrical earth pits will be cleaned, covered and maintained in good condition.
9.7
O C C U P AT I O N AL H E A L T H & S A F E T Y
9.7.1 D E T A I L S O F O C C U P A T I O N A L H E A L T H P R O G R AM
For manufacturing of Phenol Formaldehyde (PF) Resin,
Melamine Formaldehyde (MF)
Resin, Urea Formaldehyde (UF) Resin, Furan Resin, Catalyst Acid base and Catalyst Ester
base, hazardous chemical like Phenol, Formalin, Caustic Soda, Para Toluene Sulphonic
Acid (PTSA), Para Toluene Sulphonic Acid (PTSA), Caustic Potash, Para Formaldehyde,
Urea, Melamine, Furfural Alcohol, Silane, Tri Acetine, Ethylene Glycol Diacetate (EGDA),
Dibasic Ester (DBE), Ethylene Dichloride (EDC), Dipentine, Phosphoric Acid, Tri Sodium
Phosphate (TSP), Ammonia, Mono Ethylene Glycol (MEG), Borax, Phthalic anhydride,
Sulphuric Acid, hydrofluoric acid, Ammonium bi-fluoride, will be stored and handled at the
proposed plant. The workers at the proposed plant will be exposed directly or indirectly by
these chemicals. Necessary mitigation measures will be adopted to handle and storage of
chemicals within Threshold Limit Values (TLV)/ Permissible Exposure Levels as per ACGIH
recommendation. The risk mitigation measures will be taken to keep these chemicals within
PEL/TLV.
The workers will be evaluated and examined concerning their exposure to chemicals during
pre-placement and periodical medical monitoring annually. Liver Function Tests (LFT) during
pre-placement and periodical examination annually will be carried.
9.7.2 O C C U P AT I O N AL H E A L T H S U R V E I L L A N C E P R O G R AM M E
Workers can be directly or indirectly exposed by chemical like phenol, formaldehyde,

sodium hydroxide, melamine during process or material handling.
Chemical have TLV like phenol: 5 ppm, formaldehyde: 0.3 ppm, sodium hydroxide: 2
mg/m3 and Phenol 25 mg/m3.
HAC will take the following actions to keep chemicals within Permissible Exposure
Limit (PEL)/ Threshold Limit Value (TLV).
Process will be carried out in closed system.
Dilution ventilation/local exhaust ventilation system will be provided.

320 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Chemicals will be handled by competent person
MSDS of hazardous substance must be maintained by company.
Quantity of substance should kept to absolute minimize
Flame proof electric fitting should be provided.
Safety devices like temp. Control and pressure control must be provided to
vessel
Labeling and sign board should be provided.
Fire fighting, sprinkling system and emergency exit should be provided.
PPE must be used during handling of chemicals.
9.7.3 E V AL U A T I O N O F E X P O S U R E O F C H E M I C A L D U R I N G P R E - P L A C E M E N T A N D
PERIODICAL MEDICAL MONITORING
Emergency /exposure examination and test should be carried out. Examination is

based on irritation, sensitization of skin, respiratory system, eye, shortness of breath.
Test must be carried out as per handling of chemicals as per OSHA guideline.
Check the previous medical opinion of worker/employee as well as history.
9.7.4 L I V E R F U N C T I O N T E S T S (LFT) D U R I N G P R E - P L A C E M E N T A N D P E R I O D I C A L
E X AM I N AT I O N
The liver function test (LFT) is blood test that gives an indication of whether the liver is
functioning properly. The test is also very useful to see if there is active damage in the liver
(hepatitis) or sluggish bile flow (Cholestasis).
It is also important to remember that diagnosis of liver disease depends on the combination
of patient history, occupational exposures, physical examination, laboratory testing, biopsy
and sometimes imaging studies such as ultrasound scans, and etc.
There is Occupational exposure to some industrial solvents may be associated with
hepatocyte injury, while some epoxy resin hardeners can cause cholestasis. Granulomatous
hepatitis and hepatoportal sclerosis (non-cirrhotic portal hypertension) may also occur from
occupational exposure to chemicals.
There are so many tests covered in LFT. They are as below with their normal values.
AST (Aspartate Aminotransferase)
: 5-40 iu/l
ALT (alaninie aminotransferase)
: 5-35 iu/l
ALP (alkaline phosphatase)
: 30-85 imu/ml
GGT (gamma-glutamyl transpepdiase)
: 5-27 u/l
321 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Total Serum Protein
: 6-8g/dl
Albumin
: 3.2-4.5g/dl
Total Serum Bilirubin
: 0.1-1.0mg/dl
Indirect Bilirubin
: 0.2-0.8 mg/dl
Direct Bilirubin
: 0.1-0.3 mg/dl
Urine Bilirubin
: Negative
Interpretation and follow up of the test is varying with clinical context and results. If there are
minor abnormalities in the test, the repetition of the test may conduct after 1 week of test
result. If test values are within the range, the repetition of the test may conduct after the one
year of the test result. If there are chronic abnormalities seen in the results, the repetition of
the test may conduct twice in a week and also consult with the doctors.
9.7.5 D E T A I L S O F O C C U P A T I O N A L H E A L T H S U R V E I L L AN C E P R O G R A M M E
Aim:
Workplace injuries, illness can be prevented and hazard should be identified.

Evaluation of accident analysis due to unsafe acts and condition as well as identified
the health and safety problems in workplace.
Effective Preventive measures strategies can be prepared.
New technologies, educational activities, public awareness and regulatory and policy
changes can be achieved
Mission:
The overall mission of the Occupational Health Surveillance Program is to promote the
health, safety and quality of life of working people will be achieved:
Surveillance program can be improved by following action.
Pre-placement examination and periodic examination must be carried out at

workplace.
Emergency/exposure examination and test should be carried out. Examination is

based on irritation, sensitization of skin, respiratory system, eye, shortness of breath.
Maintain the work profile and medical history of employee/workers.
Pulmonary function test must be carried out in case handling of formaldehyde.
Written medical opinion must be maintained by industry.

322 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Examination must be certify by qualified medical practitioners
9.7.6 T R E A T M E N T O F W O R K E R S A F F E C T E D B Y P H E N O L
The hazards of phenol are 2 fold. It is both a corrosive (can cause severe burns) and toxic
(absorbed phenol acts as a systemic toxin). In one case, death resulted from ingestion of as
little as 15 mL. Liquid phenol can penetrate the skin with efficiency approximately equal to
that of inhalation.
Phenol has an anesthetic effect and can cause severe burns that may not be immediately
painful or visible. The threshold concentration of human skin damage from phenol is 1.5%. It
can cause permanent eye injury and blindness.
Phenol poisoning requires immediate medical evaluation, in cases of significant phenol
ingestion (more than 1 g for adults) or symptomatic intoxication. It is necessary to establish
and maintain vital functions and establish vascular access.
Treatment includes the following: shock (fluids and dopamine), arrhythmias (lidocaine) and
convulsions (diazepam). Health personnel should use gowns and rubber gloves. Inhalation
of 100% oxygen is recommended. Intubate and assisted ventilation might be necessary.
Metabolic acidosis should be managed by 1 to 2 meq/kg of sodium bicarbonate.
Methemoglobinemia should be treated if greater than 30%, or in cases of respiratory
distress, with methylene blue 1 to 2 mg/kg of 1% solution, slowly i.v. If phenol is ingested,
avoid emesis, alcohol and oral mineral oil and dilution, because they may increase
absorption. Gastric lavage is usually not recommended. Immediate administration of olive oil
and activated charcoal by small bore nasogastric tube is necessary.
9.8
CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT POLICY
Hindusthan Adhesive & Chemicals is committed to continual improvement of its

Environmental Management System (EMS) by adoption of appropriate pollution prevention
measures and complying with all relevant environmental legislation / regulations through
training, teamwork and procedures as implemented from time to time.
The salient features of Corporate Environment Policy are as given:
After commissioning of the proposed plant, HAC will have a well laid down
Environment Policy approved by its Partners.
323 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
The Environment policy will prescribe for standard operating process/procedures to

bring into focus any infringement /deviation/ violation of the environmental or forest
norms / conditions.
The Environment Policy will prescribe for standard operating process /procedures to
bring into focus any infringement/ deviation/ violation of the environmental or forest
norms /conditions.
The company will have system of reporting of non-compliances / violations of

environmental norms to the Board of Directors of the company and stakeholders at
large.
9.9
E N T E R P R I S E S O C I AL C O M M I T M E N T ( ESC)
Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC) is becoming an increasingly important activity to

businesses nationally and internationally.
As globalization accelerates and large
corporations serve as global providers, these corporations have progressively recognized

the benefits of providing ESC programs in their various locations. ESC activities are now
being undertaken throughout the globe.
Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC) can be viewed simply as a collection of good citizen
activities which shall not be taken as compulsion from Govt. rather it should be done
generously to improve the structure of society. There are several issues due in the society
for necessary work on it but there are limitations too, for both industries and Govt. However,
whatever is possible for anybody to contribute toward social responsibility he must do.
The HAC management has allocated 2.5 % amount of the total project cost.
The rationale for ESC has been articulated in a number of ways. In essence it is about
building sustainable businesses, which need healthy economies, markets and communities.
Annual ESC plan for 3 years in the beginning is given below:
Annual ESC Plan for Next 5 Years: The total cost of the project is Rs 9.15 Crores.
Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC) considering 2.5 % of project cost has been allocated
as Rs 0.23 Crores for 5 years. Total provision of Rs. 23 Lakhs has been kept under ESC
Plan for next 5 years.
324 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
T ABLE 9.3: P RESENT A SPECTS O F F UND ALLOCATIONS F OR ESC ACTIVITIES

BUDGETORY ALLOCATION OF ESC FUNDS FOR 5 YEARS
Sl
Particulars
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3
Year 4 Year 5
No
(in Lac (in Lac (in Lac
(in
(in Lac
INR)
INR)
INR)
Lac
INR)
INR)
1
Annually about 1 General 0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
Medical
camps
with
medicines
(per
camp
average 20-25 person)
2
Annually about 2 Special 0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
Camps (Eye/Heart Camps)
3
2 Computers for 2 Schools 0.5
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
in nearby villages
4
Financial assistance for 1
1
1
1
1
meritorious students for
schooling
&
Higher
Education for the financially
weak families.
5
Supporting self-help group 0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
by
providing
Sewing
machines and providing
training in relevant courses.
6
Construction of 1 Bus 1
0.5
shelter
7
Provision of Drinking water 1
1
1
1
1
facilities (Deep Bore well)
8
Providing Tube wells in 0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
nearby villages (4 Nos in
each year)
9
Promotion
of
cultural 0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
programmes
4.3
4.3
Total
5.7
4.8
4.3
9.10
TOTAL
(in Lac
INR)
2.5
2.5
0.9
5
2.5
1.5
5
2.5
1
23.4
B U D G E T A R Y P R O V I S I O N S F O R EMP I M P L E M E N T AT I O N
Adequate budgetary provisions have been made by HAC management for implementation
environmental management plan. The HAC will invest Rs. 50 Lakhs (Around 5% of total
project cost) as capital investment towards implementation of Environmental Management
Plan. The details of total capital and recurring (per annum) for EMP is illustrated in following
Table 9.4.
325 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
1.
T ABLE 9.4: B UDGETARY P ROVISIONS F OR EMP

Estimated Capital
Cost in INR
(Lakhs)
Air Pollution Control
6
2.
Environmental Monitoring & Management
3.
Water Environment
1.5
4.
Noise Pollution Control
0.25
5.
Waste Management
0.5
6.
Effluent Treatment Plant
14
1.6
7.
Green Belt Development
1.2
8.
Occupational Health & Safety
1.5
50
7.95
Sl. Heads
No.
Total
9.11
Recurring Cost
Per Annum
(Lakhs)
0.4
CONCLUSIONS
The pollution control measures will be an important integral component of the proposed
plant. The synthetic resin manufacturing plant is not quit prone to air pollution due to fugitive
emissions are confined within the plant premises. The HAC management will spend about
5% of its capital cost towards environmental management & peripheral development plan.
Diligent water management practices, water conservation measures like recycling, reuse of
wastewater will help to achieve the discharge norms and water harvesting practices will
considerably reduce the ground water use.
After the completion of the project with implementation of EMP, it is expected that there will
be considerable reduction of the pollution level after implementation of the EMP. It will also
take up plantation in subsequent years in available vacant land which will not only protect
the ecosystem of the region but also further improve the ecology of the area.
HAC as a responsible company will take up some good work in peripheral development
including green belt development, health facilities, etc. The HAC will also earmark about 2.5
% of the total cost of the project towards the Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC) and
socio-economic development activities.
326 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
CHAPTER 10
ADDITIONAL STUDIES
327 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
C HAPTER 10: A DDITIONAL S TUDIES

10.1
R & R AC T I O N P L A N S
The proposed project is going to come up on 1.34 acres area (The project site located at
Dag no. 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328, 328/477, 329, 356). The proposed expansion project
is planned to be set up within the purchased plot, therefore critical issues such as land
acquisition, compensation, rehabilitation and resettlement are not involved in the proposed
project.
10.2
PUBLIC CONSULTATION
M/s Hindusthan Adhesives & Chemicals requested West Bengal Pollution Control Board
(WBPCB) for conducting public hearing for proposed Synthetic Resin Plant (12000 TPA) at
Village - Ishwaripur, Bandipur Gram Panchayat, PS - Khardah, District - 24 Parganas
(North), State - West Bengal. As per EIA notification S.O 1533 dated 14th Semptember 2006
of the MoEF & CC, Govt. of India, Public Hearing to be conducted for obtaining
Environmental Clearance.
Public Hearning was conducted by West Bengal Pollution Control Board (WBPCB) on 23rd
February 2016 at 12.00 Noon at the proposed site, 24 Parganas (North), State - West
Bengal. The public hearing was chaired by Shri B. K. Dhar, WBCS (Exe.), Additional District
Magistrate (LR), North 24 Parganas.
Sri S. Ganguly, Environmental Engineer, WBPCB briefed the audience about the modalities
and significance of the public hearing which is part of the Public Consultation process under
EIA Notification 2006.
Shri B. K. Dhar, WBCS (Exe.), Additional District Magistrate (LR), North 24 Parganas
welcomed the audience and gave a brief introduction about the proposed project and its
probable impact on the environment.He then requested the project proponent to explain
aspects of the environmental impact assessment study for discussion among the panel
members and others present in the hearing.
Representative of SGS India Pvt. Ltd. on behalf of M/s Hindusthan Adhesives & Chemicals
explained in details of proposed Synthetic Resin manufacturing unit including the proposed
pollution control systems through power point presentation. He explained the location
details, raw material required, basic requirements like water, fuel etc. for the proposed
project, environmental impacts that may occur and also the mitigative measures. He also
328 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
mentioned the baseline status of air, noise, water, soil quality, ecological & socioeconomic
status of the 10 km study area. He further elaborated on the steps to be taken for developing
the society through activities under Corporate Social Responsibility of the company.
Additional District Magistrate (LR), North 24 Parganas requested the audience to raise their
questions and opinions regarding the proposed expansion project.
The discussions of the panel members and public with respect to the proposed project are
described below:
Sl.No. Issues Raised in Public Hearing
1.
Response by M/s Hindusthan

Adhesives & Chemicals
Janab Sk. Sharif Hossain of village Project proponent assured the local
Ishwaripur
welcome the project
and residents that they will strictly comply
requested Project proponent to initiate all with

possible
measures
to
the
prevailing
environmental
mitigate norms by installing properly designed
environmental pollution arising out of pollution control equipments.

project activities.
2.
Shri.
Janab
Jahangir
Ali
of
village Project proponent assured the local
Ishwaripur requested project proponent to residents that they will give priority to
ensure that no pollution occurs from local people for employment in the
process activities of proposed project and proposed unit.
priority should be given to local people for
employment in project activities.
3.
Shri. Janab Mujibar Rahaman of village Assistant Environmental Engineer of

Ishwaripur welcome the proposed project WBPCB requested project proponent
with hope that the same will lead to to
initiate
immediate
action
for
economic development of the surrounding implementation of proper rain water

area and further generation of local harvesting
employment.
He requested project proponent to initiate
extensive plantation activity immediately
and ensure that the CSR commitments
are fulfilled.
facility
within
project
premises in order to minimise usage of

ground water. He further requested PP
to start extensive plantation program
within
project
premises
giving
emphasis on planting of saplings of

local plant species.
329 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No. Issues Raised in Public Hearing
Response by M/s Hindusthan

Adhesives & Chemicals
PP assured the local residents that
they will fulfil all CSR commitments.
In general, the public present in the public hearing welcome the proposed project provided
the project proponent should address the issues discussed in the public hearing.
Finally Sri. B.K. Dhar, WBCS (Exe.), Additional District Magistrate (LR) thanked the
gathering for their active participation in the hearing and concluded the session.
330 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
331 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
CHAPTER 11
DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT
332 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
C HAPTER 11: D ISCLOSURE OF C ONSULTANT

Project Proponent: M/s Hindustan Adhesives & Chemicals
Project Name
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT FOR PROPOSED
SYNTHETIC RESIN MANUFACTURING UNIT AT ISHWARIPUR, 24 PARGANAS

(NORTH), WEST BENGAL
CONSULTANT: SGS India Private Limited, a member of SGS (Socit Gnrale de
Surveillance), is one of the pioneers in providing Inspection, Testing, Certification and
Consultancy services to the trade in India.
SGS is represented in more than 140 countries, by 210 affiliated companies. Vast network of
companies yields more than 2,000 offices (39,000 employees) that maintain over 340
laboratories. SGS is recognized globally for analytical and technical excellence in
environmental assessment. This undisputed reputation is based upon an exceptional record
of progressive growth and development by continuing to exceed the standards of most fullservice environmental laboratories. SGS India was founded in 1950 and has expanded
Environmental Services and resources at Gurgaon, Bangalore, Ahmedabad, Chennai and
Kolkata. The growth of SGS India Private Limited is a prodigy of SGSs strength and
experience, designed to fulfill the necessary demands of our Clientele by keeping abreast
with ever-changing environmental standards.
This report is released for the use of M/s Hindustan Adhesives & Chemicals, Regulators and
relevant stake holders solely as a part of the subject projects Environmental clearance
process.
Information provided (unless attributed to referenced third parties) is otherwise copyrighted
and shall not to be used for any other purpose without the written consent of SGS.
333 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
PROJECT DETAILS
NAME OF
PUBLICATION
M/S HINDUSTAN ADHESIVES & CHEMICALS

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT FOR PROPOSED
SYNTHETIC RESIN MANUFACTURING UNIT AT ISHWARIPUR, 24
PARGANAS (NORTH), WEST BENGAL
PROJECT NUMBER
IN/ES-EIA/2014-95
V ERSION
1.1
R ELEASED
M ARCH
2016
CONTACT DETAILS
SGS India Pvt Ltd

226 Udyog Vihar, Phase I,
Gurgaon- 122016, Haryana, India
Phone: +91 124-6776434, 6776434(Direct)
Mobile: +91 8588813317
Fax: +91 124 6776403/04
DISCLAIMER
SGS has taken all reasonable precautions in the preparation of this report as per its auditable
quality plan. SGS also believes that the facts presented in this report are accurate as on date it
was written. However, it is impossible to dismiss absolutely, the possibility of errors or
omissions. SGS therefore, specifically disclaim any liability resulting from the use or application
of the information contained in this report. The information is not intended to serve as legal
advice related to the individual section.
334 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
DISCLOSURE AS PER NABET /QCI

Details as per Schedule of EIA Notification 2006, as amended till date
Sector No.
21
Schedule as per EIA
5 (f)
notifocation 2006
Category
NABET Sector No.
SGS is accredited with NABET /QCI to undertake (21 - Synthetic

Organic Chemicals) Projects
DECLARATION BY EXPERTS CONTRIBUTING TO THIS REPORT

I, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed
this Report.
EIA Sector Number
as per NABET
21
Name of Sector as
per NABET
Synthetic
organic
chemicals
industry (dyes & dye intermediates;
bulk drugs and intermediates
excluding
drug
formulations;
synthetic rubbers; basic organic
chemicals, other synthetic organic
chemicals
and
chemical
intermediates)
EIA COORDINATOR
Name
Vinod Gautam
EIA Co-ordinator
Period of involvement
From: July 2014 Ongoing
335 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
FUNCTIONAL AREA EXPERTS (FAE)

Functional Areas
Name of the
Expert
Involvement (Period &

Task)
Water Pollution
(WP), Ecology and
Biodiversity (EB)
and Solid
Hazardous Waste
(SHW)
Abhik Saha
Period of Involvement: July

2014 Ongoing
Landuse (LU),
Geology (Geo) and
Hydrogeology (HG)
and Noise
MS Bhaskar
Air Pollution
Monitoring &
Control (AP), Air
Quality Modeling
and Prediction (AQ)
Dr. Sankalp
Anand
Socio-Economics
(SE)
Suchitra Bisen
Signature & Date
Tasks: Site visit for primary

and
secondary
data
collection, discussion with
client and Forest officials etc.
and preparation of relevant
sections in the EIA report.
2014 Ongoing
Task: Site visit for primary
and
secondary
data
collection, ground truthing,
discussion with client and
preparation
of
relevant
sections in the EIA report.
2014 April 2015
Tasks: Project and client
coordination; site visit for
identification of ambient air
quality, meteorology, traffic
and noise location, discussion
with client and preparation of
relevant sections in the EIA
report.
2014 Ongoing
Tasks: Site visit for primary
and
secondary
data
collection, discussion with
client and revenue officials,
sarpanch etc. and preparation
of relevant sections in the EIA
report.
336 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Functional Areas
Name of the
Expert
Involvement (Period &

Task)
Risk and Hazard

Assessment (RH)
Vinod Gautam

2014 Ongoing
Signature & Date
Tasks: Risk modeling and

preparation of management
plan.
Soil Conservation
(SC)
Dr. Asish
Chakraborty
Period
of
Involvement:
January 2015 Ongoing
Tasks: Soil quality analysis
and
preparation
of
management plan.
Land use (LU) and

Hydrogeology (HG)
Dr. Rajkumar
Kaliyan

2014 Ongoing
Tasks: Site visit for collection
of primary and secondary
data and preparation of
relevant baseline section in
the EIA report.
Air Pollution
Monitoring &
Control (AP), Air
Quality Modeling
and Prediction (AQ)
Sumit kumar
Das
Period
of
Involvement:
December 2014 Ongoing
Tasks: Involvement of air
quality sampling locations
finalization,
collection
of
secondary data and as a part
of EIA team.
337 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Declaration by the Head of the Accredited Consultant Organization:

I, Sanjeev Kumar, hereby, confirm that the above-mentioned experts prepared the EIA
Report for the proposed sysnthetic resin manufacturing unit at District 24 Pargana (North)
in West Bengal.
I also confirm that SGS India Pvt. Ltd. shall be fully accountable for any mis-leading
information mentioned in this statement.
__________________________
Name: Sanjeev Kumar
Designation: Head - Environment, Health and Safety
Name of the EIA Consultant Organization: SGS India Pvt. Ltd.
338 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
QCI-NABET ACCREDITATION CERTIFICATE SGS INDIA PVT. LTD.
339 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
APPENDICES
340 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
A PPENDIX 1: N ATIONAL A MBIENT A IR Q UALITY

S TANDARDS
Sl.No.
Pollutants
Time
weighted
average
(1)
(2)
(3)
Sulphur
Dioxide
(SO2), g/m3
Annual*
24 hours**
50
80
20
80
Nitrogen
Dioxides
(NO2), g/m3
Annual*
24 hours**
40
80
30
80
Particulate
Matter (size
less than 10
m) or PM10
g/m3
Particulate
Matter (size
less than 2.5
m) or PM2.5
g/m3
Ozone (O3)
g/m3
Annual*
24 hours**
60
100
60
100
Annual*
24 hours**
40
60
40
60
- Gravimetric
- TOEM
- Beta attenuation
8 hours**
1 hour**
100
180
100
180
Lead (Pb)
g/m3
Annual*
24 hours**
0.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
Carbon
Monoxide
(CO) mg/m3
Ammonia
(NH3) g/m3
8 hours**
1 hour**
02
04
02
04
Annual*
24 hours**
100
400
100
400
- UV photometric
- Chemiluminescence
- Chemical method
sampling on EPM
2000 or equivalent
filter paper
- ED-XRF using Teflon
filter
- Non Dispersive Infra
Red (NDIR)
Spectroscopy
- Chemiluminescence
- Indophenol blue

Industrial,
Ecologically
Methods of
Residential,
Sensitive Area
Measurement
Rural &
(notified by
Other Areas
Central
Areas
Government)
(4)
(5)
(6)
- Improved West &
Gaeke
- Ultraviolet
fluorescence
- Modified Jacob &
Hochheiser (NaArsenite)
- Chemiluminescence
- Gravimetric
- TOEM
- Beta attenuation
341 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.No.
Pollutants
Time
weighted
average
Benzene
(C6H6) g/m3
Annual*
10
Benzo (a)
Pyrene
(BaP)Particulate
phase only,
ng/m3
Arsenic
(As), ng/m3
Annual*
Annual*
06
06
Nickel (Ni),
ng/m3
Annual*
20
20
11
12

Industrial,
Ecologically
Methods of
Residential,
Sensitive Area
Measurement
Rural &
(notified by
Other Areas
Central
Areas
Government)
method
05
05
- Gas chromatography
based continuous
analyzer
- Adsorption and
desorption followed by
GC analysis
01
01
- Solvent extraction
followed by HPLC/GC
analysis

sampling on EPM
2000 or equivalent
filter paper

sampling on EPM
2000 or equivalent
filter paper
*Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken twice a week 24
hourly at uniform interval
**24 hourly/8 hourly/ 1 hourly monitored values, as applicable, shall be complied with 98% of
the time in a year. 2% of the time, they may exceed the limits but not on two consecutive
days of monitoring.
342 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
A PPENDIX 2: D RINKING W ATER S TAND ARDS (IS 10500:

2012)
Sl.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Parameter
Color, Hazen units, max

Odour
pH value
Taste
Turbidity NTU, max
Total Dissolved solids mg/l, max
Aluminium (as Al), mg/l, Max
Ammonia (as total ammonia-N), mg/l,
Max
Anionic detergents (as MBAS) mg/l,
Max
Barium (as Ba), mg/l, Max
Boron (as B), mg/l, Max
Calcium (as Ca), mg/l, Max
Chloride (as Cl), mg/l, Max
Copper (as Cu), mg/l, Max
Fluoride (as F) mg/l, Max
Free residual chlorine, mg/l, Min
Iron (as Fe), mg/l, Max
Magnesium (as Mg), mg/l, Max
Manganese (as Mn), mg/l, Max
Nitrate (as NO3), mg/l, Max
Phenolic compounds (as C6H5OH),
mg/l, Max
Selenium (as Se), mg/l, Max
Sulphate (as SO4) mg/l, Max
Sulphide (as H2S), mg/l, Max
Total alkalinity as calcium carbonate,
mg/l, Max
Total hardness (as CaCO3),mg/l, Max
Zinc (as Zn), mg/l, Max
Cadmium (as Cd), mg/l, Max
Cyanide (as CN), mg/l, Max
Lead (as Pb), mg/l, Max
Mercury (as Hg), mg/l, Max
Molybdenum (as Mo), mg/l, Max
Requirements
(Desirable Limits)
5
Agreeable
6.5 to 8.5
Agreeable
1
500
0.03
0.5
Permissible Limit in
the absence of
alternative source
15
Agreeable
No relaxation
Agreeable
5
2000
0.2
No relaxation
0.2
1.0
0.7
0.5
75
250
0.05
1.0
0.2
0.3
30
0.1
45
0.001
No relaxation
1.0
200
1000
1.5
1.5
1
No relaxation
100
0.3
No relaxation
0.002
0.01
200
0.05
200
No relaxation
400
No relaxation
600
200
5
0.003
0.05
0.01
0.001
0.07
600
15
No relaxation
No relaxation
No relaxation
No relaxation
No relaxation
343 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Sl.
No.
33
34
35
36
37
38
Parameter
Nickel (as Ni), mg/l, Max

Polychlorinated biphenyls, mg/l, Max
Polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons
(as PAH), mg/l, Max
Total chromium (as Cr), mg/l, Max
E. coli or thermotolerant coliform
bacteria
Total coliform bacteria
Requirements
(Desirable Limits)
0.02
0.0005
0.0001
0.05
Not detectable (in
100 ml sample)
Not detectable (in
100 ml sample)
Permissible Limit in
the absence of
alternative source
No relaxation
No relaxation
No relaxation
No relaxation
---
344 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
A PPENDIX 3: A MBIENT A IR Q UALITY S TANDARDS IN

RESPECT OF N OISE
Area Code
Category of Area/Zone
A
B
C
D
Industrial Area
Commercial Area
Residential Area
Silence Zone
Limits in dB(A) Leq

Day Time
Night time
75
70
65
55
55
45
50
40
Note:1. Day time shall mean from 6.00 am to 10.00 pm.

2. Night time shall mean from 10.00 pm to 6.00 am.
3. Silence zone is an area comprising not less than 100 metres around hospitals,
educational institutions, courts, religious places or any other area which is declared as such
by the competent authority.
4. Mixed categories of areas may be declared as one of the four above mentioned
categories by the competent authority.
*dB(A) Leq denotes the time weighted average of the level of sound in decibels on
scale A which is relateable to human hearing.
A "decibel" is a unit in which noise is measured.
"A", in Db (A) Leq, denotes the frequency weighting in the measurement of noise and
corresponds to frequency response characteristics of the human ear.
Leq: It is energy mean of the noise level over a specified period.
345 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
Annexure
346 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
A PPENDIX 1: P HOTOGRAPHS OF THE PR OPOSED PLANT

AREA
347 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
A NNEXURE 2: D ECLARATION REGARDING L ITIGATION
348 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
A NNEXURE 3: G ROUND WATER PERMISSI ON
349 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
350 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
A NNEXURE 4: A DVERTISEMENT FOR P UBLIC H EARING
351 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
A NNEXURE 5: MOM OF P UBLIC H EARING
352 | P a g e

WEST BENGAL
353 | P a g e

11042016UNOBJAKOFINALHACEIA

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

11042016UNOBJAKOFINALHACEIA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FINAL EIA REPORT

WHEN YOU NEED TO BE SURE

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT FOR PROPOSED SYNTHETIC RESIN

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT FOR PROPOSED SYNTHETIC RESIN

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT FOR PROPOSED SYNTHETIC RESIN

CHAPTER 2: PROJECT DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................. 54

Project Details ...................................................................................................................................................... 54

CHAPTER 3: DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT......................................................................................... 100

Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 100

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT FOR PROPOSED SYNTHETIC RESIN

Land Environment.............................................................................................................................................. 103

CHAPTER 4: ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES ............................. 178

Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 178

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT FOR PROPOSED SYNTHETIC RESIN

Resultant Noise Level ........................................................................................................................................ 200

CHAPTER 5: ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES ...................................................................................................... 214

Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 214

CHAPTER 6: ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME .......................................................................... 219

Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 219

CHAPTER 7: RISK ANALYSIS AND DISASTER MANANGEMENT PLAN........................................................... 226

Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 226

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT FOR PROPOSED SYNTHETIC RESIN

Mock & Fire Drill ................................................................................................................................................. 270

CHAPTER 8: PROJECT BENEFITS ....................................................................................................................... 290

CHAPTER 9: ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN...................................................................................... 293

CHAPTER 10: ADDITIONAL STUDIES .................................................................................................................. 328

R & R Action Plans............................................................................................................................................. 328

CHAPTER 11: DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ................................................................................................. 333

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT FOR PROPOSED SYNTHETIC RESIN

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT FOR PROPOSED SYNTHETIC RESIN

American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists

American Public Health Association

American Society for Testing and Materials

American Water Works Association

Air Pollution Tolerance Index

Below Detection Level

Bureau of Indian Standards

Biological Oxygen Demand

Chemical Oxygen Demand

Central Pollution Control Board

Environmental Impact Assessment

Environmental Management Plan

Effluent Treatment Plant

Ground Level Concentration

Geographic information system

Geographical Positioning System

High Density Poly Ethylene

High Speed Diesel

Health Safety & Environment

Indian Council of Agricultural Research

Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health

Industrial Source Complex Short Term

International Safety Rating System

International Union for Conservation of Nature

Light diesel oil

Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change

Material Safety Data Sheet

Mean Sea Level

Metric Ton Per Annum

National Accreditation Board of Education and Training

National Accreditation Board for Testing and Calibration Laboratories

National Remote Sensing Centre

Occupational Safety and Health Administration

Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbon